Genex U-Net User Guide (PDF) - en

GENEX U-Net
V300R008C00
User Guide
Issue
01
Date
2012-08-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
About This Document
About This Document

This document provides the guides for installing and using the GENEX U-Net.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
GENEX U-Net
V300R008C00
Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is network plan engineers.
Change History
01 (2012-08-10)
This is the first release of V300R008C00.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes.
Content
Description
1.3 Main Window of the U-Net
The content descriptions are changed.
2.3 Installing a License

Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps
Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a
Single-Mode Network
Parameters for Viewing Capacity
Simulation Results of a Single-Mode
Network
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

ii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
About This Document
Content
Description
3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas

Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in
a Single Snapshot
Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI
Planning Results
5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers
7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results
6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports
Analysis
New.
6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report

Analysis Group
6.11.2 Geographically Displaying
Measurement Report Analysis Results
6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a
Measurement Report Analysis Group
6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically
Displaying Measurement Report Analysis
Results
Parameters for Viewing the Properties of
Lines
Parameters for Setting the Cost231
Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Related
Hata Propagation Model
Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of an
Entire Network
Simulation Results of a Single User
Simulation Results of the Entire Network
8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station
Template
8.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results
Setting Parameters for TRXs in GSM Cells
Delete.
Parameters for Setting Parameters of TRXs in

a GSM Cell
Whole document
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
The content of the document is optimized.

iii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
About This Document
Organization
1 Introduction to the U-Net
The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks.
It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network.
For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and
UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTEFDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete
the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization.
2 Installing the U-Net Software
This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the UNet, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by
the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you
can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall
it.
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network
environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating base
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the
neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and
evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements.
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning
The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual
network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating
base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters
and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on
network planning in different scenarios.
5 GSM Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell
parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your
network planning requirements.
6 UMTS Network Planning
The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and
scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to
meet you network planning requirements.
7 CDMA Network Planning
This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports
only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

iv
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
About This Document
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning

The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the
hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS
network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements.
9 FAQ
This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net.
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions
The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming
in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display.
11 Acronyms and Abbreviations
This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
About This Document
Convention
Description
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

vi
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
About This Document
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

vii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Introduction to the U-Net.............................................................................................................1
1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 System Structure.................................................................................................................................................4
1.3 Main Window of the U-Net................................................................................................................................5
2 Installing the U-Net Software...................................................................................................14

2.1 Preparation for the Installation.........................................................................................................................15
2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program..................................................................................................................16
2.3 Installing a License...........................................................................................................................................19
2.4 Starting the U-Net.............................................................................................................................................21
2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program.............................................................................................................22
3 LTE-FDD Network Planning....................................................................................................23

3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning..........................................................................................................25
3.2 Creating a Project.............................................................................................................................................27
3.3 Importing Geographic Data..............................................................................................................................28
3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic Data....................................................................................................28
3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly...........................................................................32
3.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files Manually.................................................................................34
3.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution Level.......................................................................36
3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data.....................................................................................37
3.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer Parameters.............................................................................................................39
3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.............................................................................40
3.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode.............................................................................................42
3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects..........................................................................................................................43
3.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic Data..............................................................................................50
3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands............................................................................................................62
3.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation Models...............................................................................................62
3.4.2 Configuring Propagation Models............................................................................................................66
3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models................................................................................................................68
3.4.4 Setting Bands...........................................................................................................................................69
3.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation Models...........................................................................................70
3.5 Adding a Device...............................................................................................................................................93
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

viii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
3.5.1 Importing Antenna Data..........................................................................................................................93

3.5.2 Setting Antennas......................................................................................................................................97
3.5.3 Setting a TMA.........................................................................................................................................99
3.5.4 Setting Feeders......................................................................................................................................100
3.5.5 Creating Base Stations...........................................................................................................................100
3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas.........................................................................................................101
3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................103
3.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................104
3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service Types..........................................................................................................105
3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.................................................................................................................107
3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal Types........................................................................................................109
3.6.5 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................110
3.6.6 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................113
3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................115
3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................116
3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................116
3.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................117
3.7.3 Setting an LTE-FDD Base Station Template........................................................................................119
3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................121
3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................122
3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................122
3.7.7 Setting LTE-FDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................124
3.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters...................................................................125
3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................150
3.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction.............................................................................................................150
3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................156
3.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................158
3.8.4 Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups..................................................................................................159
3.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................161
3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................162
3.8.7 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................164
3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................167
3.8.9 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................171
3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.............................................................................174
3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.................................................................................................................174
3.8.12 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Prediction.....................................................................................177
3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................181
3.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Capacity Simulation.............................................................................................181
3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps...................................................................................................................192
3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group.....................................................................................................195
3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result...............................................................................................197
3.9.5 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches...............................................................................205
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

ix
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.......................................................................206

3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters.....................................................................................................230
3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................230
3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................235
3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................237
3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................245
3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells......................................................................................................248
3.10.6 Interface Reference to LTE-FDD Network Parameter Planning.........................................................253
4 LTE-TDD Network Planning..................................................................................................273

4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning........................................................................................................275
4.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................277
4.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................278
4.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................278
4.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................278
4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................279
4.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................279
4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types..........................................................................................................280
4.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver Types........................................................................................................282
4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type...................................................................................................284
4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................286
4.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station Template........................................................................................287
4.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................289
4.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters...................................................................290
4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................307
4.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction...........................................................................................307
4.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction Group..............................................................................................316
4.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................317
4.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................318
4.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................318
4.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................318
4.8.9 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................319
4.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database Data..................................................................................................319
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.......................................................................319

4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................321
4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters....................................................................................................321
4.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................322
4.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................322
4.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................322
4.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................322
4.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic Planning.............................................................................................................322
5 GSM Network Planning.......................................................................................................... 324

5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning................................................................................................................326
5.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................329
5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters....................................................................................................................330
5.6.1 Setting MOS..........................................................................................................................................330
5.6.2 Setting GSM Service Types..................................................................................................................331
5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.........................................................................................................................333
5.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal Types................................................................................................................335
5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters..........................................................................................................................336
5.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS Template...............................................................................................................337
5.7.4 Creating a Base Station Automatically..................................................................................................338
5.7.5 Creating a Repeater...............................................................................................................................338
5.7.7 Setting GSM Cell Parameters................................................................................................................339
5.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE Parameters...........................................................................340
5.8 GSM Prediction..............................................................................................................................................346
5.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction...................................................................................................346
5.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction Group........................................................................................................354
5.8.5 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................355
5.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................356
5.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning Results..........................................................................................................357
5.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................361
5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning ..................................................................................................................361
5.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................361
5.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................362
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

xi
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.........................................................................................................363

5.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................................................364
5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning...........................................................................................368
5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups...............................................................................368
5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells..............................................................................370
5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................372
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................374
5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................374
5.11 TSC Planning................................................................................................................................................375
5.11.1 Planning TSC.......................................................................................................................................376
5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result....................................................................................................377
5.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...................................................................................380
5.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................381
5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning..........................................................................................382
5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning..............................................................................................................382
5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result..............................................................................383
5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...........................................................384
5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.......................385
5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect...................................................................................386
6 UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................................387

6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning.............................................................................................................389
6.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................392
6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters..................................................................................................................393
6.6.1 Setting MIMO Types.............................................................................................................................393
6.6.2 Setting UMTS Service Types................................................................................................................394
6.6.3 Setting UMTS Receivers.......................................................................................................................397
6.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal Types.............................................................................................................398
6.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................400
6.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................400
6.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer Table.................................................................................................................401
6.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category Table................................................................................................402
6.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category Table..............................................................................................403
6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters........................................................................................................................404
6.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.................................................................................................405
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

xii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents

6.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell Parameters.............................................................................................................407
6.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE Parameters.........................................................................408
6.8 UMTS Prediction............................................................................................................................................415
6.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction.................................................................................................415
6.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction Group......................................................................................................423
6.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning Results.......................................................................................................426
6.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................431
6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells...............................................................................................................431
6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network..........................................................................433
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.........................................................434
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network...................................................436
6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration..................................................................437
6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning...............................................................................................................444
6.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code Planning................................................................................444
6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network.............................................................446
6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration................................................................448
6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis........................................................................................................452
6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group................................................................................452
6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results....................................................453
6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis............................................................................................455
6.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Basics.......................................................................................455
6.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.................................................................................456
6.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.....................................................457
6.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion Results.................................................................................459
6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................460
6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.............................................................................461
6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells............................................................................462
6.13.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................465
6.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................467
6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................468
6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes............................................................................468
6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes ...........................................471
6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results........................................472
6.13.9 Parameters for Setting Bands..............................................................................................................472
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

xiii
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.....................................................473

6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.........................475
6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.......................................................475
6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results...........................478
6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion Results........................................................479
7 CDMA Network Planning.......................................................................................................482

7.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning............................................................................................................484
7.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................487
7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters.......................................................................................................................487
7.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station Template...............................................................................................488
7.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell Parameters............................................................................................................489
7.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE Parameters........................................................................490
7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning...............................................................................................................494
7.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells......................................................................................................496
7.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................497
7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning.............................................................................................................................501
7.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN Codes.............................................................................................................501
7.8.2 Planning PN Codes................................................................................................................................502
7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results....................................................................................................502
7.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes..........................................................................................505
7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning..........................................................................................506
7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.......................................................................................................506
7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.............................................................................507
7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes.................................................................507
7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.............................................................................508
7.9.5 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells....................................................510
7.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations...................511
7.9.7 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................512
7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results........................................................................512
8 Multi-Mode Network Planning..............................................................................................514

8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning.....................................................................................................516
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

xiv
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents

8.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................519
8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network...............................................................................520
8.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service Types........................................................................................................520
8.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal Types.....................................................................................................522
8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters...............................................................................................................523
8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template.......................................................................................524
8.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell Parameters.....................................................................................................526
8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network........................................................................................526
8.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..............................................526
8.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network...................................................531
8.8.6 Exporting Planning Results...................................................................................................................533
8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..........................534
8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network...................................................................................536
8.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode Network........................................................................538
8.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................539
8.9.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................543
9 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................545
9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net............................................................547
9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website............547
9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area......................................................................548
9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007
..............................................................................................................................................................................550
9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains
Chinese Characters...............................................................................................................................................551
9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly...........................................................................................553
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly
..............................................................................................................................................................................554
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System....................................................555
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure......................................555
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

xv
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Contents
10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................................557

10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map.....................................................................................560
10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map...................................................................................................................561
10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points......................................................................................561
10.4 Querying the Legend Information................................................................................................................562
10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth...........................................................................................................563
10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties..................................................................................................................564
10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers..........................................................................................................567
10.8 Managing Table Windows............................................................................................................................568
10.9 Managing Docked Windows........................................................................................................................570
10.10 Managing the Explorer Window................................................................................................................571
10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs........................................................................................................572
10.12 Searching Sites and Cells...........................................................................................................................572
10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells............................................................................................................................573
10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon......................................................................................................................576
10.15 Printing Planning Results...........................................................................................................................577
10.15.1 Print Suggestions...............................................................................................................................577
10.15.2 Printing Maps....................................................................................................................................577
10.15.3 Customizing a Print Template...........................................................................................................578
10.16 Calibrating Propagation Models.................................................................................................................579
10.16.1 Importing DT Data............................................................................................................................579
10.16.2 Filtering DT Data...............................................................................................................................580
10.16.3 Filtering DT Data in Batches.............................................................................................................581
10.16.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CW Measurement Data............................................582
10.16.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation Model.............................................................584
10.17 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................585
10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.........................................................................585
10.17.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields...............................................................................................586
10.17.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations......................................................................................586
10.17.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties..................................................................................587
10.17.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Data...................................................................................590
10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties........................................................................................591
10.17.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data........................................................................................593
10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data..........................................................................596
10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information.................................................................................598
10.17.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation Models.................................................599
10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data..............................................................................................600
10.17.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points...........................................................602
11 Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................603
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

xvi
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Introduction to the U-Net
About This Chapter

The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks.
It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network.
For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology and
UMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTEFDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to complete
the initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization.
1.1 Overview
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic
information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan
the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage,
capacity, and quality.
1.2 System Structure
The U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS),
service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation,
parameter planning, and analysis result output.
This section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorer
window, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDD
network system is selected.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
1.1 Overview
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographic
information system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently plan
the network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage,
capacity, and quality.
Positioning
Figure 1-1 shows the position of the U-Net on the network.
Figure 1-1 Position of the U-Net on the network
Entity
Description
Probe
The Probe is a type of DT software developed by Huawei. It is used for

collecting air interface parameters on the wireless network. The DT data and
CW data collected by the Probe can be imported to the U-Net for calibrating
propagation models and comparing the actual network coverage and predicted
network coverage during network planning.
CME
The Configuration Management Express (CME) is used to configure and

manage the data of NEs.
U-Net
The U-Net is a type of network planning software developed by Huawei. It

supports the LTE-FDD, LTE-TDD, GSM, UMTS, and CDMA network
systems.
Product Features
The U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, a flexible software architecture,
an advanced geographic information system (GIS), rich data resources, and user-friendly GUIs.
These features enable network planning engineers to improve the work efficiency significantly.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Advanced LTE planning simulation technology

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The U-Net supports the planning of neighboring cells, frequency, Physical Cell ID (PCI)
codes, and Physical Random Access Channels (PRACHs). In addition, it provides
professional LTE network optimization by incorporating the rich experience and advanced
technologies of both Huawei and leading operators.
l
Advanced planning algorithms

The U-Net helps users flexibly perform co-planning of GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD
networks, thus appropriately making use of existing site resources. This accelerates the
product delivery and shortens the network deployment period.
Advanced semi-dynamic simulation technology

By providing high-accuracy network prediction, the U-Net helps to accurately estimate
network investment and provide a low-cost solution, thus effectively reducing the overall
costs of network deployment.
Powerful and easy-to-use network planning function

The U-Net provides mature algorithms for inter-RAT neighboring cell planning and easy
settings of planning parameters. This improves work efficiency effectively by reducing the
technical requirements on network optimization and ensures the quality of network
planning.
Application Scenario
The U-Net is applicable in network deployment, network optimization, and network expansion.
During the network deployment, the U-Net helps you to properly plan the engineering
parameters, neighboring cell data, and frequency data of the network, thus providing guidance
for the actual project implementation. During the optimization and expansion of the network,
the U-Net helps you to optimize the network parameters and verify the optimization by
comparing the network performance before and after the optimization.
Table 1-1 describes the functions provided by the U-Net.
Table 1-1 Functions provided by the U-Net in different scenarios
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Function
Description
Site
deployment
After the area for deploying a site is specified, the site can be quickly
deployed on the map by using the base station template. By performing point
analysis, the U-Net can analyze the altitude height and clutter height along
the profile of the propagation path to adjust the site deployment.
Propagation
model
calibration
The propagation model can be adjusted manually or automatically on the

basis of the CW data. The U-Net displays the model on the GIS to analyze
the error in the model-based calculation.
Network
parameter
planning
The U-Net helps users plan configuration parameters of the network, such
as parameters related to the neighboring cells, frequency, PCIs, PRACHs,
and TAs.
Prediction
The U-Net starts the prediction after importing the map and configuring
network data, service model, and propagation model. By analyzing the
prediction result, it evaluates the network performance.

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Function
Description
Capacity
simulation
After the traffic parameters are configured and the traffic map is set
according to the planning, the U-Net performs the simulation calculation
based on the traffic map. In capacity simulation, the U-Net analyzes the
throughput of the cell and the user. In addition, it analyzes the coverage of
common channels and traffic channels based on the specific network load
provided in the simulation calculation results.
Interaction
with the CME
You can obtain configuration parameters from the CME and then import
them to the U-Net for prediction and analysis. The analysis results provided
by the U-Net can be imported to the CME and then be delivered to the
network.
1.2 System Structure

The U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS),
service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation,
parameter planning, and analysis result output.
Figure 1-2 shows the software architecture of the U-Net.
Figure 1-2 Software architecture of the U-Net
The U-Net system consists of the following parts:

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Platform
This part provides the data management function and the basic common functions, such as
project management, GIS, NE modeling, service modeling, and propagation modeling. The
U-Net manages all the platform functions by using the project management function. In
addition, the project management function provides interfaces to support service functions
of different network systems.
System application
This part provides service functions for the actual network system, including parameter
planning, capacity simulation, prediction, and result analysis. The parameter planning
mainly involves the planning of neighboring cells, PCIs, frequency and PRACHs.

This section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorer
window, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDD
network system is selected.
Figure 1-3 shows the main window after you start the U-Net. Table 1-2 lists the items in the
main window.
Figure 1-3 Main window of the U-Net
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 1-2 Description of the main window

No.
Name
Description
Menu bar
Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu
Bar.
Standard toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to

projects. For details, see Standard Toolbar.
Task toolbar
Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related to

tasks. For details, see Task Toolbar.
Explorer window
Provides the entries to main operations using a navigation tree.

For details, see Explorer Window.
Event window
Displays the information about the progress of operation tasks

when the U-Net is running.
Map window
Displays the map.
System status bar
Displays the information about the system status.
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the U-Net provides the main menu of the system, which is organized based on
the main functions of the U-Net to facilitate your operations.
Table 1-3 describes the menu bar of the U-Net and the corresponding functions.
Table 1-3 Description of the menu bar
Main Menu
Description
File
Provides entries to operations related to project management

and print management. For details, see Table 1-4.
Edit
Provides entries for viewing analysis GUIs. For details, see

Table 1-5.
Window
Provides entries to common map-related operations. For

details, see Table 1-6.
Help
Provides entries to U-Net Help and license management. For

details, see Table 1-7.
Table 1-4 Description of the File menu
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Menu Item
Description
New
Create a project.
Open
Open an existing project.

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Menu Item
Description
Close
Close a project.
Save
Save the current project.
Save As
Save the current project as another one.
Print Setting
Set print properties.
Print Preview
Preview a print task.
Print
Start a print task.
Import Excel
Import existing planning data, such as base station data and

propagation model data.
Generate Template
Create an engineering parameter template.

1. Click Generate Template. In the displayed dialog box,
select a network type in the Select Network Type area.
2. Select required engineering parameters for the selected
network type in the Select Specific Parameters area and
select engineering parameters under the Site and
Transceiver nodes in the navigation tree.
3. Specify the export path and click Export. The settings are
saved as an engineering parameter template.
View the names of the five projects that are opened recently.
Recent File
This menu item provides shortcut operation entries to the five

projects.
Exit
Exit the U-Net.
Table 1-5 Description of the Edit menu

Menu Item
Description
Undo
Undo an operation.
You can undo the modifications in the GIS window. Note
that you can perform a maximum of three undo operations at
a time. You cannot undo the modifications in the property
window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Resource Usage
View the resource usage.
Show Grid Line
Whether to display grid lines.
Find
Search NEs.

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 1-6 Description of the Window menu

Menu Item
Description
Project Information
Display or hide the explorer window.
Standard Toolbar
Display or hide the standard toolbar.
Status Bar
Display or hide the status bar.
Event
Display or hide the event window.

When network planning, coverage prediction, or capacity
simulation is performed, the Event Viewer window
automatically docks at the lower left part of the main
window.
Legend
Display or hide the legend window.
Simulation Curve
Display or hide the capacity simulation process window.
Point Analysis Tool
Display or hide the point analysis window.
Table 1-7 Description of the Help menu

Menu Item
Description
Help Topics
View the U-Net Help.
Apply License for self
Apply for a license for yourself.
Apply License for others
Apply for a license for others.
View ESN
View the electronic serial number (ESN).
About License
View the remaining valid days of a license.
Update License
Update a license locally.
About U-Net
View the U-Net software information.
Standard Toolbar
You can click an icon on the standard toolbar to perform the corresponding project-related
operation quickly.
Figure 1-4 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 1-8 describes the icons shown in
Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 Standard toolbar
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
You can choose Window > Standard Toolbar and determine whether to display the standard toolbar.
Table 1-8 Description of the standard toolbar

Icon
Description
Create a project.
Open a project.
Save a project.
Perform a print task.
View the U-Net software information.
Task Toolbar
You can click an icon on the task toolbar to quickly perform the operations related to the map
and point analysis.
Figure 1-5 shows the icons on the task toolbar. Table 1-9 describes the icons shown in Figure
1-5.
Figure 1-5 Task toolbar
Table 1-9 Description of the task toolbar

Icon
Description
Calculate the path loss.
Forcibly calculate the path loss.
Stop calculating the path loss.
Start the point analysis.
Select a base station template.
Create base stations in batches.
Create a base station.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Icon
Description
Create a repeater.
Whether to display hexagons indicating cell coverage.
Select a rectangular area.
Center the map.
Refresh the map.
Select one item at a time.
Move a map.
Select a scaling.
Zoom in or zoom out on the map.
Zoom out on an area.
Measure the distance.
Draw a polygon.
Draw a line.
Draw a point.
Combine polygons.
Export a map to the Google Earth.
View detailed results.
For example, after performing the coverage prediction, you can select
a coverage prediction counter in the explorer window, click
, and
move the pointer to the map window to view detailed results of the
counter.
Draw a clutter analysis line.
Explorer Window
The Explorer window is in the left pane the main window. The Explorer window has four tab
pages: GEO, Data, Network, and Operation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

10
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 1-6 GEO tab page
Table 1-10 Description of the GEO tab page

Navigation Tree
Description
Special Polygons
Operation tasks related to special polygons.
Polygons
Operation tasks related to polygons.
Points
Operation tasks related to points.
Lines
Operation tasks related to lines.
Map
Operation tasks related to maps.
NOTE
In normal cases, if you select or clear the check box of a node in the navigation tree, the information about the
node is displayed or hidden accordingly in the GIS window. For example, if you select the check box of
Polygons as shown in
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
, polygons are displayed in the GIS window.

11
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 1-7 Data tab page
Table 1-11 Description of the Data tab page

Navigation Tree
Description
Propagation Models
Operation tasks related to propagation models.
CW Measurement
Operation tasks related to the CW measurement data.
Drive Test
Operation tasks related to the drive test data.
Antennas
Operation tasks related to antennas.
Antenna Groups
Operation tasks related to antenna groups.
Traffic Parameters
Operation tasks related to traffic parameters.
Traffic Map
Operation tasks related to traffic maps.
Figure 1-8 Network tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

12
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 1-12 Description of the Network tab page

Navigation Tree
Description
Site
Operation tasks related to sites.
Transceiver
Operation tasks related to transceivers.
Figure 1-9 Operation tab page
Table 1-13 Description of the Operation tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Navigation Tree
Description
Predictions
Operation tasks related to predictions.
Simulations
Operation tasks related to capacity simulation.
Neighbor Planning
Operation tasks related to neighboring cell planning.
LTE PCI Planning
Operation tasks related to PCI planning.
LTE PRACH
Planning
Operation tasks related to PRACH planning.
LTE Frequency
Planning
Operation tasks related to frequency planning.
LTE TAC Planning
Operation tasks related to TAC planning.
LTE Cell Planning
Operation tasks related to LTE cell planning.

13
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Installing the U-Net Software
About This Chapter

This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the UNet, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by
the installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then you
can use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstall
it.
2.1 Preparation for the Installation
Before installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met.
For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environment
components are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements.
2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program
This section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net main
program through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install the
U-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes.
This section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlled
by a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly.
2.4 Starting the U-Net
You can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. If
the prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted.
2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program
This section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

14
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.1 Preparation for the Installation

Before installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met.
For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environment
components are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements.
Hardware Requirements
Table 2-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC.
Table 2-1 Hardware requirements
Config
uration
Item
Recommended Configuration
Minimum Configuration
CPU
Intel dual-core 2.0 GHz
P3 1GHz
Memor
y
2 GB
512 MB
Hard
Disk
15 GB at least
1 GB at least
Monitor
1280 x 1024 resolution
1024 x 768 resolution
Miscell
aneous
DVD-ROM drive, mouse, and

keyboard
DVD-ROM drive, mouse, and

keyboard
Software Requirements
Table 2-2 lists the software requirements of the PC.
Table 2-2 Software requirements
Configurati
on Item
How to Obtain
Recommended
Configuration
Remarks
Operating
system (OS)
Microsoft Windows XP
Professional SP2 or higher
Mandatory
Environment
components
l Microsoft .NET
Framework4.0 or higher
Mandatory
l Microsoft Windows
Installer3.1 or higher
Operating
software
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Microsoft Office 2003 or

higher

Mandatory
15
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Configurati
on Item
How to Obtain
Recommended
Configuration
Remarks
GENEX UNet software

installation
package
l Download the software

package from http://
support.huawei.com.
l You have a user account

at http://
support.huawei.com and
have the permission to
download the GENEX UNet software installation
package.
Mandatory
l Obtain the GENEX UNet installation DVDROM.
l You have obtained the

GENEX U-Net software.
License
Contact Huawei technical

support engineers to obtain
the license.
Mandatory
2.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program

This section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net main
program through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install the
U-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes.
Prerequisites
NOTE
l The U-Net installation program is ready. The PC meets the installation requirements. For details, see 2.1
Preparation for the Installation.
l You have logged in to the operating system by using an administrator account because the U-Net software
must be installed by using an administrator account.
Context
The support website of Huawei provides the U-Net installation package. The installation
package is classified into four types.
l
If you use a 32-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet32 (exclude framework).
Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet32.
If you use a 64-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later than
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet64 (exclude framework).
Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet64.
Before installing the U-Net main program, you are advised to close all the running programs to
ensure successful installation of the U-Net main program.
This section takes a 32-bit operating system as an example to describe the installation procedure
of the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

16
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Download the installation package at the support website of Huawei.
Read the background information carefully and download the correct installation package.
Step 2 Double-click Huawei.UNet32.exe to display the setup wizard.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, select I accept the terms of the License Agreement.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the user information dialog box, enter the User Name and Company Name.
Step 7 Click Next.
Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, select the required feature components.
Step 9 Click Next.
Step 10 In the displayed dialog box, click Browse to set the installation path.
Step 11 After confirmation, click Install.
If you want to...
Then...
Display the Installer setup wizard Follow the prompts to install the software.
After the installation is complete, it is recommended that
you restart the PC. Then, perform Step 13 to check
whether the U-Net is installed successfully.
Display the .NET Framework
setup wizard
Follow the prompts to install the software.
Step 12 After the installation is complete, click Finish.

Step 13 Check whether the U-Net main program is installed successfully.
Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei GENEX > U-Net 3.8 to check whether the information
about the U-Net software exists.
If...
Then...
The U-Net software information exists
The U-Net main program is successfully

installed.
The U-Net software information does not

exist
Repeat Step 1 through Step 13 until the U-Net

main program is successfully installed.
Table 2-3 describes the structure of the U-Net installation folder generated after the U-Net main
program is installed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

17
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 2-3 U-Net installation folder structure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Directory
Description
Adjust
Saves rectification parameters for the radio propagation model.
Antenna
Saves antenna data.
config
Saves the configuration file.
CoMP
Saves the configuration parameters of the CoMP gain.
IRC
Saves the configuration parameters of the IRC gain.
iScript
Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM).
Measure
Report
Saves the configuration parameters for geographic display of MR data.
Data
Saves the default configuration parameters of the project.
Gis
Saves the default configuration parameters of the GIS.
NbrPlanning
Saves various parameter templates for neighbor cell planning.
License
Saves the license file.
Prediction
Saves the default configuration parameters of the prediction.
Propagation
Saves the default configuration parameters of the propagation model.
RF
Saves the parameter template for LTE Cell planning.
RuleStore
Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine
(JVM).
Simulation
Saves the default configuration parameters of the capacity simulation.
ToolInfo
Saves the interface configuration information for domain verification.
TSCPlannin
g
Saves the parameter template information for TSC planning.
NetEntity
Saves the related network information.
Network
Expansion
Saves the parameters for six-sector expansion of UMTS.
Help
Saves the Help files of the U-Net.
Resource
Saves the template files required by the U-Net.
Resources
Saves the resource files required by the U-Net.
Log
Saves operation logs.
Temp
Saves the calculation results of path loss,

prediction, and capacity simulation.

NOTE
The two folders are generated
only after the U-Net software
runs.
18
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End

This section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlled
by a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly.
Procedure
l
Apply for a license for yourself.

1.
In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for self. The Domain
Authentication dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1 Domain Authentication
2.
Enter the domain account information.
3.
Click OK.
NOTE
If the entered domain account is valid, the U-Net will automatically update the license.
4.
l
Apply for a license for others.

1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.

In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for others. The Offline License Application dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.

19
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 2-2 Off-line License Application
2.
In the displayed dialog box, set parameters. Table 2-4 describes the parameters.
Table 2-4 Parameters in the Off-line License Application dialog box
Parameter
Description
Set the save path of License file
Save path of the license file.
Input the ESNs of authorized computers
ESN of your PC.

NOTE
You can choose Help > View ESN in the
main window of the U-Net to learn the ESN.
Select tools and versions to authorize by

License
U-Net version for domain

authentication.
3.
Click Next.
4.
Enter the domain account information in the displayed Domain Authentication

dialog box.
5.
Click OK.
6.
After domain authentication succeeds, click Submit.

NOTE
After the license application succeeds, the U-Net automatically saves the license file to a
specified local path.
7.
Update a license locally.

a.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Update License. The Update
License dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3.
20
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 2-3 Update License
8.
b.
Click Browse, and choose the save path of the license file.
c.
Click Update License.
After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After loading the license, restart the U-Net and choose Help > About License to view the
remaining valid days of the license.
2.4 Starting the U-Net

You can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. If
the prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted.
Prerequisites
When the U-Net is running, the read and write operations are performed on the U-Net installation
directory. Therefore, you must have complete read and write rights to the installation directory
before starting the U-Net.
Select the folder where the installation directory resides, right-click, and then choose
Properties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, view the permission information
on the Security tab page.
Procedure
l
Double-click the U-Net 3.8 shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U-Net software.
Alternatively, you can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or by doubleclicking U-Net software installation path/Huawei.UNet.exe.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
If ...
Then ...
A correct license file is loaded
The U-Net is started.

21
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If ...
Then ...
No license file is loaded
A message is displayed, indicating that no license

file is loaded. Obtain the license file and then load
the license file. For details, see 2.3 Installing a
License.
After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.
An incorrect license file is loaded A message is displayed, indicating that the license
file is incorrect. Obtain the correct license file and
then load the license file. For details, see 2.3
Installing a License.
After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.
----End
2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program

This section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.
Context
The license file, log files, temporary files, and saved U-Net project files are retained when the
U-Net is being uninstalled.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs.
Step 2 Select U-Net 3.8.
Step 3 Click Uninstall/Change. The interface for uninstalling the U-Net main program is displayed.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select Remove, and click Next >. Then, click Uninstall.
Step 5 After the U-Net main program is successfully uninstalled, click Finish.
You can restart the PC as required.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

22
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
LTE-FDD Network Planning
About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual network
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as the
neighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, and
evaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements.
3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning
This section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net.
3.2 Creating a Project
This section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates for
different network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template.
Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,
UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.
3.3 Importing Geographic Data
You can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems.
You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importing
geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.
3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands
The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on a
propagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.The
method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems on
the U-Net is the same.
3.5 Adding a Device
You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method for
creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters
The U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of the
detailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Traffic
parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,
environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

23
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the traffic
parameters are defined before capacity prediction.
3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station template
to automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeaters
separately.
3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction
By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage and
channel quality.
3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation
Capacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is as
follows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map and
allocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overall
network performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Net
generates a statistical report.
3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters
You can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD network
through the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

24
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning

This section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net.
Figure 3-1 shows the process of LTE-FDD network planning.
Figure 3-1 Process of LTE-FDD network planning
Table 3-1describes the detailed information about Figure 3-1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

25
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-1 Description of the LTE-FDD network planning process

No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
For details, see 3.2 Creating a Project.
Importing
geographic data
You can import geographic data in various vector and

grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add
points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The
method for importing geographic data for different
network systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see
3.3 Importing Geographic Data.
Managing
propagation models
and bands
The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a

transmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model.
Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to
perform prediction.The method for setting propagation
models and frequency bands for different network
systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.4
Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
Adding a device
You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,

or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Setting traffic
parameters
Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services,

which are to be used during prediction.For details, see
3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters.
Setting NE
parameters
You can import existing base station data to create base

stations or use a base station template to automatically
create base stations. You can also create sites,
transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 3.7
Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters.
Calculating the path

loss
For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
Predicting network
performance
For details, see 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction.
Planning PCI/
frequency/
neighboring cells/
PRACH/TAC
For details, see 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network

Parameters.
10
Creating a traffic
map
For details, see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.
11
Performing
capacity simulation
For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.
Exporting network
planning results
For details, see Prediction and Neighboring Cell

Planning.
12
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
The planning results can be applied to NEs.
The capacity simulation results can be applied to

prediction.

26
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Context
l
Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds
to the network planning for an area or a city.
One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.
For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybrid
network.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Project Templates
Step 2 Select a project template.

l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select an
appropriate project template based on the actual network system.
l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. For
example, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to select
project templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks.
l LTE-TDD and CDMA do not support hybrid networking with other network systems.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Save a project file.

Choose File > Save or click
file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
to save all the information about the project in a project

27
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,
only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,
all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.
The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder for
saving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacity
simulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.
NOTE
Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in the
project name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.
Open an existing project file.

Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.
NOTE
Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.

3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic Data

This section describes the basic knowledge of the geographic data, such as data type, data format,
and coordinate system.
Geographic Data
The U-Net uses two types of geographic data for planning and analysis, that is, Digital Elevation
Model (DEM) data and Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data. Currently, the U-Net can import
geographic data files in Planet, Shape, MIF, or Vertical Mapper format.
The two types of geographic data are described as follows:
l
DEM data:
It is the data about the ground elevation, including the plane coordinates and the value of
the ground elevation.
DTM data:
It is the data about the altitude, including the plane coordinates and the value of the altitude.
The DTM data is similar to the DEM data. The difference is that the DEM data represents the
above-the-sea height, including the terrain height and the clutter height, whereas the DTM data
represents only the terrain height.
Geographic Data in Planet Files

Planet files save the data about the altitude, clutter class, clutter height, vector, point layer, and
geographic projection.
Table 3-2 shows the relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types. Each layer
corresponds to several Planet file types.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

28
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-2 Relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types
Planet File
Type
Layer Type
Description
Point Layer File
Text Layer (Point

Layer)
Point layer files save the identification data of each

typical land mark (such as a town).
Point layer files consist of the following types of
files:
l Index file: saves the geographic location
information about each land mark.
l Menu file: saves land mark numbers and
names.
l Text file: saves the information about a land
mark.
Vector File
Vector Layer
Vector files save the information about terrain

features such as roads, railways, streets, and
streams.
Vector files consist of the following types of files:
information about each vector.
l Menu file: saves vector numbers and names.
l Terrain feature file: saves the information
about each terrain feature.
The information about each terrain feature must
be saved in an individual vector file.
Clutter Height
File
Buildings Layer
(Layer of Clutter and
Building Heights)
Clutter height files consist of the following types

of files:
information about each binary data file.
l Binary data file: saves the clutter heights at
each geographic location on the map.
Clutter Class
File
Clutter Layer (Clutter

Class Layer)
Clutter class files consist of the following types of

files:
information about each clutter.
l Menu file: saves clutter class numbers and
names.
l Binary data file: saves the information about
the terrain (such as forests, lakes, flat open
areas, urban areas, and high buildings) for
calculating the path loss.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

29
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Planet File
Type
Layer Type
Description
Altitude File
Heights Layer
(Altitude Layer)
Altitude files consist of the following types of

files:
l Index file (ASCII text file): saves the
geographic location information about each
binary data file.
l Binary data file: saves the data about the height
(excluding the height of the building) above
the sea level of each geographic location in the
map.
Geographic
Projection File
Generally, the
geographic projection
file is stored in the
folder of altitude files.
The file name is
projection.
The geographic projection file is in .txt format. It

includes the required projection information, such
as the projection mode, information about the
ellipsoid, and information about the coordinate
offset.
Geographic Data in Shape Files

Shape files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features
in binary mode.
Shape file is a map file format developed by the ESRI company. Shape files save space data and
can be opened by using the ArcExplorer.
Shape files consist of .shp, .shx and .dbf files.
l
The .shp file saves the geographic data.
The .shx file saves the index information about the geographic data in the .shp file.
The .dbf (dBASE) file saves the feature information about each record.
Geographic Data in Vertical Mapper Files

Vertical Mapper file is a type of charting file for satellite remote sensing. Vertical Mapper files
save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features. The U-Net
supports the Vertical Mapper files in the same way as it supports the Planet files.
Vertical Mapper files consist of .grc files and .grd files.
l
The .grc file corresponds to the raster map with discrete values, such as the raster map of
clutter classes.
The .grd file corresponds to the raster map with continuous values, such as the raster map
of altitudes.
Geographic Data in MIF Files

MIF files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features
in ASCII format. MIF files can be imported to the U-Net and can be displayed on the U-Net as
a type of Shape data.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

30
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
MIF file is a map file format developed by the MapInfo company. MIF files can be used on all
the platforms supported by the MapInfo software.
MIF files consist of .mif files and .mid files.
l
The .mif file consists of the file header and the data.
The file header contains the information about projection and boundary.
The data contains all the space data records and the coloring scheme for each record.
The .mid file records the index information about the space data in the .mif file.
The .mid file is optional. Not all the MIF files have .mid files.
Geographic Data in .bil Files

l
The .bil files save the binary DEM data.
The .hdr file is the header file of a .bil file and saves the information about a .bil file such
as the number of bytes, storage mode, number of rows, and number of columns.
The save path of a .bil file must contain an .hdr file that has the same prefix name as the .bil
file.
Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format)

l
A .tab file in grid format specifies the table structure of map attribute data, including the
number of fields, field names, field types, field widths, index fields, and key space
information about corresponding layers.
The save path of a .tab file in grid format must contain the .grc or .grd file specified in
the .tab file.
You can open a .tab file in .txt format and query the name of the .grc or .grd file specified
in the .tab file.
Geographic Data in .tab Files (Vector Format)

l
The .tab file in vector format is a type of map file developed by the MapInfo company.
The save path of a .tab file in vector format must contain the .dat, .id, and .map files that
have the same prefix name as the .tab file.
For example, the save path of the River.tab file must contain the River.dat, River.id, and
River.map files.Otherwise, the U-Net cannot successfully import the geographic data in
this format.
Coordinate Systems
This section describes the basic concepts about projection, ellipsoid, and coordinate systems.
Projection and Ellipsoid

A map or a geographic database is a flat representation of data collected from a curved surface.
A projection is a means for presenting all or part of a spheroid on a plane. The projection cannot
be done without distortion.
Therefore, you must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area, or shape) to be
presented accurately at the expense of the other characteristics or make a compromise between
several characteristics. Then, different projection methods are formed.
The ellipsoid is the pattern used to model the earth. It is defined by its geometric parameters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

31
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Classification of Coordinate Systems

To determine a geographic location, you need to identify the location by using coordinates. In
different coordinate systems, however, the coordinates for the same location are different.
Currently, the U-Net uses two types of coordinate systems, that is, the geodetic coordinate system
and the longitude/latitude coordinate system.
l
Geodetic coordinate system

Considering the Earth as a plane, you can create a right-angle coordinate system by taking
a point of the Earth as the origin, the east direction as the positive direction of the X-axis,
and the north direction as the positive direction of the Y-axis. All the points of the plane
are in the first quadrant of the coordinate system. Then, a geographic location can be
identified by a pair of coordinates (x, y). This pair of coordinates is called geodetic
coordinates. Geodetic coordinates are continuous values. The unit is meter.
Longitude/Latitude coordinate system

The spherical location can be identified by using the longitude/latitude coordinate system.
Values on the longitude and latitude coordinates are continuous.
The longitude of a point refers to the angle between the local meridian and the prime
meridian. The east of the prime meridian is the east longitude (180 degrees) and the
west of the prime meridian is the west longitude (180 degrees).
The latitude of a point refers to the angle between the normal line of the corresponding
geographic point on the ellipsoid and the equator. The north of the equator is called
north latitude (90 degrees) and the south of the equator is called south latitude (90
degrees).
3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly

This section describes how to import geographic data in planet format quickly. By using this
method, you can import multiple graphic layer files in batches at a time.
Prerequisites
l
In the digital e-map folder, there are one or more sub-graphic layer folders including
Text, Vector, Building, Clutter, and Heights.
After including complete file types, a sub-graphic layer can be automatically recognized
by the system and then successfully imported. For example, the Heights graphic layer must
include an index file and the corresponding binary file.For the file types included in each
graphic layer, see Geographic Data.
After a projection file is put in the Heights folder, it can be automatically recognized by
the system.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Step 3 Choose Quick Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

32
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-3 Quick Import
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a digital e-map folder.

Step 5 Click OK. The Import Map dialog box is displayed.
The system automatically recognizes and matches the data files in the digital e-map folder, as
shown in Figure 3-4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

33
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-4 Import Map Dialog Box
to modify the file path or reStep 6 Optional: You can select a parameter in Figure 3-4 and click
set the parameter.For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Geographic Data
in Planet Format.
Step 7 Click OK. The import of the geographic data is complete.
The imported map files are displayed in the map window. On the GEO tab page, you can also
choose Map > Sub-graphic Layer on the navigation tree to view the imported graphic layer
data.
----End
3.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files Manually

This section describes how to manually import each sub-graphic layer data file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

34
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type and the file to be imported.
CAUTION
Before selecting a file type, read the description in Table 3-3 carefully. Otherwise, you may fail
to import the file.
Table 3-3 Description of Sub-Graphic Layer File Types

Graphic Layer
Type
Available File Type
Description
Satellitic
(navigation map)
l .png
l When you select a .shp file, there must

be a .dbf file with the same prefix name
under the file path. Otherwise, you
cannot view geographic feature
information.
l If an Index file is selected, the folder
where the selected file is located must
contain other related files.For the files
included in each layer, see Geographic
Data in Planet Files.
l When you select a .bil file, there must
be a .hdr file with the same prefix name
under the file path. If you import a .bil
file in the Clutter layer, you need to
import a .mnu file with the same prefix
name.
l When you select a .tab file and
meanwhile import it in the Vector
layer, there must be .dat, .id, and .map
files with the same prefix name under
the file path. For details, see
Geographic Data in .tab Files
(Vector Format).
l If a TAB file is selected and the data is
imported to the clutter layer, the folder
where the selected file is located must
contain a GRC file. For details, see
Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid
Format).
l .bmp
l .jpg
Geometry
l .shp
l .mif
Text
Index File
Vector
l Index File
l .tab
Buildings
l Index File
l .bil
Clutter
l Index File
l .bil
l .grc
l .tab
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

35
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Graphic Layer
Type
Available File Type
Description
Heights
l Index File
l When you select a .tab file and

meanwhile import it in the Heights
layer, there must be a .grd file under the
file path. For details, see Geographic
Data in .tab Files (Grid Format).
l .bil
l .grd
l .tab
You can import .grc, .grd, .bil, .shp, and .mif files in batches.
Step 5 Click Open.
Step 6 If you import a data file of Satellitic layer, do as follows to set the geographic parameters.
1.
For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps.
2.
Click Import.
----End
3.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution Level

When geographic data in the calculation area has multiple resolution levels, you must select the
geographic data of a proper resolution level to ensure the accuracy of service planning.
Prerequisites
Multiple geographic data files are imported to the U-Net.
Context
On the U-Net, the geographic area for calculation is defined as follows:
l
If only one geographic data file is imported, the U-Net performs calculation based on only
the geographic area corresponding to this file.
If multiple geographic data files are imported, geographic data of multiple resolution levels
is available for the overlapped geographic area.
When geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for a geographic area, UNet selects the appropriate resolution level according to the display sequence of the
geographic data in the Clutter/Heights/Buildings layers.
This section describes how to select the appropriate resolution level in the Heights layer.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

36
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In this case, the overlapped geographic data has multiple levels of resolution. In this case, select
the geographic data of a proper resolution level for service calculation.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, click before Map > Heights to expand the node.
The imported geographic data is displayed under Heights.
Step 3 Drag the layer of a resolution level to be used as the data source to top.
----End
Example
For example, the geographic data of multiple resolution levels (from 5 m to 40 m) have been
imported to the Heights layer. If the geographic data of three resolution levels (5 m, 10 m, and
20 m) are available for a calculation area and you want to use the top resolution level (5 m), drag
the layer of 5 m to the top, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5 Heights layer
3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data

This section describes how to set the display parameters of various geographic data. The U-Net
enables you to set the color, the transparency, and the shading effect of clutters of different
heights to clearly and vividly display the geographic data.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

37
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The geographic data is imported.
Procedure
l
Set the display parameters of each layer.

This section takes the clutter layer as an example to describe how to set the display
parameters. The settings of the display parameters for other layers are similar to the settings
for the clutter layer. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Display
Parameters of Geographic Data.
1.
In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter > map name.
3.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-6.
The Clutter dialog box is displayed.
Figure 3-6 Properties
4.
Click the Display tab, and set the display parameters for each clutter.
NOTE
For the heights layer, you can set three-dimensional effect by moving the Contrast slider in
the lower left corner.
5.
Click OK.
After the setting is complete, the map window is refreshed automatically. Then, you
can view the refreshed window.
Display the heights layer in plastic mode.

1.
In the navigation tree, choose Map > Heights.
2.
Choose Relievo Style from the shortcut menu.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

38
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer Parameters

This section describes how to set radio propagation parameters for the clutter layer, such as
penetration loss, spatial multiplexing factor, and standard deviation of shadow fading. These
parameters can be used for coverage prediction and capacity simulation calculation.
Prerequisites
The geographic data has been imported.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Map > Clutter in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Clutter and choose Parameter
Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7 Clutter Parameters Display
Step 3 Set radio propagation parameters for each clutter.

l Actual Value tab page: displays the parameters related to the imported map.
l Default Value tab page: displays the default parameters when no map is imported.
For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

39
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data

On the U-Net, each project corresponds to only one projection mode and one type of spheroid
data. The projection mode and spheroid data have impacts on service analysis. This section
describes two methods for setting the projection mode and spheroid data.
Procedure
l
Use the projection mode and spheroid data in the Planet geographic data file.
Planet geographic data folder generally contains the geographic projection file. After Planet
geographic data is imported, the U-Net automatically identifies the projection mode and
spheroid data in the projection file. For details, see 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in
Planet Format Quickly.
NOTE
If the Planet geographic data folder does not contain the projection file or if the U-Net fails to identify and
import the projection file, set the projection mode and spheroid data by referring to the following
operations.
Use an existing projection mode and spheroid data in the coordinate system group.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Map.
3.
Choose Coordinate from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the dialog box displayed, select the projection parameters and spheroid data file.
For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems.
If...
Then...
The required
projection mode and
spheroid data are
available
1. Select a coordinate system group from the Find in

drop-down list.
2. Select a required file from multiple projection
configuration files in this group.
3. Click Apply.
The names of the current projection system and spheroid
data are displayed in the Current Coordinate Setting
window, as shown in Figure 3-8.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

40
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
The required
projection mode and
spheroid data are
unavailable
1. Select the favorite coordinate system group from the

Find in drop-down list.
If the existing coordinate system groups cannot meet
your requirement, click New Group to create a
required coordinate system group.
2. Click New. The Create dialog box is displayed.
3. Set parameters related to the projection mode and
spheroid data.
4. Click Create.
After the projection mode and spheroid data are
created, the Coordinate Systems dialog box is
displayed.
5. Select the new projection configuration file in the
dialog box.
6. Click Apply.
Figure 3-8 Coordinate Systems dialog box
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You must manually modify related parameters after setting the projection mode and spheroid
data.
1.
2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

41
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
4.
Set parameters related to the projection mode and spheroid data in the displayed dialog
box.
5.
Click OK.
3.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode

The U-Net supports four modes for displaying coordinates. You can select the proper display
mode of coordinates as required.
Prerequisites
Context
On the U-Net, information about the coordinates is displayed in the status bar and the ruler.
Table 3-4 describes the four display modes of coordinates.
Table 3-4 Display modes of coordinates
Display Mode
Meaning
Example
xy reference frame
Indicates the display mode of

geodetic coordinates.
442472.51
xxdxxmxx.xxsS
Indicates the display mode of

longitude/latitude
coordinates in the format of
xx degree.xx minute.xx
second.
1161945E
xx.xxxxxS
Indicates the ESWN display

mode of longitude/latitude
coordinates.
116.32E
-xx.xxxxx
Indicates the negative/

positive display mode of
longitude/latitude
coordinates.
116.32
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Step 3 Choose Map Setting from the shortcut menu.
If the geographic data is not properly imported, the right-click menu is not available.
Step 4 Select a proper coordinate display mode in Coordinate Style in the displayed dialog box.
BL Style Precision indicates the display precision of coordinates.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

42
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l When the coordinate display mode is xy reference frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, the value of
this parameter is 2 by default and cannot be changed.
l In other coordinate display modes, the value of this parameter is 6 by default and can be
changed as required.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects

You can either import or create vector objects, such as points, lines, and polygons. Vectors are
mainly used for display and service calculation. As a type of vector, polygons can be used as
filters, computation zones, and print zones.
Basic Knowledge of Calculation Areas

This section describes the relations between a created calculation area and the base stations that
are actually involved in the prediction.
Common Polygonal Areas

This section takes Figure 3-9 as an example.
Figure 3-9 Example of a calculation area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

43
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In Figure 3-9, the polygon drawn by users are in blue; the propagation area of each activated
base station is in green. Propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice
the cell radius.
The green areas that intersect with the blue rectangle are considered in the prediction. For
example, though sites 11 and 9 are not included in the polygon, they are considered in the
prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 10 and 8 are
not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the blue
rectangle.
Linear Polygonal Areas

This section takes Figure 3-10 as an example.
Figure 3-10 Example of a calculation area
In Figure 3-10, the lines drawn by users are in purple; the external polygon of the lines is in
blue and the width of the polygon is set by users; the propagation area of each activated base
station is in green. The propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twice
the cell radius.
The green areas that intersect with the blue polygon are considered in the prediction. For
example, though sites 4 and 2 are not included in the external polygon of the lines, they are
considered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle;
sites 0 and 3 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect
with the blue rectangle.
Importing and Exporting a Polygon

You can import polygon files in different formats, such as .xml, .mif, .tab, .kml, and .kmz. You
can also export an existing polygon from the system.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

44
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
To import a polygon represented by longitude/latitude, you must set the longitude/latitude
coordinate. For details, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.
Context
You can import an existing polygon or draw a new polygon.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Import
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported.
Step 5 Click Open and then import a polygon.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Export a polygon.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Polygons > a polygon.
3.
Choose Export from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box as shown in Figure 3-12, select a coordinate type and then
click OK.

45
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-12 Exporting Polygon dialog box
NOTE
If you have not set the coordinate system, Longitude / Latitude grays out.
5.
In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name., and then
export a polygon.
If...
Then...
Select the .mif format.
Two files are displayed under the saving path with the
suffix names of .mif and .mid.
The exported file contains projection information.
Select the .tab format.
Four files are displayed under the file path with the
suffixes of .id, .dat, .map, and .tab.
Select the .xml format.
An .xml file is displayed under the saving path.
Select the .kmz or .kml

format.
An .xml or .kml file is displayed under the saving path.

When you perform the operation in 4, select Longitude/
Latitude as the coordinate type. After that, the system can
export the polygon in such format.
Export polygons in batches.

1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the coordinate system and export type.
5.
Click OK.
6.
In the displayed dialog box, select a path to save the exported polygon files.
Drawing Polygons Directly

This section describes how to draw polygons. You can draw new polygons, or export and edit
the existing polygons.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

46
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add
Polygon from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click the workspace to add points to the polygon one by one.
l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line,
indicating that you are drawing this line.
l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating
that you have finished drawing this line.
l You can right-click to exit.
Step 3 Double-click the last point to finish the creation of the polygon.
In the displayed U-Net dialog box, the geographic area covered by the polygon is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
View the clutter statistics of a polygon.
After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.
Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter
statistics of this polygon.
Creating Polygons Based on Lines

This section describes how to create polygons based on lines. You can draw a line and create a
polygon based on the line.
Procedure
Step 1 Draw a line.
1.
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Add
Click
Line from the shortcut menu.
2.
Click in the workspace to draw a straight line or a polygonal line.

l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted
line, indicating that you are drawing this line.
l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating
that you have finished drawing this line.
l You can right-click to exit.
3.
Double-click the point where you want to finish the drawing.

NOTE
You can also click

on the toolbar to create an independent point. Alternatively, right-click in
the map window and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu.
4.
Optional: Move or delete a line.

Select a line in the map window and drag it to a new position.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

47
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Select a line in the map window and press Del to delete the line.
5.
Optional: Add, delete, or edit a point of a line.

Right-click a point of a line and choose Add Point, Delete Point, or Edit Point from the
shortcut menu to add, delete, or edit the point.
Step 2 Set the extended polygon of a line.

1.
2.
Choose Lines > A line in the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click the line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the width of the extended polygon in the Strip Width area.
The width ranges from 0 to 1000 meters.
5.
Click OK.
Two lines are automatically extended to Strip Width/2 away from the drawn line on the
two sides of the drawn line, and these lines form an extended polygon.
Alternatively, you can right-click a line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut
menu to set the extended polygon of the line.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
View the clutter statistics of a polygon.
After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.
Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutter
statistics of this polygon.
Editing Polygons
You can edit and combine polygons and modify their properties.
Procedure
l
Edit a polygon.
on the toolbar. The map window is selected.
1.
Click
2.
Edit a polygon.
If you need to...
Then...
Move a point
1. Select a point of a polygon.

2. Drag this point to a new position. Alternatively, rightclick the point and choose Edit Point from the shortcut
menu to change the coordinates as required.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

48
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Add a point to a side
1. Select a side.
2. Right-click a position on the side where a point needs
to be added.
3. Choose Add Point.
A point is added to the side.
Delete a point
1. Right-click a point in a polygon.

2. Choose Delete Point.
Move a polygon
1. Select a polygon.
2. Drag the polygon to a new position.
Delete a polygon
1. Select a polygon.
2. Press Del. Alternatively, right-click a polygon and
choose Delete Polygon from the shortcut menu.
If the polygon is referenced, for example it is
referenced by a vector-based traffic map, the system
prompts that the polygon cannot be deleted.
NOTE
l You can press Ctrl+Z, or choose Edit > Undo in the U-Net main interface to undo the
preceding operation.
l The modifications in the map window can be undone at most for three steps. The
modifications on the property page, however, cannot be undone.
Query and modify the properties of a polygon.

1.
Select a polygon in the map window.
2.
3.
Query and modify the polygon properties on various tab pages in the Polygon
Properties dialog box.
Query and modify the names of polygons on the Region Properties tab page.
Query and modify the point coordinates of polygons on the Points List tab page.
Query and modify the font color and character size on the Font tab page.
Query and modify the fill color and line color of polygons on the Color&Line tab
page.
4.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click OK.
Combine polygons.
1.
on the toolbar. Alternatively, click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,
Click
right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator from the shortcut menu.
2.
Select the polygons to be combined and the combination mode in the Polygon
Operator dialog box.

49
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.
If you need to...
Then...
Combine the overlapped

areas of multiple
polygons as a new
polygon
1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the

polygons to be combined.
Combine the
combination areas of
multiple polygons as a
new polygon
1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select the

polygons to be combined.
Exclude the overlapped

area of two polygons
from one polygon to form
a new polygon based on
the remaining area of this
polygon.
1. Select one polygon from the left area in the Current

Polygons window.
2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.
2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.
2. Select Exclude.
3. Select another polygon from the right area in the
Current Polygons window.
Click Run.
You can preview the polygon in the Preview area.
4.
Optional: Select the new polygon in the Output area. Click Rename to change the
name of the polygon.
After typing a new name, press Enter to change the name or Esc.
5.
l
Click OK. The combined polygon is displayed in the map window.
Set polygons in batches.

If you need to...
Then...
Modify the properties

of polygons in batches
1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.
3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.
4. Set the font, fill color, and line color of polygons in batches
in the Display dialog box.
Show/hide names of
polygons in batches

2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.
3. Choose Show/Hide All Polygon's Name from the shortcut
menu.
TIP
You can right-click a polygon in the map window and choose Show
Polygon Name from the shortcut menu to show/hide the name of the
polygon.
----End
3.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic Data

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for managing geographic data.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

50
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters for Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format

This section describes the parameters that are involved in the manual and quick import of
geographic data in Planet format. You can refer to this section when importing geographic data
in Planet format through the Import Map dialog box.
Parameter
Map File
Path:
Indicates
the path of
map files.
Description
Clutter
Indicates the file path of clutter-layer data.
Height
Indicates the file path of altitude-layer data.
Vector
Indicates the file path of vector-layer data.
Building
Indicates the file path of clutter-height-layer

data.
Projection
File Path:
Indicates
the path of
the
projection
file.
Projection Path
Indicates the path of the projection file.
Projection File Valid
Indicates whether the projection file is valid.
Projection
Parameter
Benchmark Longitude
Indicates the central longitudinal line in the

projection zone.
The default value is 117. The value range is
from 0 to 360.
The difference between the central
longitudinal line in the coordinate system
and the longitude of each site must be less
than 6 degrees.
Benchmark Latitude
Indicates the central latitudinal line in the

projection zone.
The default value is 0. The value range is
from -90 to 90.
The difference between the central
latitudinal line in the coordinate system and
the latitude of each site must be less than 6
degrees.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Offset in Y Direction
Indicates the offset in the Y direction.
Offset in X Direction
Indicates the offset in the X direction.
Projection
type
Projection type
Indicates the projection mode.
Spheroid
Spheroid
Selects a type of spheroid.

51
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps

This section describes the parameters for importing satellite maps. You can refer to this section
when importing satellite maps in the Import Satellite Map dialog box.
Parameter
Geographic
Information:
indicates the
settings related
to the position
of a satellite
map in the map
window.
Bound
Type
Description
Value
Indicates the boundary

mode.
If no geographic data is
imported, the value can only
be X/Y.
l Long/Lat indicates that

the coordinates at the
boundary are longitude/
latitude coordinates.
This option is available
only when geographic
data is imported.
l X/Y indicates that the
coordinates at the
boundary are geodetic
coordinates.
West
Indicates the western

boundary of a satellite map.
North
Indicates the northern

East
Indicates the eastern

South
Indicates the southern

NOTE
l The value of the eastern
boundary must be greater
than the value of the
western boundary; the
value of the northern
boundary must be greater
than the value of the
southern boundary.
l You can also drag the
preview graph in the map
window to change the
graph position.
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of The default value is 33%.

a satellite map.
Source File
Indicates the path of the

satellite map file.
Parameters for Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data

This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of geographic data. You
can refer to this section when setting the properties for displaying the Clutter layer, Heights
layer, Buildings layer, Vector layer, and geographic projection layer.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

52
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters in the Clutter Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the color of a

clutter.
The system maps the default

color of each clutter based on
the keyword. If the mapping
fails, the clutter color is blue
by default.
You can click Color of each
clutter to change the coloring
scheme.
Value
Indicates the name of a

clutter.
The value depends on the

geographic data.
Legend

clutter in the legend.

geographic data.
Add To Legend
Indicates whether to add the

coloring scheme of the clutter
class to the legend.
This option is not selected by

default.
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of

a layer.
The default value is 40%.
Parameter in the Building Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the color of a height

range.
By default, the system

supports 11 height ranges.
One height range
corresponds to one color. The
number of height ranges can
be any number from 2 to 225.
scheme.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Min Value
Indicates the minimum value

of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Max Value
Indicates the maximum value

of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Legend
Indicates the name of a height

range in the legend.
The name of a height range

consists of its maximum
value and minimum value.
Add To Legend

coloring scheme of the
altitude to the legend.

default.

53
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Transparency

a layer.
Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the color of a height

range.
By default, the system

supports 14 height ranges.
One height range
corresponds to one color.
Parameter in the Height Dialog Box

scheme.
Min Value
Indicates the minimum value

of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Max Value
Indicates the maximum value

of a height range.
The unit is meter.
Legend
Indicates the name of a height

range in the legend.
The name of a height range

consists of its maximum
value and minimum value.
Add To Legend

coloring scheme of the clutter
height to the legend.

default.
Transparency

a layer.
Contrast
Indicates the threedimensional display contrast.
The default value is 7.

NOTE
l If the slider is moved to
10, it indicates the
maximum contrast effect.
l If the slider is moved to 1,
it indicates there is no
three-dimensional effect.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

54
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters in the Vectors Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Value
Color
Indicates the line pattern and

color of each vector (such as
the street and railway) in
display.
The system maps the default

color of each clutter based on
the keyword. If the mapping
fails, the clutter color is
orange by default.
vector to change the coloring
scheme.
Legend
Indicates the name of a vector

in the legend.

geographic data.
Add To Legend

coloring scheme of the vector
layer to the legend.

default.
Parameter
Description
Value
Symbol
Indicates the pattern, color,

and size of a point layer.
You can click Symbol of

each point layer to change the
coloring scheme.
Legend
Indicates the name of a point

layer in the legend.

geographic data.
Add To Legend

coloring scheme of the point
layer to the legend.

default.
Parameters in the Text Dialog Box
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer

This section describes the parameters for setting the clutter class layer. You can refer to this
section when setting the clutter class layer parameters in the Clutter Parameters Display dialog
box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
Code
Indicates the number of a clutter

class.

geographic data.
Clutter Class
Indicates the name of a clutter

class.

geographic data.
Clutter Height
Indicates the height of a clutter.
The default value is 0 and the

unit is meter.

55
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Spatial Multiplex
Factor
Indicates the spatial

multiplexing factor.
Penetration Loss
Indicates the penetration loss.

unit is dB.
The penetration loss varies
according to the propagation
environment.
Model Standard
Deviation
Indicates the standard deviation

of the slow fading margin.

unit is dB.
The standard deviation varies
according to the propagation
environment.
Shadow Corr
C/(I+N)Standard
Deviation
Indicates the factor of shadow

fading.
The default value is 0.5.
Indicates the standard deviation

based on C/(I + N).

unit is dB.
The factor varies according to

the propagation environment.
Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems

This section describes the parameters for setting the projection mode and spheroid data. You
can refer to this section when setting the projection mode and spheroid data in the Coordinate
Systems dialog box.
Parameters in the Coordinate Systems dialog box

Parameter
Description
Value
Find in
Selects a coordinate
system group from the
drop-down list.
The default value is

favorite.
New Group
Creates a coordinate
system group.
The name of a coordinate

system group contains a
maximum of 248
characters including only
numerals, letters, and
underscores.
Click this button. The New

Group dialog box is
displayed. Enter the name
of the new coordinate
system group.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

56
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Delete Group
Deletes a coordinate
system group.
You can delete custom

coordinate system groups
but cannot delete
predefined coordinate
system groups. That is,
deleting favorite
coordinate system groups
is not allowed.
Name
Indicates the name of an

existing coordinate
system.
Projection
Indicates the projection

mode of a coordinate
system.
Spheroid
Indicates the spheroid data

of a coordinate system.
Region
Indicates a region.
The value is determined

by the projection mode
and spheroid data. You do
not need to set this
parameter.
Creates a coordinate
system.
For details about the

parameters, see
Parameters in the Create
dialog box.
List of existing
coordinate
systems in the
selected group
New
Click this button. The

Create dialog box is
displayed. Enter the name
of the new coordinate
system. Then, set the
project mode and spheroid
data.
Property
Checks the properties of

the selected coordinate
system.
Delete
Deletes the selected

coordinate system.
Parameters in the Create dialog box

Parameter
General
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Name
Description
Value

coordinate system.

NewSystem.

57
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Projection
Parameter
Benchmark
Longitude
NOTE
The projection
parameters
vary according
to the
projection
mode.
Description
Value
Indicates the central

longitudinal line in the
projection zone.

The value range is from 0
to 360.
NOTE
The difference between the
central longitudinal line in
the coordinate system and the
longitude of each site must be
less than 6 degrees.
Benchmark
Latitude
Indicates the central

latitudinal line in the
projection zone.
The default value is 0. The

value range is from -90 to
90.
NOTE
The difference between the
central latitudinal line in the
coordinate system and the
latitude of each site must be
less than 6 degrees.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Offset in Y
Direction
Indicates the offset in the Y

direction.
The default value is 0 and

the unit is meter. The value
range is from 0 to
1,000,000.
Offset in X
Direction
Indicates the offset in the X

direction.

500,000 and the unit is
meter. The value range is
from 0 to 600,000.
First Parallel
Indicates the first standard

latitudinal line.
Second
Parallel
Indicates the second

standard latitudinal line.
AzCentralLin
e
Indicates the azimuth of the

central line in the
projection.
RectifiedToS
kew
Indicates the rectified angle

of the oblique angle.
Longitude
Zone
Indicates the longitudinal

zone.

the value range is from 0 to
60.
Projection type
Projection
type
Indicates the projection

mode.
Spheroid
Spheroid
Selects a type of spheroid.

58
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Lines

This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of lines. You can refer to this
section when viewing the properties of lines in the Line Properties dialog box.
Table 3-5 Parameters on the Line Properties Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a line.

The default value is Line_*.
Show Line Name
Indicates whether to show the name of a line

in the map window.
By default, this option is selected.
Length(m)
Indicates the length of a line.

Unit: m.
Line Width(px)
Indicates the width of a line.

The default value is 2. The unit is pixel.
Line Type
Indicates the type of a line.
Line Color
Indicates the color of a line.
Comments
Indicates the comments on the line.
Table 3-6 Parameters on the Points List Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Point Type
Indicates the display mode of the coordinates

at the points of a line. The default value is X/
Y.
l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates.
l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as
longitude/latitude coordinates.
NOTE
If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/
Latitude is unavailable.
Indicates the X coordinate of a point.
Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.
Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Polygons

This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of polygons or viewing the
clutter information about polygons. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

59
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
of polygons in the Polygon Properties dialog box or viewing the clutter information about
polygons in the Clutter Statistics of XXX dialog box.
Parameters in the Polygon Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-7 Parameters displayed on the Region Properties tab page
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a polygon. The default

value is Polygon_Draw_*.
Show Polygon Information
Indicates whether to show the name of a

polygon in the map window. By default, this
option is selected.
Area
Indicates the area of a polygon. The unit is

square kilometer.
Comments
Indicates the comments on a polygon.
Table 3-8 Parameters displayed on the Points List tab page

Parameter
Description
Point Type
Indicates the display mode of the coordinates

at the points of a polygon. The default value
is X/Y.
l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates.
l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as
longitude/latitude coordinates.
NOTE
If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/
Latitude is unavailable.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Polygon Order
Indicates the number of a polygon. The

default value is 1. This parameter is set to 1
for simple polygons by default.
Indicates the X coordinate of a point.
Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.
Longitude
Indicates the longitude of a point.
Latitude
Indicates the latitude of a point.

60
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-9 Parameters displayed on the Font tab page

Parameter
Description
Color
Color.
Font
Font.
Size
Size.
Style
Style.
Example
Example of words.
Table 3-10 Parameters displayed on the Color&Line tab page

Parameter
Description
Color
Color for filling.
Transparency
Transparence.
Lines Color
Indicates the color of lines in a polygon. The

default color is blue.
Lines Type
Indicates the display mode of lines in a

polygon. The default value is solid.
Line Width
Indicates the display width of lines in a

polygon. The default value is 2 and the unit is
pixel.
Parameters in the Clutter Statistics of XXX Dialog Box
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
ID
Indicates the ID of a clutter class on the U-Net.
The value depends

on the geographic
data.
Clutter Class
Indicates the name of a clutter class.
The value depends

on the geographic
data.
Area(sq.km.)
Indicates the size of a clutter in the polygon.
The value depends

on the size of the
polygon and the
geographic data.
The unit is square
kilometer.

61
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Percent
Indicates the percentage of a clutter in the

polygon.
The value depends

on the size of the
polygon and the
geographic data.
The unit is %.

3.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation Models

Every propagation model provided by the U-Net is applicable to a certain situation, frequency,
and radio technology.
Table 3-11 describes the bands, required geographic data, factors, configuration requirements,
and application scenarios of propagation models.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

62
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-11 Characteristics of propagation models

Propagatio
n Model
Band
Cost-Hata
1500 MHz to
model
2000 MHz
(including the
Cost-Hata
HW model)
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
l Terrain
condition.
l Whether to
calculate the
diffraction.
1 km < Cell radius

< 20 km
l Clutter
statistics.
l A formula
corresponds
to a clutter.
l Limited by the
free space
loss.
l Loss in
municipal
areas.
Applicable to the
GSM1800,
UMTS, and LTE
technologies.
Not applicable to
highly populated
urban areas but
applicable to
common urban
areas, suburbs,
and villages. In
addition, the
antenna of the
base station must
be higher than the
surrounding
buildings.
Usually used for
prediction and
rarely used for
capacity
simulation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

63
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagatio
n Model
Band
Okumura
150 MHz to
Hata model
2000 MHz
(including the
Okumura
Hata HW
model)
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
l Terrain
condition.
l Whether to
calculate the
diffraction.
1 km < Cell radius

< 20 km
l Clutter
statistics.
l A formula
corresponds
to a clutter.
l Limited by the
free space
loss.
l Loss in
municipal
areas.
Applicable to the
GSM900, CDMA
2000, and LTE
technologies.
Not applicable to
highly populated
urban areas but
applicable to
common urban
areas, suburbs,
and villages. In
addition, the
antenna of the
base station must
be higher than the
surrounding
buildings.
Usually used for
prediction and
rarely used for
capacity
simulation.
SPM model
150 MHz to
(including the 2000 MHz
SPM900 and
SPM2G
models)
l Terrain
condition.
l Clutter
statistics.
l Effective
antenna
height.
There are six
methods of
calculating
the effective
antenna
height.
l The
diffraction
weight is
differentiated
in the case of
LOS or
NLOS.
l Limited by the
free space
loss.
l Loss and
weight of each
type of clutter
l Clearance area
of the receiver
0.5 km < Cell

radius < 20 km
Applicable to the
GSM900,
GSM1800,
UMTS, CDMA
2000, WiMAX,
and LTE
technologies.
Compared with
the Hata models,
the SPM models
are widely
applicable to the
scenarios of
macro cells.
Widely used for
capacity
simulation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

64
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagatio
n Model
Band
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
ITURP model
(that is, 1238
model)
1800 MHz to
2000 MHz
l Distance
(LOS and
NLOS) and
frequency
l Propagation
scenarios are
classified into
LOS and
NLOS
scenarios.
Indoor scenarios.
l Margin of
slow fading
l NLOS
considers the
loss in
penetration
through
floors in
different
environments
. The loss
depends on
the number of
penetrated
floors.
l NLOS
considers the
distance loss
coefficient N.
COST231WIM
800 MHz to
2000 MHz
l Terrain
condition.
l Clutter
statistics.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Used for only

prediction.
l The margin of
slow fading
depends on the
requirement
on the
coverage
probability
and the
standard
deviation of
indoor slow
fading.
l In the cases of
residential
buildings,
office
buildings, and
malls, N is 28,
30, and 22,
respectively.
Three parts are
Urban areas with
involved: free
a lot of high
space propagation buildings.
loss, rooftop-tostreet diffraction
and scattering
loss, and multishielding loss.
Configure
parameters for
each part.

65
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagatio
n Model
Band
Factor
Configuration
Requirement
Recommended
Application
Scenario
KeenanMotley
Around 2000
MHz
l Distance and
frequency.
Indoor scenarios.
l Loss in
penetration
through
walls.
Used for only

prediction.
l Number of
walls.
l The impact of
multipath
propagation
is not
considered.
The
penetration
loss of each
wall is the
same.
Volcano
Urban
Volcano
Rural
Volcano
Indoor
2G, 3G, and

4G frequency
bands
NOTE
l The Volcano model is a third-party
model. To install this model, you need
to purchase the corresponding
software. Volcano 3.1.2 or later needs
to be installed for U-Net 3.8 or a later
version.
l After the Volcano model is installed,
you need to run the U-Net again. The
U-Net automatically detects the
installed Volcano model and loads the
Volcano model.
Densely
populated urban
areas with many
buildings.
Suburbs and rural
areas.
Indoor scenarios.
l For details about the Volcano model

and how to install the Volcano model,
see the user guide of the Volcano
model software.
3.4.2 Configuring Propagation Models

By default, the U-Net provides multiple common propagation models. You can directly modify
the properties of a propagation model or duplicate a propagation model and modify the properties
of the duplicated propagation model.
Context
Propagation model of different types has different properties, which, however, are configured
in the same way. This section takes the Cost Hata (default) propagation model as an example to
describe how to configure a propagation model.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

66
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Propagation Models > Cost231 Hata > Cost Hata (default).
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-13.
NOTE
If you do not want to directly modify the properties of the propagation model, choose Duplicate from the shortcut
menu and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.
Step 4 Set the properties of the propagation model in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description
of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model.
1.
On the General tab page, change the name and description of the propagation model.
2.
On the Parameters tab page, configure the parameters related to the propagation model
and set the formula.
3.
Click OK.
Step 5 Optional: You can set the parameters related to the propagation model in a centralized mode
by exporting and importing the parameters.
1.
Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.
2.
Right-click and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the parameters related to
the propagation model as an .xls file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

67
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.
Open the .xls file. You can set and modify the parameters.
4.
Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.
5.
Right-click and choose Import from the shortcut menu to import the parameters related to
the propagation model.
If the parameters are successfully imported, the system prompts that the import is successful
and updates the parameters based on the imported file.
If the parameters fail to be imported, check whether the information about the .xls file, such
as the heading, is correct and complete.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
To delete a propagation model, choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
After the propagation model is configured, you can assign it to cells for calculating the path
loss. For details, see 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models.
NOTE
If you have set the Volcano propagation model for a cell, you need to manually import the map data on the
Setting tab page of the corresponding model (the map data imported from U-Net does not take effect for
the Volcano propagation model). Otherwise, path loss calculation cannot proceed.
3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models

This section describes how to assign propagation models. You need to select a proper
propagation model for each cell based on the technical and engineering conditions. You can
assign the same propagation model to all cells or assign different propagation models to each
cells.
Prerequisites
l
Propagation models are available in the project.
Cells exist in the project.
Context
To shorten the calculation time, the U-Net enables users to assign the following propagation
models to each cell:
l
Main propagation model: high calculation accuracy and short calculation radius
Extended propagation model: low calculation accuracy and long calculation radius
If the calculation accuracy of the main propagation model is not defined, the U-Net calculates
the main propagation model based on the calculation accuracy of the imported geographic data.
In addition, the U-Net can calculate the extended propagation model only when the propagation
model, calculation radius, and calculation precision of the extended propagation model are
defined.
Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Assign a propagation model to a group of cells.

68
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
In normal cases, cells with the same parameters and in the same environment use the same
propagation model. You can group these cells together and assign a propagation model to
the cell group.
1.
In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
3.
Right-click the cell group and choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.
The table of the selected cell group is displayed.
The property values of all the cells in the cell group are displayed in the table.
4.
Modify the values in each column (such as the Main Propagation Model column) to
ensure that parameter values of all the cells are the same.
TIP
You can set the parameters in the first row. Then, press Ctrl+D so that the parameter values
in the following rows are the same as those in the first row. In this way, parameter values of
all the cells are the same.
Assign a propagation model to a single cell.

1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
3.
4.
Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box. For example, for the LTE-FDD
network, click the LTE-FDDCell tab.
5.
Click
6.
Set propagation model parameters in the displayed Propagation dialog box. For
details, see Parameters on the Propagation Tab Page in the Repeater Properties
Dialog Box.
following Propagation Model.
For a multi-mode network, you need to set Propagation Model on the tab pages
corresponding to each RAT.
----End
3.4.4 Setting Bands

Before performing frequency planning, you must set bands. The U-Net provides multiple
predefined bands. You can modify the properties of the predefined bands. When the predefined
bands cannot meet your requirements, you can define bands.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Frequency Bands > Open Table from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
If the project is about a hybrid network, the Open Table menu has a submenu.
Step 4 Set bands in the window containing a band table. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Setting Bands.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

69
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
You can also double-click the heading in the table, and set properties of all bands in the
Bandwidth Configuration dialog box.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Assign the band to a cell.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box.

Click GSMTRX for a GSM network and LTE-FDDCell for an LTE-FDD network.
5.
l
Set the value of Frequency Band on the tab page to assign the band to a cell.
You can also import and export band information in the window that contains a band table.
For detailed description of parameters, see 10.8 Managing Table Windows.
3.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation Models

This section describes the interfaces and parameters involved in the management of propagation
models.
Parameters for Setting Bands

This section describes the parameters involved in band settings. You can refer to this section
when setting bands in the Frequency Bands dialog box.
Table 3-12 Parameters in the LTE-FDD/LTE-TDD/CDMA network
Parameter
Description
Value
Name
Indicates the name of a band.
Bandwidth(MHz)
Indicates the bandwidth.
l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD

networks: 1.4, 3, 5, 10,
15, and 20.
l CDMA network: 1.25.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Start Channel Index
Indicates the start index of

the available frequencies
corresponding to a band.
End Channel Index
Indicates the end index of the

available frequencies
corresponding to a band.

l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD

networks: from 0 to 128.
l CDMA network: from 0
to 2
The value of Start Channel
Index must be less than or
equal to the value of End
Channel Index.
70
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Excluded Channels
Indicates the index of an

excluded channel.
The default value is null.

Multiple values can be
entered. Use commas to
separate the values.
ACIR
Indicates the adjacent

channel signal-tointerference ratio.

the unit is dB.
Band Number
Indicates the number of a

band.
The value range is from 1 to

40.
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Indicates the downlink

frequency.
A parameter for LTE-FDD/

CDMA.
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Indicates the uplink

frequency.
A parameter for LTE-FDD/

CDMA.
Frequency(MHz)
Indicates the uplink or

downlink frequency.
A parameter for LTE-TDD
Actual Bandwidth(MHz)
Indicates the actual

bandwidth.
A parameter for LTE-FDD
Useable RB Num
Indicates the number of RBs

available for use.
A parameter for LTE-FDD
The value range is from 0 to

231.
Table 3-13 Parameters in the GSM network

Parameter
Description
Value
Name
Frequency band name.
ARFCN
Absolute radio frequency

channel number
For example, 512-885

indicates that the range is
[512,885]. 975-1023;0-124
[975,1023];[0,124].
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Uplink start frequency.
Unit: MHz.
Value range: real numbers,
separated by semicolons. The
number is consistent with
that of UARFCN(UL)s.
For example, if ARFCN is
set to 975-1023;0-124, you
need to set Frequency(UL)
(MHz) to 880.2;890.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

71
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Downlink start frequency.
Unit: MHz.
that of UARFCN(DL)s.
For example, if ARFCN is
set to 975-1023;0-124, you
need to set Frequency(DL)
(MHz) to 925.2;935.
Adjacent channel
interference ratio.
ACIR
Unit: dB.
Value range: real number that
is greater than 0.
Table 3-14 Parameters in the UMTS network

Parameter
Description
Value
Name
UARFCN(UL)
Uplink UTRA absolute radio

frequency channel number.

[9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12
[9262,9538];[12,12].
UARFCN(DL)
Downlink UTRA absolute

radio frequency channel
number.

[9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12
[9262,9538];[12,12].
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
ACIR
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Adjacent channel
interference ratio.

Unit: dB.
is greater than 0.
72
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata propagation model. You can
refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model

Parameter
Diffraction
Calculate:
Sets the
parameters
for
calculating
the
diffraction.
Diffraction Loss
Method
Description
Value
Indicates whether to
consider diffraction
during path loss
calculation.
Available algorithms
are as follows:
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Indicates the algorithm

for calculating the
effective height of the
transmitter antenna.
are as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
General:
Sets the
parameters
for common
calculation.
Limitation to free
space loss
Formula
limit the loss in the free
space.

True.
For the description of

parameters in the
formula, see Formula
of the Cost231 Hata
Propagation Model.
For the parameter

values, see Values of
the Parameters of the
Cost231 Hata
Propagation Model in
Typical Scenarios.
Formula of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model

The formula is as follows:
l
Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)
Suburban: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - 2 x (lg(f/28))2 - K13
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

73
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Rural: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - K14 x lg(f)2 + K15 x lg(f) - K16
Parameters in the formula are described as follows:

Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also a
function of the size of the coverage area.
l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12
l In the Rural/Small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6lg(f) - K7) x Hm
- (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The value
varies according to the scenario. The value is already calculated in
K1, and thus is not presented in this formula.
Indicates the frequency range. The value rang is from 1,500 MHz to
2,000 MHz.
Hb
Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range is
from 30 m to 200 m.
Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobile
station. The unit is kilometer.
Hm
Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1
m to 10 m.
Values of the Parameters of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model in Typical

Scenarios
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
De
ns
e
ur
ba
n
49
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Ur
ba
n/
Su
bu
rb
46
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94

74
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
Ru
ral
46
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
18
.
33
35
.
94
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
35
.
94
Hi
gh
wa
y/
Hi
gh
sp
ee
d
rai
lw
ay
46
.3
33
.9
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
11
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
18
.
33
40
.
94
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model. You
can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model

Parameter
Diffractio
n
Calculate
:
parameter
s for
diffractio
n
calculatio
n
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Diffraction Loss
Method
Description
Value
consider diffraction
during path loss
calculation.
Available algorithms are

as follows:
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein

75
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Description
Value

for calculating the

as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
General:
common
calculatio
n
parameter
s
Limitation to free space

loss
Formula
space.

True.

parameters in the
formula, see Formula of
the Cost231 Hata HW
Propagation Model.
For the parameter

values, see Values of the
Parameters of the
Formula in Typical
Scenarios.
Formula of the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation Model

l

Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
76
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 1500 MHz to
2000 MHz.
Hb
from 30 m to 200 m.
Hm
m to 10 m.
Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios

Scen
ario
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10~
K16
Dens
e
urban
49.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Urba
n
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Subur
b
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Rural
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
High
way
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Highspeed
railw
ay
46.3
33.9
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Parameters for Setting the SPM2G Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the SPM2G propagation model. You can refer
to this section when setting the SPM2G propagation model.
Parameters Related to the SPM2G Propagation Model
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
Diffra
ction
Calcul
consider building height.
The default value is False.
Add building
height

77
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
ate:
parame
ters for
diffract
ion
calcula
tion
Indicates the algorithm for

calculating the clutter loss.
Available algorithms are as

follows:
Clutter Loss
Calculate Method
l None
l Uniform
l Triangular
l Logarithmic
l Exponential
Diffraction Loss
Method
consider diffraction during
path loss calculation.

follows:
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method

calculating the effective
height of the transmitter
antenna.

follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the ground
l Height above the average
ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Receiver on top
clutter
Indicates whether the

receiver is on the top of the
clutter.
The default value is True.
Gener
al:
comm
on
calcula
tion
parame
ters
Limitation to free
space loss
Indicates whether to limit

the loss in the free space.
Param
eters:
calcula
tion
parame
ters
K1 - K7

parameters in the formula,
see Formula of the SPM2G
Propagation Model.
For the parameter values, see

Values of the Parameters
of the Formula in Typical
Scenarios.

78
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Formula of the SPM2G Propagation Model

Formula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 x
lg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter)
Parameter
Description
K1
Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on the

frequency.
K2
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.
The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength
that changes with the distance.
Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antenna

and the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.
K3
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of this

parameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changes
with the height of the transmitter antenna.
HTxeff
Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is

meter.
K4
Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this
parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss
Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit

is dB.
K5
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).
K6
Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of this

with the height of the receiver antenna.
HRxeff
Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is

meter.
K7
Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of this

parameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.
f(clutter)
Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Scenari
o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Dense
urban
27.425
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Urban
23.455
44.9
5.83
-6.55

79
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Scenari
o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Suburb
11.955
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Rural
3.065
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Highway
-3.455
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Highspeed
railway
-3.455
44.9
5.83
-6.55
Parameters for Setting the SPM900 Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the SPM900 propagation model. You can refer
to this section when setting the SPM900 propagation model.
Parameters Related to the SPM900 Propagation Model

Parameter
Diffracti
on
Calculat
e:
paramete
rs for
diffracti
on
calculati
on
Description
Value
Add building
height
Indicates whether to consider

building height.
Clutter Loss
Calculate
Method

calculating the clutter loss.

follows:
l None
l Uniform
l Triangular
l Logarithmic
l Exponential
Diffraction
Loss Method

diffraction during path loss
calculation.

follows:
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

80
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Effect Tx
Height
Calculate
Method
Description
Value

calculating the effective height
of the transmitter antenna.

follows:
l AbsSpot
ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at receiver
Receiver on
top clutter
Indicates whether the receiver

is on the top of the clutter.
General
:
common
calculati
on
paramete
rs
Limitation to
free space loss
Indicates whether to limit the

loss in the free space.
Paramet
ers:
calculati
on
paramete
rs
K1~K7

parameters in the formula, see
Formula of the SPM900
Propagation Model.

Values of the Parameters of
the Formula in Typical
Scenarios.
Formula of the SPM900 Propagation Model

Formula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 x
lg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
K1
Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on the

frequency.
K2
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.
The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strength
that changes with the distance.
Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antenna

and the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.

81
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
K3
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of this

with the height of the transmitter antenna.
HTxeff
Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit is

meter.
K4
Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of this
parameter indicates the diffraction status.
DiffractionLoss
Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unit

is dB.
K5
Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).
K6
Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of this

with the height of the receiver antenna.
HRxeff
Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit is

meter.
K7
Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of this

parameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.
f(clutter)
Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.

Scenari
o
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
Dense
urban
12.13
44.9
5.83
Urban
12.12
44.9
5.83
Suburb
2.17
44.9
5.83
Rural
-11.39
44.9
5.83
Highway
-16.39
44.9
5.83
Highspeed
railway
-16.39
44.9
5.83
Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata propagation model. You can
refer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata propagation model.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

82
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata Propagation Model

Parameter
Description
Value
Diffra
ction
Calcul
ate:
param
eters
for
diffrac
tion
calcula
tion

diffraction during path loss
calculation.

follows:
Diffraction Loss
Method
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
The default value is None.
Effect Tx Height
Calculate
Method

antenna.

follows:
l AbsSpot
ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
Gener
al:
comm
on
calcula
tion
param
eters
Limitation to
free space loss
Formula
Indicates whether to limit the

loss in the free space.

parameters in the formula, see
Formula of the Okumura
Hata Propagation Model.

Values of the Parameters of
the Formula in Typical
Scenarios.
Formula of the Okumura Hata Propagation Model

l

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

83
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Cm
1500 MHz.
Hb
from 30 m to 200 m.
Hm
m to 10 m.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
Hi
gh
sp
ee
d
rai
lw
ay
64
.
77
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
-4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
De
ns
e
ur
ba
n
69
.
55
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
3.
2
11
.
75
4.
97
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94

84
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Sc
en
ar
io
K
1
K
2
K
3
K
4
K
5
K
6
K
7
K
8
K
9
K
10
K
11
K
12
K
13
K
14
K
15
K
16
Ur
ba
n
69
.
55
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Su
bu
rb
67
.
55
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
-2
5.
4
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Ru
ral
64
.
77
26
.
16
13
.
82
44
.9
6.
55
1.
1
0.
7
1.
56
0.
8
-4.
78
18
.
33
35
.
94
4.
78
18
.
33
40
.
94
Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata HW propagation model. You
can refer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata HW propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model

Parameter
Description
Value
Diff
ract
ion
Cal
cula
te:
para
met
ers
for
diffr
acti
on
calc
ulati
on
consider diffraction during
path loss calculation.

as follows:
Diffraction Loss Method
l None
l Atlas
l Bullington
l Deygout
l Epstein
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method

antenna.

as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

85
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Gen
eral
:
com
mon
calc
ulati
on
para
met
ers


see Formula of the
Okumura Hata HW
Propagation Model.
For the parameter values,

see Values of the
Parameters of the
Formula in Typical
Scenarios.
Limitation to free space

loss
Formula
Formula of the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model

l

Parameter
Description
Lu
Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)
a(Hm)
Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Cm
1500 MHz.
Hb
from 30 m to 200 m.
86
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Hm
m to 10 m.

Scen
ario
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10~
K16
Dens
e
urban
72.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Urba
n
69.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Subur
b
61.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Rural
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
High
way
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Highspeed
railw
ay
54.55
26.16
13.82
44.9
6.55
1.1
0.7
1.56
0.8
Parameters for Setting the ITURP Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the ITURP propagation model. You can refer
to this section when setting the ITURP propagation model.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

87
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters Related to the ITURP Propagation Model

Parameter
Description
Value
Diffrac
tion
Calcul
ate:
parame
ters for
diffract
ion
calculat
ion

antenna.

follows:
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
Gener
al:
commo
n
calculat
ion
parame
ters
Limitation to free
space loss
Formula


see Formula of the ITURP
Propagation Model.
For the parameter values,

see Values of the
Parameters of the
Formula in Typical
Scenarios.
Formula of the ITURP Propagation Model

Formula: Total = K2 + K1 x lg(f) + N x lg(d x 1000) + Lf
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
K2
Indicates an empirical coefficient. It is a constant.
K1
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(f). It is a constant.
Indicates the frequency range.
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(d x 1000). It is a constant.
Lf
Indicates the logarithm of the frequency range. The value varies

according to the scenario.

88
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Scenari
o
Lf
K2
K1
K4
K5
K6
NLOS
house
K4 + K5
x K6
-28
20
28
NLOS
office
K4 + K5
x (K6-1)
-28
20
30
15
NLOS
store
K4 + K5
x (K6-1)
-28
20
22
LOS
-28
20
20
Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagation
model. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagation
model.
Parameters Related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model

Parameter
Diffraction
Calculate: Sets the
parameters for
calculating the
diffraction.
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Description
Value
Indicates the
algorithm for
calculating the
effective height of
the transmitter
antenna.
are as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At
Receiver
l Enhanced Slope
at receiver
Parameters: Sets the

parameters for
common calculation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Angel between
incident-wave and
road
Indicates the angle

between the road and
the incident wave.

30.
Building height
Indicates the average

height of
surrounding
buildings.

12.

Unit: degree.
Unit: m.
89
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Distance between
buildings
Road Width
Description
Value
Indicates the
distance between
buildings.

50.
Indicates the road

width.

25.
Unit: m.
Unit: m.
Formula of the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model

l
In the Los scenario: Total = K1 + K2 * lg(d) + K3
In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd <=0: Total = PL0
In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd >0: Total = PL0 + PLrts + PLmsd

Parameter
Description
PL0
Indicates the free space propagation loss.

Unit: dB.
PL0 =NK1 + NK2*lg(d) + NK3*lg(f)
PLrts
Indicates the rooftop-to-street diffraction and scattering loss.

PLrts = NK4 NK5*lg(w) +NK6*lg(f) + NK7*lg(Hroof -Hue)
+Lcri
PLmsd
Indicates the multi-shielding loss.

PLmsd =Lbsk+ Ka + Kd*lg(d) + Kf*lg(f) - NK6*lg(b)
Lcri
Indicates the directional loss.

l -10<= < 35 deg: Lcri = NKL1 + NKL2*
l 35 <= <55deg: Lcri = NKL3 + NKL4(-35)
l 55<= <90deg: Lcri = NKL4 NKL5(-55)
Lbsk
l Hbs>Hroof: Lbsk = NKL5*lg(1+Hbs -Hroof)

l Hbs<=Hroof: Lbsk = 0
Ka
l Hbs>Hroof: Ka = NKL6
l Hbs<=Hroof And d>=0.5 km: Ka = NKL7 NKL8*(Hbs Hroof)
l Hbs<=Hroof And d<0.5 km: Ka = NKL9-NKL10*(Hbs Hroof)*(d/0.5)
Kd
l Hbs>Hroof: Kd = NKL11
l Hbs<=Hroof: Kd = NKL12 NKL13*((Hbs -Hroof)/Hroof)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

90
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Kf
Kf = NKL14 + NKL15 * (f/925 -1)
Indicates the carrier frequency.

Unit: MHz.
Indicates the distance between the base station and a terminal's

antenna.
Unit: km.
Indicates the road width.

Unit: m.
Hroof
Indicates the height of surrounding buildings.

Unit: m.
Hbs
Indicates the height of the base station antenna.

Unit: m.
Hue
Indicates the height of the mobile station antenna.
Indicates the angle between the road and the incident wave.
Unit: degree.
K1
Indicates a constant item.
K2
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to Lg(d). It is a constant.
K3
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to Lg(f). It is a constant.
Default Parameter Values of the Cost Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model

Para
mete
r
K1
K2
K3
NK1
NK2
NK3
NK4
NK5
NK6
NK7
Defa
ult
Valu
e
42.6
26
20
32.4
20
20
-16.9
10
10
20
Parameters for Setting the Keenan-Motley Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Keenan-Motley propagation model. You can
refer to this section when setting the Keenan-Motley propagation model.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

91
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters Related to the Keenan-Motley Propagation Model

Parameter
Diffraction
Calculate:
parameters
for
diffraction
calculation
Effect Tx Height
Calculate Method
Description
Value

for calculating the
are as follows:
l AbsSpot
l Height above the
ground
l Height above the
average ground
l Spot Hr
l Slope At Receiver
l Enhanced Slope at
receiver
General:
common
calculation
parameters
Limitation to free
space loss
space.

True.
Parameters
: calculation
parameters
K1-K5

parameters in the
formula, see Formula
of the Keenan-Motley
Propagation Model.
For the parameter

values, see Values of
the Parameters of the
Formula in Typical
Scenarios.
Formula of the Keenan-Motley Propagation Model

Formula: Total = K1 + K2 x lg(f) + K3 x lg(d) + K4 x K5
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
K1
Indicates the frequency range.
K2
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to log(f). It is a constant.
K3
Indicates a coefficient corresponding to log(d). It is a constant.
K4
K5

92
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Scenario
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
KeenanMotley
32.5
20
20
20
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Clutter Related Hata propagation model.
You can refer to this section when setting the Clutter Related Hata propagation model.
Parameters Related to the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model

Parameter
Description
Clutter
Clutter.
Propagation Model
Indicates the Hata propagation model related

to the clutter.
Loss
Path loss.
3.5 Adding a Device

3.5.1 Importing Antenna Data

This section describes how to import antenna data as .txt and .msi files.
Context
l
The U-Net allows you to import and export antenna data, including 2D and 3D data, as .txt
and .msi files.
Before importing antenna files, you can manually set the value of each parameter in the
antenna files. If a value in the antenna file is not within the specified value range, the antenna
file may fail to be imported.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu., as shown in Figure 3-14.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

93
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-14 Import
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported..
l If data of a single antenna is imported, select the .txt or .msi file corresponding to the antenna.
l If data of multiple antennas is imported, select .txt or .msi files in batches.
l If an imported antenna name is the same as the name of an existing antenna, the U-Net adds
a number to the imported antenna name to distinguish the two antennas.
Step 5 Click Open. The Import Antenna File dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15 Import Antenna File
l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower
part indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.
l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

94
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, configure antenna parameters. For details about the parameters, see
Table 3-15.
Table 3-15 Parameters for importing antenna files
Parameter
Description
File Name
File name used for identifying the user

antenna attribute name in the antenna file.
Field Separator
Field separator used by a file. A .txt file uses

the Tab separator, and an .msi file uses the
space separator.
Source
User antenna attribute name parsed based on

FileName.
Indicates the parsing reference.
l Use the separator specified by the file
format to parse file fields.
l If the current row has only one piece of
data, the data is the antenna attribute
name. The next row is the field
information.
NOTE
This rule is executed from the first row of the
file.
l If the current row has several pieces of

data (separated by separators), the first
piece of data is the attribute name.
l Data rows ranging from 0 to 359 have no
field name.
NOTE
The purpose is to avoid the angle information
displayed after fields such as Horizontal or
Vertical.
l If the user antenna data does not comply

with the preceding rules, you will be
prompted that the user antenna attribute
name cannot be identified.
NOTE
When antenna data files are imported in
batches, user antenna and U-Net antenna
attribute names in other antenna data files are
mapped based on the attribute name mapping
in the Import Antenna Filedialog box.
Destination
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Standard antenna field name used by the UNet. You can switch cell values in the dropdown list to configure the mapping between
user antenna attribute names and U-Net
antenna attribute names. <IGNORE>
indicates that the corresponding field
information is ignored.
95
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 7 After the configuration, click Import to import the antenna file to the project.
NOTE
l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower part
indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.
l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
You can export data of a single antenna.

1.
In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an antenna.
3.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name.. Then,
export the antenna data.
You can export the antenna data in batches.

1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
3.
Right-click antennas and choose Export > Export File Type from the shortcut menu.
Then, export antenna data to files in batches.
You can view antennas in the window.

1.
2.
Choose Antennas > an antenna from the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click an antenna and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Antenna
Properties dialog box is displayed.
4.
View the antennas in the window on the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern
tab pages.
If you have imported 3D data of an antenna, you can drag the slider in the lower left corner
of the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tab pages to change the value of
Attenuation, as shown in Figure 3-16.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

96
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-16 scroll bar
3.5.2 Setting Antennas

Each U-Net project contains multiple defined antennas of specific technologies. You can create
an antenna either directly or copy an existing antenna file and modify the related parameters to
create an antenna.
Procedure
l
Create an antenna
1.
Select a method for creating an antenna.

If...
Then...
Create an antenna directly
1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
3. Choose New from the shortcut menu. The
Antenna Properties dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

97
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
Copy an existing antenna

file to create an antenna
1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an
antenna.
3. Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.
4. Select the copied antenna.
5. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
2.
In the antenna property dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box.
3.
Click OK.
Create an antenna group.

When an antenna group supports multiple carriers, the U-Net can automatically match the
antenna gains with different bands to perform calculations. The antenna group supports
smart antenna.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Antennas Groups.
3.
Choose Add Group from the shortcut menu. The New Antenna Group dialog box
is displayed.
4.
Set the property parameters of the antenna group. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Antenna Group Property Setting Dialog Box.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Modifying antenna properties

1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.
3.
Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The Antenna Table dialog box is
displayed.
4.
Double-click the target cell, and then modify the antenna properties in the displayed
dialog box.
Allocating antennas to cells

You can perform this operation after creating or importing cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the Antenna Config tab page, select an antenna type from the Antenna dropdown list.
5.
Click OK.
98
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.5.3 Setting a TMA

Tower mounted amplifiers (TMAs) are used to reduce the overall noise figure of base stations.
You can assign configured TMAs to cells for calculating the total loss.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > TMA Equipment from the shortcut menu. The TMA
Equipment dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a TMA. For detailed description of parameters, see
Table 3-16.
NOTE
l After you set the TMA parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for
setting other TMAs.
l You can modify the original TMA parameter settings by referring to Table 3-16.
Table 3-16 TMA parameters

Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a TMA.
NoiseFigure(dB)
Indicates the noise figure. The unit is dB.
Gain(UL)(dB)
Indicates the uplink gain. The unit is dB.
Loss(DL)(dB)
Indicates the downlink loss. The unit is dB.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the TMAs to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the
configured TMA, by default, the system does not consider the TMA during the calculation of
total loss.
1.
2.
3.
4.
next to
On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click
Equipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5.
Clear Input Total Loss.
6.
Select a TMA in TMA.
7.
Click OK.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

99
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.5.4 Setting Feeders

Feeders are used to connect TMAs to base stations (eNodeBs, BTSs, or NodeBs). You can assign
configured feeders to cells for calculating the total loss.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Feeder Equipment from the shortcut menu. The
Feeders dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a feeder. For detailed description of parameters, see
Table 3-17.
NOTE
l After you set the feeder parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row for
setting other feeders.
l You can modify the original feeder parameter settings by referring to Table 3-17.
Table 3-17 Feeder parameters

Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a feeder.
dB/100m
Indicates the loss of every 100 meters.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the feeders to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign the
configured feeder, by default, the system does not consider the feeder during the calculation of
total loss.
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click
next to
Equipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.
5.
Clear Input Total Loss.
6.
Select a feeder in Feeder.
7.
Set the feeder length of the transmitter and the receiver in Feeder Length(m).
8.
Click OK.
3.5.5 Creating Base Stations

You can create base stations and assign the base stations to cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

100
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Site Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Site
Equipment dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a base station. For details about the parameters, see
Table 3-18.
NOTE
l After you set the base station parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row
for setting other sites.
l You can modify the original base station parameter settings by referring to Table 3-18.
Table 3-18 Base station parameters

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a base station.
NoiseFigure(dB)
Indicates the noise figure.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can assign the base stations to all cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not
assign the configured base station, the system calculates the total loss based on the default base
station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the Antenna Config area of the displayed Transceiver Properties dialog box, click
following the Equipment parameter. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is
displayed.
5.
Select a base station from the Site drop-down list.
6.
Click OK.
3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas

This section describes the parameters for creating or modifying antennas or antenna groups. You
can refer to this section when setting antenna properties in the antenna property setting dialog
box or setting antenna group properties in the antenna group property setting dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

101
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box

Table 3-19 Parameters on the General tab page
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of an antenna, which

uniquely identifies the antenna.
The U-Net automatically fills in a default
name for each new antenna.
Manufacturer
Indicates the vendor of an antenna.
Gain
Indicates the antenna gain. The value range is

from 0 to 100 and the unit is dBi.
Pattern Electrical Tilt: (For information only)
Indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna.

The value range is from -90 to 90 and the unit
is degree.
Comments
Indicates the comments on an antenna. A

maximum of 128 bytes are allowed.
Table 3-20 Parameters on the Horizontal Pattern tab page

Parameter
Description
Angle()
Indicates the horizontal angle of an antenna.

The value range is from 0 to 359 and the unit
is degree.
Attenuation(dB)
Indicates the attenuation value at the

horizontal angle of an antenna. The unit is dB.
Table 3-21 Parameters on the Vertical Pattern tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Angle()
Indicates the vertical angle of an antenna. The

value range is from 0 to 359 and the unit is
degree.
Attenuation(dB)
Indicates the attenuation value at the vertical

angle of an antenna. The unit is dB.

102
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-22 Parameters on the Other Properties tab page

Parameter
Description
Beamwidth
Indicates the antenna beamwidth. The value

range is from 0 to 360 and the unit is degree.
Max Frequency
Indicates the maximum frequency of an

antenna. The value range is from 0 to 32767
and the unit is MHz.
Min Frequency
Indicates the minimum frequency of an

antenna. The value range is from 0 to 32767
and the unit is MHz.
The value of Min Frequency must be smaller
than or equal to the value of Max
Frequency.
Parameters in the Antenna Group Property Setting Dialog Box

Table 3-23 Parameters in the New Antenna Groupdialog box
Parameter
Description
Group Name
Indicates the name of an antenna group.
No.
Indicates the number of an antenna group.
Antenna Name
Indicates the name of an existing antenna, that is, the name

of an antenna in the antenna group.
After an antenna is selected, a bland row is added
automatically for users to add a new antenna.
Minimum Frequency
Indicates the minimum transmit frequency of an antenna.

Minimum Frequency must be less than or equal to
Maximum Frequency.
Maximum Frequency
Indicates the maximum transmit frequency of an antenna.
Comments
Indicates the comments on the antenna group.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

103
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.6.1 Setting MCS Types

This section describes how to set an MCS. You can modify the parameters (mainly the
demodulation mode and coding rate) of an existing MCS type. When the existing MCS types
do not meet your requirements, you can create a new MCS type.
Context
The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes
(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD.
Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.
Step 4 Click a blank line marked with * in the table to set an MCS type, as shown in Figure 3-17. For
the detailed description of parameters, see Table 3-24.
Figure 3-17 MCS
Table 3-24 Parameters for Setting the MCS

Parameter
Description
Index
Indicates the index of an MCS.
Highest modulation
Indicates a modulation scheme, which can any of the

following:
l QPSK
l 16QAM
l 64QAM
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Modulation Order
Indicates a modulation exponent.
Coding Rate
Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to

2.
104
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE)
Indicates the bearer efficiency.

Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulation
exponent
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service Types

Set the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parameters
of existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you can
create service types.
Context
For an LTE-FDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo
Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.
Procedure
Step 2 Set service type parameters.
If you need to...
Then...
Create a service type
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services >

LTE-FDD.
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-18.
3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table
3-25.
Modify an existing
service type
1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD > the

existing service type in the navigation tree.
3. Change parameter values for the existing service type by referring
to Table 3-25.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

105
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-18 New
Table 3-25 Description of service parameters

Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a service type.
Type
Service type.
l Voice: CS services.
l Data: PS services.
GBR
GBR service.
Priority
Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the service

priority for subscribers in capacity simulation.
1 indicates the lowest priority.
Activity Factor
Uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required only

for CS services.
l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0
to 1.
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s.

Value range: 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
MAC PDU(kbit)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.

106
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Max Throughput
(kbit/s)
Maximum uplink/downlink throughput.

l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to
107.
l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges
from 0 to 107.
NOTE
Minimum throughput Average throughput Maximum throughput.
Min Throughput
(kbit/s)
Minimum uplink/downlink throughput.

l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to
107.
l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges
from 0 to 107.
NOTE
Average Throughput
(kbit/s)
Average uplink/downlink throughput.

l Uplink: average uplink throughput.
l Downlink: average downlink throughput.
Transmission
Efficiency
Uplink/downlink transmission rate.

l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0
to 1.
Offset(kbit/s)
Fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an

encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC
layer.
l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.
l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to
107.
IBLER(%)
Block error rate. The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Body Loss(dB)
Body loss.
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers

You can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do not
meet the requirements, you can create receiver types.
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

107
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-FDD.
Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.
If...
Then...
Create a receiver type.
In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the new

receiver and select type of MCS Table.
Modify an existing receiver

type.
Perform Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters
for the receiver type by referring to Table 3-26.
If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 3-26 Parameters for setting LTE-FDD receivers
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a receiver.
MCS Table
Indicates the modulation and coding scheme.
Mobility
Indicates the mobility type of a receiver.
MIMO
Indicates the efficiency of adjusting codes by the receiver.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0 to

100.
Channel Relativity
Indicates the channel relativity.
Transmission Mode
Indicates the transmission mode.

This parameter is valid only when the MCS Table is set to
PDSCH MCS.
MCS Threshold
Indicates the MCS bearer table of a receiver.

You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed MCS
bearer information in the Demodulation area.
l SINR: indicates the threshold of the SINR required during
demodulation.
l Spectrum Efficiency: indicate the efficiency of the
spectrum.
l The chart in the right pane shows the demodulation
thresholds.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

108
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal Types

Set the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters of
existing terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you can
create terminal types.
Procedure
Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.
If you want to... Then...
Create a terminal 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
LTE-FDD.
type
2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 3-27.
Modify an
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal
LTE-FDD > the existing terminal type.
type
3. Modify the parameters of the existing terminal type by referring to
Table 3-27
Table 3-27 Parameters for setting terminal types

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a terminal type.
UE Category
Indicates the category of a terminal.

The terminals are classified into five categories ranging from
1 to 5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
UL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Indicates the peak throughput in the uplink direction.
DL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Indicates the peak throughput in the downlink direction.
Support UL 64 QAM
Indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink direction.
Maximum Layer Number
Indicates the maximum number of layers.
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the minimum transmit power of a terminal.
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of a terminal.
Noise Figure(dB)
Indicates the noise figure of a terminal.
Cable Loss(dB)
Indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.
UL RS Offset(dB)
Indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the uplink

direction.

109
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
RB Number
Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) supported by

the terminal. This parameter is only applicable to prediction.
Reception Equipment
Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.
Gain(dBi)
Indicates the antenna gain.
Number of Transmission
Antenna Ports
Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for a

terminal.
Number of Reception
Antenna Ports
Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.
Step 3 ClickOK.
----End
3.6.5 Setting Environment Types

This section describes how to set environment types. You can modify the parameters of existing
environment types, such as user, mobility type, and user density. If the existing environment
types do not meet the requirements, you can create environment types.
Procedure
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.
If you need to...
Then...
Create an
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments.
environment type 2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.
3. Set parameters for the new environment type by referring to Table
3-28 and Table 3-29.
Modify an
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments
existing
> the existing environment type.
environment type 2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. Modify the parameters of the existing environment type by referring
to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

110
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Compare
attributes of
multiple traffic
environments
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments.

2. Right-click and choose Compare Environment Elements from the
shortcut menu. The Environment Compare dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 3-19.
NOTE
You can select two traffic environments or more to compare in the Select
Environments area and select the comparison items in the Environment
Items area.
3. Click Compare. In the displayed Environment Compare Result

dialog box, check the attributes of the compared traffic environments,
4. Compare attributes of multiple traffic environments by referring to
Table 3-28 and Table 3-29.

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of an environment type.
User
Indicates a user type.
Mobility
Indicates a mobility type.
Density(Subscribers/km2)
Indicates the user density (number of users in

each square kilometer).
The unit is n/km 2, where n indicates the
number of users.
Table 3-29 Parameters on the Clutter Weight tab page

Parameter
Description
Clutter Class
Indicates the name of a surface feature. The

names are relevant to the imported
geographical data.
Weight
Indicates the weight occupied by each surface

feature. This parameter is used for calculating
the number of users allocated to each surface
feature.
This parameter is available only when Clutter
map data exists.
% Indoor
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the proportion of indoor users of a

surface feature.

111
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-19 Environment Compare
Figure 3-20 Environment Compare Result
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

112
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
3.6.6 Setting User Types

You can modify the parameters of existing user types, such as user priority, service type, and
user type. If the existing user types do not meet the requirements, you can create user types.
Procedure
If you want to... Then...
Create a user
type
1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click and then
choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles from the shortcut menu.
2. Set parameters for the new user type by referring to Table 3-30.
Modify an
1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic
existing user type
Parameters > User Profiles > An existing user type; right-click and
then choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Modify the parameters of the existing user type by referring to Table
3-30.
Compare
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles.
attributes of user 2. Right-click and choose Compare User Profiles Elements from the
types
shortcut menu. The User Profiles Compare dialog box is displayed,
NOTE
You can select two user types or more to compare in the Select User Profiles
area.
3. Click Compare. In the displayed User Profiles Compare Result

dialog box, check the attributes of the compared user types, as shown
in Figure 3-22.
4. Compare attributes of user types by referring to Table 3-30.
Table 3-30 Parameters for Setting User Types

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a user.
Priority
Indicates the priority of a user.

The value 1 indicates the lowest priority. The
larger the number, the higher the priority.
Service
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates a service type.

113
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Terminal
Indicates a terminal type.
Calls/hour
Indicates the number of calls per hour.
Duration(s)
Indicates the duration of a call.
Volume(DL)(Kbyte)
Indicates the downlink data volume.
Volume(UL)(Kbyte)
Indicates the uplink data volume.
Figure 3-21 User Profiles Compare
Figure 3-22 User Profiles Compare Result
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

114
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types

This section describes how to set mobility types for terminals. You can modify the parameters
of existing mobility types, such as the velocity. If the existing mobility types do not meet the
requirements, you can create mobility types.
Context
The U-Net provides six default mobility types: 30 km/h, 50 km/h, 60 km/h, 90 km/h, Fixed, and
Pedestrian.
Procedure
Step 1 Create or modify a mobility type.
If you want to...
Then...
Create a mobility type
1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click

Traffic Parameters > Mobility Types, and then choose
New from the shortcut menu. The Mobility Properties
dialog box is displayed.
2. Set parameters for the new mobility type by referring to
Table 3-31.
3. Click OK.
Modify an existing mobility 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose Traffic
type
Parameters > Mobility Types > An existing mobility
type; right-click and then choose Properties from the
shortcut menu. The Mobility Properties dialog box is
displayed.
2. Modify the parameters for the existing mobility type by
referring to Table 3-31.
3. Click OK.
Table 3-31 Parameters for Setting Mobility Types

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a mobility type.
Average Speed(km/h)
Indicates the mobility speed.
Step 2 Click OK.

----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

115
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters

separately.
3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information

You can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automatically
creates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export base
station data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiver
information. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information in
the same way.
Context
l
Not all the base station data files can be imported to the U-Net. The U-Net has certain
requirements on the format of the data files (site data, cell data, or transceiver data) to be
imported.
Generally, you can export base station data and the corresponding configuration file from
the U-Net, modify the relevant parameters, and then import the data to the U-Net for
analysis.
Procedure
Step 1 After exporting base station data and the corresponding configuration file, save or edit the data
for future use.
1.
2.
Select the objects to be exported.

If...
Then...
Export site data.
a. In the navigation tree, choose Site.

b. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.
Export
transceiver data.
a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.

b. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.
Export cell data.

b. Choose Cells > Export from the shortcut menu.
3.
In the Data Export dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see
Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box.
TIP
l You can click Save to save the current parameter configuration in the dialog box as a
configuration file.
l You can also click Load to load an existing configuration file. The U-Net exports data based on
the parameter configuration in the configuration file.
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click Export.
116
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Set the file type, saving path, and file name. Then, save the settings.
After the data export is complete, you can open the exported file, and view or modify the
base station data of the current project.
Step 2 Import the base station data and the corresponding configuration file into the U-Net to
automatically create base stations.
1.
2.
Select the objects to be imported.

If...
Then...
Import site
data.
a. In the navigation tree, choose Site.

b. Choose Import from the shortcut menu.
c. Select the file to be imported, and open the Data Import dialog
box.
Import
transceiver
data.
Import cell
data.

b. Choose Import from the shortcut menu.
box.
b. Choose Cells > Import from the shortcut menu.
box.
3.
To ensure that the data is successfully exported, see 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching
in the Field Mapping Area to check field matching.
4.
Optional: In the Data Import dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description,
see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.
5.
Click Import.
l After the data import is complete, the system creates base stations based on the base
station data and displays the base stations in the map window.
l If a file fails to be imported, modify the file based on the error information displayed
in the system.
----End
3.7.2 Creating a Single Site

This section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the properties
of an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies
(RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Site.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

117
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Set site parameters on the General tab page of the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Creating Sites.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
You can view or modify site properties. In addition, you can move or delete a single site.
1.
Select the site in the map window.
2.
Perform the following operations as required.

If...
Then...
You want to view or

modify site properties
1. Choose Site Properties from the shortcut menu.
You want to move a site
Directly drag the mouse to move the position of the

selected site.
You want to delete a

site
Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed dialog box, view or modify site

properties such as site name and coordinate values.
The preceding operations can be performed in both the Explorer window and the map
window. This section describes the operations performed in only the map window.
l
You can also rank or group sites, audit the distance between two sites, and set the display
effect of a site.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Site.
3.

If...
Then...
You want to group sites
Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut

menu.
You want to rank sites
Choose Order from the shortcut menu.
You want to audit the

distance between two
sites
1. Right-click and choose Distance Audit from the

shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed dialog box, set Distance(m)<=,
which specifies the audit distance.
3. Click Audit.
The names of sites whose distances are within the
distance specified by the preset value and their actual
distances are displayed in the main window of the UNet.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

118
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
You want to set the

display effect of a base
station

2. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as the
display field and color.
3. Click OK.
You want to enable the

display or hiding of
property columns of
basic site parameters
1. Right-click and choose Open Table from the shortcut

menu. The Sites table is displayed.
2. Right-click a point in the Sites table and choose
Display Columns from the shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box,
view the basic site parameters in the Sites table and
select or clear the check boxes of columns that need
to be displayed or hidden in the Sites table. For details,
see Basic Parameters of a Site.
4. Close the Columns to be displayed dialog box. The
Sites table is updated and displays property columns
based on the preceding settings.
3.7.3 Setting an LTE-FDD Base Station Template

This section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations by
using the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet your
requirements, you can customize a base station template.
Procedure
l
View base station templates.

1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
On the toolbar, select Template Management from the

dropdown list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 3-23.

119
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-23 Station Template Properties
The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of the
U-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in the
drop-down list.
For example,
2.
l
The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.
Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.
Create a base station template.

1.
Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,
a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.
2.
Set the properties in the LTE-FDD base station template. For details, see Parameters
for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.
View and modify properties of the base station template.

1.
Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.
2.
Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.
3.
View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see
Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

120
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
You can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized base
station template.
When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station Template
Properties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.
You cannot delete the last base station template.
3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches

The system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations with
the same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station
automatically in the same way.
Prerequisites
The required base station template is created.
Procedure
l
Create a single site in batches.

1.
On the toolbar, select a base station template from the

down list.
2.
Click
3.
Move the mouse pointer to the target position in the map window.
4.
Click the target position. A base station is created.
drop-
on the toolbar.
Create sites in batches.

1.
On the toolbar, select a base station template from the

down list.
2.
Click
drop-
on the toolbar.
(a hexagon-shaped icon), you can create a batch of base stations by

By clicking
using the same base station template.
3.
Draw the area where the base stations are to be placed.

The U-Net places a batch of base stations in the area. In the meantime, sites and cells
of the base stations are created.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
View and modify site properties.

You can right-click a site in the Explorer window or in the map window and then choose
the corresponding menu item to view and modify site properties.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Move the site.

121
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
When modifying site properties, you can change the position of the site by changing
coordinates. Alternatively, you can drag the site to a new position in the map window.
l
Delete the site.

You can right-click the site in the explorer window or in the map window and then choose
Delete from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can select the site in the map window
and then press the Delete key.
Export, search for, and group the site, set display properties of the base station.
3.7.5 Creating Repeaters

This section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards the
RF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides,
that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals
from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radio
links or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks of
different types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.
Prerequisites
Base stations (including sites and cells) are available.
Procedure
Step 1 Create repeater equipment.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Equipment > Repeater Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Repeater
Equipment window is displayed.
4.
To set the parameters of the new repeater equipment in the blank row, see Parameters for
Creating Repeaters.
l Enter the name of the new repeater equipment. After you enter the name, the system
creates a blank row to configure other repeater equipment.
l Click a property cell to change the value of the property.
Step 2 Create a repeater.

1.
2.
Choose Repeaters > New from the shortcut menu. The Repeater Properties dialog box
is displayed.
Alternatively, select the transceiver to which a repeater is added and then click
toolbar. Then, you can add a repeater directly in the map window.
on the
3.
To configure the properties of the repeater, see Parameters for Creating Repeaters.
4.
Click OK.
----End
3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver

This section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver with
cells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

122
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using different
radio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.
Prerequisites
A site has been created on the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set the transceiver parameters. For details, see Parameters for
Creating Transceivers.
Step 5 Click OK.
NOTE
If an independent site exists, you can click

on the toolbar and move the cursor to the site. When a
square frame appears around the site, click the left mouse key. After that, the system automatically creates
a transceiver and corresponding cells for the site.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
You can group transceivers.

1.
2.
3.
Right-click Transceiver and choose Group By > Grouping Mode. The U-Net
automatically groups the transceivers based on the selected grouping mode. Two
levels of grouping are supported. Table 3-32 lists the default grouping modes of
transceivers.
NOTE
You can choose Group By > More and set to display the grouping dimension in Group By.
Table 3-32 Group By
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Grouping Mode
Description
None
No grouping mode is applied.
Polygon
Calculation area.
Network Type
RAT.
Comments
Indicates the description information.
Site Equipment
Indicates the site equipment.

123
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Grouping Mode
Description
Active
Indicates whether a cell is activated or

not.
Frequency Band
Indicates the frequency band of a cell.
Scene
Indicates the scenario of a cell.
BSC ID
Indicates the BSC ID of a GSM or

CDMA cell.
RNC Name
Indicates the RNC Name of a UMTS

cell.
Alternatively, you can view common properties of a transceiver in the transceiver table and
manually set the property columns to be displayed in the table.
1.
2.
3.
Right-click Transceiver and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The
Transceiver table table is displayed.
NOTE
Common engineering parameters such as Total loss DL, Total loss UL, Number of
Transmission Antenna Ports, Number of Transmission Antennas, Number of Reception
Antennas, and Input Total Loss are displayed in the Transceiver table table by default to
reduce the time required for selection.
4.
Right-click in the Transceiver table table and choose Display Columns from the
shortcut menu.
5.
In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, view the basic site parameters
in the Sites table and select or clear the check boxes of columns that need to be
displayed or hidden in the Sites table.
6.
Close the dialog box. The Transceiver table table is updated and displays the property
columns based on the preceding settings.
3.7.7 Setting LTE-FDD Cell Parameters

This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can
set cell parameters.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 On the LTE-FDDCell tab page, set LTE-FDD cell parameters, as shown in Figure 3-24.
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells describes the parameters.
l Table 3-42 describes the Transmission Mode parameter.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

124
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l Table 3-43 describes the Advance Parameters parameter.

l Table 3-44 describes the Neighbours list parameter.
l Table 3-45 describes the Propagation Models parameter.
Figure 3-24 LTE-FDDCell
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
3.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters

This section describes the parameters for setting LTE-FDD NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameters for Creating Sites

This section describes the parameters for creating a site or modifying the properties of a site.
You can refer to this section when viewing the properties of a site in the Site Properties dialog
box.
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a site. This

parameter uniquely identifies a site.
The U-Net specifies the default name of
each new site.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

125
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Support Type
Indicates the base station type.

Macro indicates a macro base station,
and Micro indicates a micro base station.
Position
NOTE
If no map is imported,
parameters in this area are
X and Y. If a map is
imported, parameters in this
area are Longitude and
Latitude.
Altitude(m)
Indicates a geodetic coordinate X (X

coordinate).
Indicates a geodetic coordinate Y (Y

coordinate).
Longitude
Indicates a longitudinal coordinate.
Latitude
Indicates a latitudinal coordinate.
Real
Indicates the real altitude.

l If no map is imported, the default
value is 0.
l If a map is imported, the default
value is the altitude at the center of
the map.
DTM
Indicates the altitude obtained from the

DTM map.
l If no map is imported, the default
value is 0.
l If a map is imported, the default
value is the altitude at the center of
the map.
Use Altitude For

Calculation
Comments
Indicates whether to manually enter the

altitude of a site for calculation. If this
option is selected, you enter the altitude
of a site manually for calculation.
Displays the comments on the
corresponding site.
Parameters for Creating Transceivers

This section describes the parameters used for creating transceivers. You can refer to this section
when setting transceiver parameters on the General and Antenna Config tab pages in the
Transceiver Properties dialog box or in the Antenna Config table.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a

transceiver.

126
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Site
Name of the site that a transceiver belongs to.

You can click New to create a site.
Hexagon Radius(m)
Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The value

ranges from 1 to 100000.
l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the
radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius
(m) in the current site template by default.
l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node in
the navigation tree, the value of this parameter is empty
by default.
Transmission in the Number

of Antennas area
Number of transmission antennas on a base station.
Reception in the Number of

Antennas area
Number of receive antennas on a base station.

of Antenna Ports area
Number of transmission antenna ports.
Comments
Comments on a transceiver.
Table 3-34 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page

Parameter
Description
Antenna ID
ID of an antenna for a transceiver.

The ID of each antenna must be unique for a transceiver.
Power Ratio
Power allocation ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
Sector ID
ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely identifies an antenna.
Dx(m)
Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna

belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.
Dy(m)

belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.
Longitude
Longitude of an antenna.
Latitude
Latitude of an antenna.
Main Antenna
Main antenna of a transceiver.

Each cell has only one main antenna.
Azimuth
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit

is degree.

127
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
The default value is determined based on the configuration
of the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antenna
type is the type of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Electrical Downtilt
Electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.
Height(m)
Height of an antenna. The unit is meter.
RRU ID
l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU).

l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0.
l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a
transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a single
frequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you can
configure only one cell for this transceiver.
Equipment properties.
Equipment
For details, see Table 3-35.
Table 3-35 Parameters in the Equipment Configuration dialog box

Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss
l If you select the check box, you need to manually type

the total loss.
l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the total
loss.
Site Equipment
TMA
Tower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click

modify its properties.
Feeder
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Antenna feeder. You can click
to
to modify its properties.
Feeder Length(m)
Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for the

uplink and downlink.
Miscellaneous Loss(dB)
Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the

JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. You
need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.
You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

128
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. You
Total Loss(dB)
Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and

miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for the
Parameters for Creating Repeaters

This section describes the parameters for creating repeaters or repeater equipment. You can refer
to this section when viewing the properties of repeaters in the Repeater Properties dialog box
or the properties of repeater equipment in the Repeater Equipment dialog box.
Parameters in the Repeater Equipment Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of repeater equipment.

This parameter uniquely identifies repeater
equipment.
Noise Figure(dB)
Indicates the noise figure of the repeater

equipment.
The value range is from 0 to 32767 and the
unit is dB.
Min AMP Gain(dB)
Indicates the minimum amplification gain of

the repeater equipment.
unit is dB.
Max AMP Gain(dB)
Indicates the maximum amplification gain of

the repeater equipment.
unit is dB.
Max Output Power(UL)(dBm)
Indicates the maximum uploaded transmit

power of the repeater equipment.
unit is dBm.
Max Output Power(DL)(dBm)
Indicates the maximum downloaded transmit

power of the repeater equipment.
unit is dBm.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

129
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Time Delay(ms)
Indicates the time delay of the repeater

equipment.
unit is ms.
Parameters in the Repeater Properties Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a repeater. This

parameter uniquely identifies a repeater.
The U-Net enters the default name of each
new site.
Donor
Indicates the donor cell of the repeater.
Equipment
Indicates the repeater equipment.
Dx
Indicates the offset of the repeater to the site

in the X direction.
Dy
Indicates the offset of the repeater to the site

in the Y direction.
Comments
Displays the comments on the repeater.
Table 3-37 Parameters on the Donor Side tab page

Parameter
Link Type
Description
Air
Indicates the loss of a radio link.

The unit is dB.
Microwave
Indicates the loss of a microwave link.

The unit is dB.
Optical Fibre
Indicates the loss of an optical cable link.

The unit is dB.
Antenna
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Model
Indicates the model of the antenna on the

donor side.
Height(m)
Indicates the height of the antenna on the

donor side.

130
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Azimuth
Indicates the azimuth of the antenna on the

donor side.
The unit is degree.
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical downtilt of the

antenna on the donor side.
The unit is degree.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical downtilt of the

antenna on the donor side.
The unit is degree.
Feeder
Type
Indicates the type of the feeder on the donor

side.
You can select a feeder type, click ..., and then
modify the properties of the feeders.
Length(m)
l Transmission: Indicates the feeder length

on the donor side.
l Reception: Indicates the feeder length of
the reception equipment on the donor side.
Table 3-38 Parameters on the Coverage Side tab page

Parameter
Description
Active
Indicates whether the repeater is active.
Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power.
Total Gain
Antenna
Downlink
Indicates the total gain on the downlink.
Uplink
Indicates the total gain on the uplink.
Model
Indicates the model of the antenna on the

coverage side.
Height(m)
Indicates the height of the antenna on the

coverage side.
Azimuth
Indicates the azimuth of the antenna on the

coverage side.
The unit is degree.
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical downtilt of the

antenna on the coverage side.
The unit is degree.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

131
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical downtilt of the

antenna on the coverage side.
The unit is degree.
Feeder
Type
Indicates the type of the feeder on the

coverage side.
You can select a feeder type, click ..., and then
modify the properties of the feeders.
l Transmission: Indicates the feeder length
on the coverage side.
Length(m)
l Reception: Indicates the feeder length of

the reception equipment on the coverage
side.
Table 3-39 Parameters on the Propagation tab page

Parameter
Main
Matrix Main
Matrix
Extended
Matrix
Extended
Matrix
Description
Propagation Model
Indicates the main propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the main

propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation resolution of the

main propagation model.
Propagation Model
Indicates the extended propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the

extended propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation resolution of the

extended propagation model.
Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates

This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying the
properties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base station
templates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.
Site Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a base station template.

132
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Support Type

Macro indicates a macro base station, and Micro indicates a
micro base station.
Use Altitude For Calculation
Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site for

calculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter the
altitude of a site for calculation.
Hexagon Radius
Indicates the radius of a cell.
Comments
Description.
Transceiver area on the LTE-FDD tab page

Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Indicates the number of transceivers in a site.
Model
Indicates the type of an antenna.
Site Equipment
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical tilt angle.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical tilt angle.
Height/Ground(m)
Indicates the height of an antenna.
First Sector Azimuth
Indicates the azimuth of the first sector.
Transmission in the
Number of Antennas area

Antennas area
Transmission in the
Number of Antenna Ports
area
Total Loss(DL)
Indicates the total downlink loss.
Total Loss(UL)
Indicates the total uplink loss.
Comments
Description.
General tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.

133
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
RS Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the reference signal on a subcarrier.

The unit is dBm.
Actual Load(DL)
Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges

from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL)
Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target IoT(UL)(dB)
Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noise

to the volume of increased noise on the uplink.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)
Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on the

uplink.
CCU IoT(dB)
Indicates the IoT of users in the cell center.

The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is
12.5.
CEU IoT(dB)
Indicates the IoT of users at the cell edge.

10.5.
Frequency Band
Indicates a frequency band.
Channel Index
Indicates a channel index.
Reception
Indicates a receiver.
Transmission Mode

For details about parameter values, see Table 3-40.
Priority
Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,
the higher the priority of the cell is.
Channel Relativity
Indicates whether channel relativity is considered.

By default, this option is not selected.
COMP
Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabled

on the base station.
Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for the
base station to increase cell edge capacity and average cell
throughput. By default, this option is not selected.
IRC
Indicates whether the interference rejection combining

(IRC) function is enabled.
If colored interference is strong, enable the IRC to suppress
combining signal interference and increase uplink gain. By
default, this option is not selected.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

134
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Advance tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter
Description
Downlink
Indicates the downlink parameters.

You can set downlink parameters in the text boxes in this area.
Uplink
Indicates the uplink parameters.

You can set uplink parameters in the text boxes in this area.
Frequency Selectivity
Schedule
Indicates whether to enable the frequency scheduling

function.
If this option is selected, the system allocates the proper
network resources to users during capacity simulation.
ICIC(UL)
Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference

coordination (ICIC) in the uplink.
l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not
enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cell
properties.
l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell center
and CEU IoT is used for the cell edge.
Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink.
ICIC(DL)
l When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the PA value set

in cell attributes is used.
l When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, ICIC is
enabled. In this case, the CCU PA value is used for the
cell center and the CEU PA value for the cell edge.
l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC can
be enabled automatically and edge band mode can be
configured automatically. Users can plan the edge band
modes and then deliver the band modes without having to
configure the parameter for the cells one by one.
Edge Frequency Style(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge users

in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2,
or Style3).

135
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Edge Frequency Style(DL)

in the downlink.
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state
is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).
l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following
4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1,
Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a,
Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1
(AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1
(LowPowerReuse1).
l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,
the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all users
and the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameter
is set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter is
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the
cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Power Control
Indicates the power control in the downlink.
Target Load
Indicates the target load.
Control Channel Overhead
l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks

(RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range is
from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of
RBs of the entire bandwidth.
l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonal
frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the
downlink PDCCH.
Max Schedule Users
Indicates the maximum number of scheduled subscribers on

the uplink and downlink.
RS SINR Access Threshold

(DL)(dB)
Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)

access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit is
dB.
Schedule Policy
Indicates a scheduling policy.

l RR: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling
algorithm.
l PF: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling
algorithm and the maximum signal to interference ratio.
l MAX_CI: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the
maximum signal to interference ratio.
TTI Bundling
Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.
VMIMO
Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multiple-output

(VMIMO) is considered.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

136
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Power Offset tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter
Description
PBCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power

of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 and
the unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power

the unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relative

to the power of the reference signal. The value range is from
-15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PDCCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative

PHICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the power

of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The
unit is dB.
PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the transmit power on the PDCCH RE

relative to that on the RS RE.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -3.
CCU PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by

users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS
power.
CEU PA(dB)

users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.
The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.
PB(dB)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols

of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0,
1, 2, or 3.

137
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagation Models tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Indicates a propagation model.

l When the parameter is present in the Main Matrix area,
it indicates the main propagation model.
l When the parameter is present in the Extended Matrix
area, it indicates the extended propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of a propagation model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation resolution of a propagation model.
Table 3-40 Description of Transmission Mode Values

Value
Description
TM1
Indicates a single antenna port for eNodeBs.
TM2
Indicates the open-loop transmit diversity, which is used for

the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R/8T8R configuration.
TM3
Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for the

eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM4
Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for the

TM6
Indicates the closed-loop transmit diversity, which is used

for the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.
TM7
Indicates the signal-stream beamforming.

This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDD
network.
TM8
Indicates the signal-stream and dual-stream beamforming.

network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
OL_Adaptive
Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2

and TM3.
CL_Adaptive
Indicates the closed-loop adaptive handover between TM4

and TM6.
OL_CL_Adaptive
Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2,

TM3, TM4, and TM6.

138
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Value
Description
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive
Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that are

compatible with the 3GPP R8 specification and do not
support the selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform
adaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM7.
network.
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive

compatible with the 3GPP R9 specification and support the
selection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptive
handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM8.
network.
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells

This section describes the parameters for creating an LTE-FDD cell or modifying the properties
of an LTE-FDD cell.
LTE-FDDCell Tab Page

Table 3-41 LTE-FDDCell tab page
Parameter
Description
GCI
Indicates the global cell identity of a cell.
Name
Indicates the name of a carrier.

The U-Net enters the default name for each new carrier.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Active
Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.
Frequency Band
Channel Index
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value ranges

from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL)
0 to 1.
Actual Load(DL)

from 0 to 1.
RS Power(dBm)

The unit is dBm.

139
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
PBCH to RS(dB)

of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB)

of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink physical control format

indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power of
the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The
unit is dB.
PDCCH to RS(dB)

to the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from
PHICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQ

indicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power of
the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. The
unit is dB.
Max Power(dBm)
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)

uplink.
High Speed
Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set to one

of the following values:
l LowSpeed
l HighSpeed
l HighwaySpeed
Radius(m)
Min Root Sequence Index
Indicates the minimum ZC sequence of a cell.
Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor)
Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on the

neighbor relationship).
The value of this parameter must be an integer larger than 0.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Reception

(DL)(dB)

access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit
is dB.
Priority
PB(dB)

1, 2, or 3.

140
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Schedule Policy

algorithm.
PCI
Indicates the physical ID of a cell.
PCI Reuse Distance(Km)
Indicates the minimum PCI reuse distance.
PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor)
Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on the

Scene
MCC
Indicates the mobile country code (MCC).
MNC
Indicates the mobile network code (MNC).
CI
Indicates the ID of a cell.
DlEarfcn
Indicates a downlink ARFCN.
UlEarfcn
Indicates an uplink ARFCN.
TAC
Indicates the tracking area code (TAC).
Local Cell ID
Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cell

from other cells under the same eNodeB.
Reselect Priority
Indicates the cell reselection priority.
PA(dB)

CCU PA(dB)

power.
CEU PA(dB)

-1.77.
CCU IoT(dB)

12.5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

141
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CEU IoT(dB)

10.5.
Alpha
This is an open loop power control parameter and indicates

the path loss compensation coefficient.
Po(dBm)
This is an open loop power control parameter.
TTI Bundling

VMIMO

IRC

COMP
Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is

enabled on the base station.
Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for
the base station to increase cell edge capacity and average
cell throughput. By default, this option is not selected.
Channel Relativity

Transmission Mode

For the details of the value, see Table 3-42.
VIP
For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters cannot
be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt, and pilot
power.
Throughput(UL)
Uplink throughput of a single subscriber. The value ranges

from 0 to int.Max.
Throughput(DL)
Downlink throughput of a single subscriber. The value

ranges from 0 to int.Max.
Cell Throughput(UL)
Uplink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to

int.Max.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

142
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Cell Throughput(DL)
Downlink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to

int.Max.
Density
Density of subscribers. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max.

Azimuth Locked
Whether the azimuth is locked.
Azimuth Min. Value
Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value ranges

from -360 to 360.
The default value is -20.
Azimuth Max. Value
Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value

ranges from -360 to 360.
Electronic Downtilt Locked
Whether the electrical tilt is locked.
Electronic Downtilt Min.

Value
Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value

Electronic Downtilt Max.

Value
Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The value

RsPower Locked
Indicates whether the pilot power is locked.
RsPower Min. Value(dB)
Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value

RsPower Max. Value(dB)
Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The value

Fitness Threshold(%)
Fitness threshold. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

State
Cell status, which is used to determine a cell in outage. The

value can be Working or Outage.
The default value is Working.
Advance Parameters
Sets advanced parameters by clicking this button.

Neighbors list
Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

143
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Propagation Models
Sets the propagation model by clicking this button.


Value
Description
TM1
TM2

TM3

TM4

TM6

TM7

network.
TM8

network.
OL_Adaptive

and TM3.
CL_Adaptive

and TM6.
OL_CL_Adaptive

TM3, TM4, and TM6.
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive

network.
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive

network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

144
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-43 Advance Parameters tab page

Parameter
Description
Schedule

function.
ICIC(UL)

coordination (ICIC) on the uplink.
properties.
ICIC(DL)

modes and then deliver the band modes without having
to configure the parameter for the cells one by one.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1,
Style2, or Style3).

145
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description

in the downlink.
(LowPowerReuse1).
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Power Control
Indicates the power control on the downlink.
Edge Frequency Style

on the uplink and downlink.

downlink PDCCH.
Max Schedule Users

Target IoT(UL)(dB)

Table 3-44 Cell Neighbors tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Intra-frequency Neighbors
Indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-frequency Neighbors
Indicates a list of inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Indicates a list of inter-RAT neighboring cells.

146
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-45 Propagation tab page

Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the main propagation

model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation precision of the main propagation

model.
Propagation Model
Indicates the extension propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the extended propagation

model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation precision of the extended

propagation model.
General Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Antenna ID

Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)

Dy(m)

Longitude
Latitude
Main Antenna

Azimuth

is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

147
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID

Equipment
Antenna Config Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Antenna ID

Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)

Dy(m)

Longitude
Latitude
Main Antenna

Azimuth

is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt

148
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Height(m)
RRU ID

Equipment

Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss

the total loss.
loss.
Site Equipment
TMA

Feeder
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
to
Feeder Length(m)


JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Total Loss(dB)


149
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction

channel quality.
3.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction

This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculating
link loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and
prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function by
learning the basic knowledge.
Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDD Prediction Counters

This section describes the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
NOTE
Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select the
corresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcut
menu.
Table 3-49 lists the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Table 3-49 Description of LTE-FDD prediction counters
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Category
Counter
Description
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
Best Server
Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells that

receive downlink signals.
DL RSRP
Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS)

received from the primary serving cell.
DL BandWidth RSRP
Strength of downlink reference signals on the entire

bandwidth.
DL RSSI
Total power received by a UE on the entire

bandwidth. The power includes the receive power of
the serving cell, interference power of other cells,
and the noise power of the UE.
DL PDSCH Signal
Level
Power received on the PDSCH on a resource element

(RE).
Handover Area
Whether an area is a handover area.
DL PBCH Signal
Level
PBCH signal strength on an RE.
DL PCFICH Signal
Level
PCFICH signal strength on an RE.

150
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Description
DL PDCCH Signal
Level
Downlink PDCCH signal strength.
DL PHICH Signal
Level
PHICH signal strength on an RE.
DL SCH Signal Level
SCH signal strength on an RE.
DL ICIC Zone
Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink central

area and edge area that meet the downlink ICIC
threshold.
Overlapping Zones
Number of cells in a coverage spot.
Pilot Pollution
Determines whether a point has pilot pollution and

checks the number of points having pilot pollution.
To obtain a more accurate result, you are advised to
select With Shadow.
NOTE
By analyzing the number of cells covering each spot that
reaches the pilot pollution threshold, you can learn about
pilot pollution in areas such as the poor coverage area
intuitively.
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(DL)
Coverage by
Signal Level
(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
DL RS SINR
Signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of the

downlink reference signal that a UE receives. This
counter reflects the quality of the downlink reference
signal.
DL PDSCH SINR
SINR of the downlink PDSCH. This counter reflects

the quality of the downlink PDSCH.
DL RSRQ
Quality of the received downlink reference signals.
Geometry
Difference between the power of the strongest signal

that a UE receives on the entire bandwidth and the
power of the interference and noise that the UE
receives on the entire bandwidth.
DL PBCH SINR
Downlink PBCH SINR.
DL PCFICH SINR
Downlink PCFICH SINR.
DL PDCCH SINR
Downlink PDCCH SINR.
DL PHICH SINR
Downlink PHICH SINR.
DL SCH SINR
Downlink SCH SINR.
UL RSRP
Strength of the uplink reference signal on an RE.
UL User RB Txpower
Uplink transmit power on a resource block (RB).
UL User Band
Txpower
Uplink transmit power on the user bandwidth.

151
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Description
UL PUSCH Signal
Level
Power that a cell receives on the PUSCH RE.
PRACH Signal Level
PRACH signal strength on an RE.
UL ICIC ZONE
Uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink central area and
edge area that meet the uplink ICIC threshold.
PUCCH Signal Level
PUCCH signal strength on an RE.
UL RS SINR
SINR of the uplink reference signal.
UL PUSCH SINR
SINR of the uplink PUSCH. This counter reflects the

quality of the uplink PUSCH.
PRACH SINR
PRACH SINR.
PUCCH SINR
PUCCH SINR.
Coverage by
MCS(DL)
PDSCH MCS
The highest MCS supported by the downlink

PDSCH.
Coverage by
Throughput
(DL)
DL MAC Peak
Throughput
Downlink peak throughput on the MAC layer.
DL Application Peak
Throughput
Downlink peak throughput on the application layer.
Coverage by
MCS(UL)
PUSCH MCS
The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.
Coverage by
Throughput
(UL)
UL MAC Peak
Throughput
Uplink peak throughput on the MAC layer.
UL Application Peak
Throughput
Uplink peak throughput on the application layer.
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(UL)
Predicting IRC gain is supported if Actual IoT(UL)

(dB) is set and the IRC.xml file is modified.
Procedure for Performing Prediction

This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.
Figure 3-25 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

152
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-25 Procedure of prediction
LTE-FDD Prediction Algorithm

channel quality. This section describes the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm through a schematic
diagram.
Figure 3-26 shows the schematic diagram of the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

153
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-26 LTE-FDD prediction algorithm
Table 3-50 describes the processes shown in Figure 3-26.

Table 3-50 Description of the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Traversing all the cells
Determine whether the cells in the calculation area are

activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction
counters of this cell are not calculated.
Obtaining the path

loss matrix
l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate the

path loss matrix.
l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtained
directly.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Querying the antenna

gain, equipment loss,
and penetration loss
You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain,

equipment loss, and penetration loss during the
calculation of link loss.

154
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Predicting slow fading

by using the
shadowing margin
To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges with

a certain probability. Certain power of the base station
is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved
power is called shadowing margin.
You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowing
margin into account during the calculation of link loss.
Calculating the DL
RSRP to determine the
primary serving cell
The DL RSRP indicates the receive level at the

downlink and it is a key counter in prediction. You can
determine the primary serving cell based on this
counter.
Calculating the power

of interference noises
to determine the
handover area
You can calculate the power of interference noises and

determine the handover area.
Calculating counters
of the traffic channel
and common channel
based on the BIN
Calculate the DL RSSI, DL RS SINR, and traffic

channel counters. The U-Net calculates the PUSCH
SINR when the uplink throughput reaches the
maximum value. When the PUSCH SINR is
calculated, the PUSCH MCS and PUSCH Peak
Throughput are also calculated.
Displaying prediction
results
The U-Net displays the prediction results in different

colors in the window and provides a prediction report.
Basic Knowledge of Link Loss

Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculating
link loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadow
fading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink.
The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows:
l
Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gain
of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base
station + Total loss of the base station
Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna
gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the
base station + Total loss of the base station
The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which are
included into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA loss
which is included into the total loss of the base station.
Table 3-51 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

155
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-51 Meanings of factors in the formulas

Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the

human body
Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due to

the shielding or absorption of the human body.
Feeder loss of a
terminal
Loss of the feeder on a terminal.
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Gain of the antenna on a terminal.
Path loss
Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receive
antenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.
Shadow fading
When an electromagnetic wave is blocked by fluctuant terrains,

buildings, or vegetation areas in the propagation path, the shadow
of the magnetic field exits.
When an MS travels through the shadow of different barriers, the
received signal strength decreases, and the field strength at the
receiving antenna changes. In this case, fading is generated. This
fading is called shadow fading.
Penetration loss
Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles,

and leaves.
Antenna gain of a base

station
Gain of the antenna on a base station.
Total loss of the base

station
Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,
feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightning
arresters), and connectors
3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss

The path loss refers to the loss of strength of signals transmitted from a TX end to an RX end.
You must calculate the path loss because it is an input required for prediction. The U-Net
automatically calculates the path loss and generates a .loss file for each cell. Alternatively, you
can manually calculate the path loss before performing the prediction. This section describes
how to manually calculate the path loss.
Prerequisites
l
Base stations (sites and cells) are available.
Propagation models are assigned to cells.
Context
You can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Calculation

156
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is
available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Net
checks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculation
area are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,
the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.
l
Force calculation
If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of the
validity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checks
the validity of calculation results and updates the results.
Procedure
Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate
Right-click and choose Calculation > Calculate Path Loss

Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Calculate forcibly
Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate Path

Loss Matrices from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.
The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information about
the path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Net
starts calculating the path loss.
Step 5 Query the calculation results
After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the Project
Name.losses folder that saves the project file.
Click
to stop ongoing calculations.
Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation

In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the Event
Viewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shown
in Figure 3-27.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

157
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-27 Event Viewer
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the base
station and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to change
the default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installation
directory.
3.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation

During the network prediction, the standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for certain
prediction counters.
Context
l
In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters:
DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACH
SINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and UL
RS SINR.
In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be
set for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,
PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.
In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for
the following predication counters:
Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.
In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set
for the following predication counters:
CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/
Nt.
In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to
be set for the following predication counters:
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

158
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter.
Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display
If ...
Then ...
The map information is

not imported
Click Default Value to change the default values of parameters

under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard
Deviation.

imported
Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parameters

Deviation.
NOTE
For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, see
Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
3.8.4 Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups

The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists of
one or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.
Prerequisites
l
A U-Net project is already created.
The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method
for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.
Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for prediction
groups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.
1.
In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

159
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.
You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagation
model.
5.
Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 Skip this step if you have set the power offset of the PBCH channel relative to the RS channel
in the cell properties. Otherwise, proceed with the following steps.
1.
Select a transceiver in the map window.
2.
3.
Set the related parameters on the cell property tab.

For example, to calculate the DL PBCH Signal Level prediction indicator, you need to set
the PBCH to RS parameter.
Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.

Step 4 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28 New
Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, and
select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDD
Prediction Counters.
Step 6 Click Next.
Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.See Figure 3-29 For parameter
description, see Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

160
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-29 Group Properties
Step 8 Click OK
Step 9 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the prediction
group, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, and
view detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.
3.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell

The U-Net can predict the performance of a single cell in a specified area. In this case, other
cells are deactivated by default. The single cell prediction enables you to effectively observe the
prediction results of each cell in batches in the case that no interference to cells is caused.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

161
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The calculation area is created.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.
Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog
box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the name of a prediction group by referring to Parameters in the New Prediction Group
Dialog Box, and select prediction items for the prediction group.
Step 5 Click Next. Then, set properties such as calculation area, prediction conditions, prediction bands
for new prediction groups by referring to Parameter in the LTE Group Properties Dialog
Box.
Step 6 Click OK.
Step 7 Optional: If you clear Calculate Now in Step 4, right-click the prediction group and choose
Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number
of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view
details.
3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result

view detailed KPI result reports.
Prerequisites
The prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

162
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Option
Description
Re-calculate counters.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >

counter item.
2. Choose Unlock from the shortcut menu.
This counter is in the unlocked state.
If Lock is displayed in the shortcut menu, this counter is
in the unlocked state.
3. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
4. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.
All the unlocked counters in this group will be used for
calculation.
If all the counters are in the locked state, Calculate is
unavailable.
Add or delete a counter.

2. Choose Edit Studies from the shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed dialog box, select or clear the check box
of the counter to be added or deleted.
4. Click OK.
5. Perform the following operations as required.
l if a counter is added, the system displays the new
counter under the prediction group node in the
navigation tree. In this case, you need to re-calculate
counters. For detailed operations, see Re-calculate
counters.
l If a counter is deleted, the system deletes the counter
from the prediction group node in the navigation tree.
In addition, the corresponding rendering color is
removed.
If the deleted counter is Best Server and a traffic map
uses this prediction group, data of this prediction
group will also be deleted from the traffic map.
View detailed report on a

counter.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >

counter item.
2. Right-click and choose Generate Report from the
shortcut menu.
3. In the displayed dialog box, view detailed information
about the counter. For detailed operations, see
Parameters for Viewing Detailed Prediction Result
Reports.
NOTE
You can select a hot spot from the drop-down list box in the
Statistics Zone area to view information about the specified hot
spot.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

163
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Option
Description
Set the properties of a counter. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >
counter item.
3. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as
display color on the Display tab page.
Lock or unlock counters in
batches.
All the unlocked counters in

the prediction group are
calculated in batches.

2. Right-click and select or clear the check box of Studies
Locked from the shortcut menu.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.
2. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.
----End
3.8.7 Viewing the Prediction Result

You can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicators
by using the PDF or CDF diagram.
Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map)

After calculating the prediction, you can query the prediction results in different legend colors
in the map window.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Set the legend information and display properties of prediction.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Study Properties dialog box is displayed.
4.
Click the Display tab.
5.
Set items such as counter range, display color, and transparency.
6.
Select the ranges to be displayed in the Legend window. See Figure 3-30.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

164
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-30 Display tab
7.
Select Add to legend. The selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.
8.
Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the
Legend window.
9.
Click OK.
Step 2 Query the legend information.

Choose Window > Legend on the menu bar. The Legend window is displayed.
In the displayed window, you can query the name and color corresponding to each range. If you
have selected Show Statistic, you can also query the coverage area corresponding to a range
and the percentage of the area to the whole calculation area.
Step 3 Query the prediction results of each cell.
The map displays the cell coverage according to the preset legend color and transparency. In
addition, the Legend window displays the size and percentage of coverage areas, helping you
to query the coverage and perform relevant analysis.
----End
Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart)

After performing a coverage prediction, you can view each coverage prediction counter in the
cumulative distribution function (CDF) chart, inverse CDF chart, and probability distribution
function (PDF) chart based on coverage prediction groups.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

165
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The coverage prediction calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Groupx and choose
Statistics(CDF) or Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu. The Statistics dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-31. The following takes the CDF chart for example.
Figure 3-31 Statistics
Step 3 Select a prediction counter, hot spot area, statistical area, and display mode from the Study,
Zone, Statistics Area, and Figure Style drop-down list boxes respectively.
The CDF, inverse CDF, or PDF chart of the selected counter is displayed in the Statistics dialog
box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

166
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Zone drop-down list box to view the information about the selected hot
spot.
l For the LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best
Server, Handover Area, DL ICIC Zone, UL ICIC Zone, Pilot Pollution, PDSCH MCS, and PUSCH
MCS cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are discrete values. You can select
DL MAC Peak Throughput, UL MAC Peak Throughput, DL Application Peak Throughput, and UL
Application Peak Throughput to view the average throughput and cell edge throughput.
l For the GSM network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,
Coverage Area, and Coding Scheme cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are
discrete values.
l For the UMTS network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,
HSDPA CQI, Pilot Pollution, and Number Of Service cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because
their results are discrete values.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu to
save the chart in the Statistics dialog box. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif,
or .bmp format.
Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu to print the
chart in the Statistics dialog box.
Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the
chart in the Statistics dialog box to the clipboard.
3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result

After calculation on prediction, you can further analyze the prediction result. For example, after
improving network parameters, you can re-analyze the prediction result and compare the
prediction results before and after parameter adjustment. Based on the overall result of prediction
analysis, you can use the point-based analysis function to further analyze a focus object.
Analyzing Prediction Results

The U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences.
This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.
Procedure
Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.
Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.
Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.
Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > first prediction group.
3.
Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

167
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
1.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > copied prediction group.
2.
Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.
1.
2.
Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.
3.
Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left.

NOTE
l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colors
on the map window.
l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group
4.
Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.
5.
View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.
----End
Example
This section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.
The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antenna
downtilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Antenna Config tab Page.
5.
Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.
After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare the
two coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.
Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After the
recalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.
To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.
Follow-up Procedure
l
To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from
the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.
To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut
menu.
To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut
menu.
Analyzing Terrain Profiles by Using Point Analysis

This section describes how to analyze terrain profiles by using the point analysis function. You
can analyze the signal receive status between a cell and a terminal on the terrain profile by using
the point analysis function. A terrain profile is calculated through the propagation model in real
time. Therefore, you can analyze any selected point on the terrain profile. After a propagation
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

168
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
model is allocated to a cell, the U-Net provides the profile terrain and calculates the path loss
between the cell and the receive point and the receive level of the corresponding terminal based
on the NE data and geographic data.
Prerequisites
l
Base stations are available.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell and a carrier from the Transceiver and Cell drop-down
list boxes respectively.
Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set cell edge coverage probability in the Cell Edge Coverage
Probability(%) text box. If Indoor Coverage is selected, penetration loss will be taken into
account.
Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, select a capacity simulation group, terminal type, service type,
and mobility type from the Simulation Group, Terminal, Service, and Mobility drop-down
list boxes, respectively. Then, set neighboring cell PDSCH load and neighboring cell PDCCH
load in the Neighbour PDSCH Load and Neighbour PDCCH Load text boxes respectively.
Step 5 Switch back to the Profile tab page and click a point on the map.
The point changes to
, which represents a terminal. Then, a line connecting the terminal and
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the pointer to move the
cursor.
NOTE
The preceding operations can also be performed on other tab pages including the Reception tab page. The
cursor, however, moves slowly on these tab pages. Therefore, you are advised to switch to the Profile tab
page to perform the operation.
Step 6 On the Profile tab page, view the terrain profile analysis information.
l The grey area indicates the terrain condition between the cell and the receive point.
The X-coordinate indicates the geographic distance between the cell and the receive point.
The Y-coordinate indicates the altitude.
l The blue ellipse indicates the Fresnel region of diffraction.
l The green straight line indicates the line-of-sight distance.
l Select DL RSRP to view the receive level of the terminal.
l Select Path Loss to view the path loss between the cell and the receive point.
l Propagation model used by the cell.
l Geographic distance between the cell and the terminal.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
View detailed link budget.

169
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Right-click the profile and choose Link Budget from the shortcut menu. The Link
Budget dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter
Description of the Link Budget Window.
l
View detailed information about the propagation model. You can perform this operation
only when the propagation model is SPM.
Right-click the profile and choose Model Details from the shortcut menu. The Model
Details dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see Parameter
Description of the Model Details Window.
Copy a profile.
Right-click the profile and choose Copy from the shortcut menu. The profile is copied to
the clipboard of the operating system.
You can move the cursor to dynamically view the profile analysis information about any
point.
Analyzing Prediction Results by Using the Point Analysis Function

After prediction is complete, you can further analyze the prediction of certain positions by using
the point analysis function. For example, you can check the list of cells that receive signals and
analyze the strength of received signals.
Prerequisites
l
Base stations are available.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.
Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage
Probability(%).
Step 4 Click a point on the map.
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the
cursor.
Step 5 On the Reception tab page, check the list of cells from which signals can be received and check
the strength of the received signal.
The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order
from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reception tab page. The cell that has the highest signal
strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.
Keep the cursor at the selected point. Then, you can check the received signal strength of each
cell.
Step 6 Query the statistical information about the selected point on the Results tab page.
The statistics are related to the following items:
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

170
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l Longitude, latitude, and altitude

l Clutter class
l List of cells from which signals can be received, and the received signal strength
----End
3.8.9 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results

You can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result by
Bin point.
Exporting Prediction Results in Batches

After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then export
a statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Step 3 Choose Export Results from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the Export Results dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parameters
for Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Step 5 Optional: You can also select the detailed export contents (such as the name, coverage area,
current coverage percentage, and cumulative coverage percentage) of each counter in Select
Statistics Data.
Step 6 Click Export.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The file is named in the
following format: Name of the prediction group_Name of the counter.Export format.
Exporting the Detailed LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point

After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Bin
points in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinal
and latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.
Procedure
l
Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.
You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin points
in this area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

171
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
1.
2.

If...
Then...
Export the detailed

prediction results of a
prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.
Export the detailed

single counter in a
prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx

> counter item.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
The U-Net exports the detailed prediction results of Bin points based on the pilot power.
This function supports the single-mode network only.
You can specify the range of receive level and just export the detailed prediction results of
Bin points in the specified range.
1.
2.

If...
Then...
Export the detailed

prediction group
Export the detailed

single counter in a
prediction group

> DL RSRP.
NOTE
You can set ranges in the property dialog box corresponding to the DL RSRP.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > DL RSRP from the shortcut menu.

When you do not select the DL RSRP indicator when performing prediction
calculation, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power.
The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coverage
area of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and the
cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
4.
Select the range of the DL RSRP.

The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points whose DL
RSRP is within the selected range.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

172
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Click Export.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. By default, the file is saved
on the desktop of the PC and the default file name is PredictionData.csv.
The following contents are exported:
l
BINID: It is automatically identified by the U-Net.
X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinates

are exported.
Counter value: indicates the value of selected counter.
Printing Prediction Results in Batches

After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters in
batches. The results include a prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.
Prerequisites
l
The printer is properly set.

Choose File > Print Setting. In the displayed Print Setting dialog box, click Printer....
Procedure
Step 3 Select counters to be printed from the prediction group, as shown in Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32 Select counters to be printed

Step 5 Choose Batch Print from the shortcut menu. The Batch Print dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 In Select Polygon, select the target area for print.
If you select a polygon, the external rectangle of this polygon is the target area for print.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

173
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 7 In Prediction, select the counters to be printed.

Step 8 Click Print.
The coverage prediction results of all the selected counters are printed.
----End
3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data

After a coverage prediction group is calculated, you can use DT data to adjust the group to
improve the accuracy of feature data and positioning. If no DT data is to be adjusted, you can
skip this section.
Prerequisites
l
Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been
imported or created.
Coverage prediction about the DL RSRP counter has been completed.
A DT data file has been imported.
Procedure
Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose DT Adjust Feature Database from the shortcut menu. The
DT Adjust Feature Database dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 DT Adjust Feature Database
Step 4 Set related parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about parameters, see Parameters
for Adjusting the DT Feature Database.
Step 5 Click Adjust.
----End
3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data

This section describes how to export data from the feature database after the prediction is
performed to implement geographical positioning.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

174
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
Feature data indicates the geographical distribution of network signals. On an actual network, a
geographical location may be covered by signals from multiple cells. The cell signal strength
and cell information are the signal features of this geographical location. The feature database
contains information about the signal features of all geographical locations on a network. The
MR positioning technology determines the geographical information about the actual
measurement points by matching the actual network coverage information and the feature
database.
This function exports Top N data of all received levels within each lattice and applies only to
single-mode networks.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.
The dialog box shown in Figure 3-34 is displayed.
Figure 3-34 Export By Top Signal Level
Step 4 Set the minimum value and the top N maximum receive levels to be exported.
Step 6 Set the save path, file name, and file type. Then, export the preset information.
NOTE
l To use this function successfully, you must select the DL RSRP counter when creating a prediction
group, as shown in Figure 3-35.
l To export top N receive levels within the lattice, you must set TopNSignalLevel when creating a
prediction group. This parameter indicates that the top N maximum receive levels will be calculated,
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

175
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-35 New_Prediction_Group
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

176
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-36 TopNSignalLevel
----End
3.8.12 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Prediction

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for creating prediction groups and exporting
prediction results by using the U-Net.
Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups

This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the properties
of a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New
Prediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

177
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Group Name
Name of a prediction group. This parameter

uniquely identifies a prediction group.
The U-Net provides a default name for each
created prediction group in this parameter field.
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Whether to calculate each prediction counter

immediately.
Parameter in the LTE Group Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-52 Parameters on the General tab Page
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a prediction group.
Resolution(m)
Precision of the prediction.
Intra-Frequency Handover(dB)
Handover threshold of intra-frequency cells.

This parameter is valid only after Handover
Area and Overlapping Zones are set.
Inter-Frequency Handover(dB)
Handover threshold of inter-frequency cells.

Area and Overlapping Zones are set.
Polygon
Calculation area for the prediction.
Neighbour PDSCH Load
Whether the load on the neighboring cell is taken

into account in the calculation.
The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Neighbour PDCCH Load
Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboring cell

is taken into account in the calculation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
With Shadow
Whether the shadow fading is taken into account

in the calculation.
Cell Edge Coverage Probability
Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the

probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the edge
of a cell.
Indoor Coverage
Whether the penetration loss is taken into account.

178
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-53 Parameters on the Condition tab Page

Parameter
Description
Signal Level(DL)(dBm)
Receive threshold of the downlink reference

signal.
Signal Level(UL)(dBm)
Receive threshold of the uplink reference signal.
Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm)
Interference threshold.
Terminal
Terminal type.
Service
Service type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Table 3-54 Parameters on the Advanced tab Page

Parameter
Description
Frequency Name
Name of a frequency band.
Channel Index
Frequency corresponding to a frequency band.
TopNSignalLevel
TopN maximum receive levels to be calculated.
Parameters for Exporting Prediction Results in Batches

This section describes the parameters for exporting prediction results in .csv, .mif, or .jpg format
in batches. You can refer to this section when exporting prediction results from the Export
Results dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Path
Indicates the path to save the data to be exported. You can

click Browse to specify a save path.
Select Export Content
Selects the contents to be exported.
Select Polygon
Selects an area where counters are to be exported.
Prediction
Group
Indicates the name of a prediction group.
Study
Indicates the object to be exported, that is, the prediction

counter items in each prediction group.
MIF
Exports the prediction chart in .mif format.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
JPG
Exports the prediction chart in .jpg format.
Statistics
Exports the prediction report in .csv format.

179
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Select
Statistics
Data
Description
Name
Indicates the name of an exported prediction counter.
Area(km2)
Indicates the coverage area of an exported prediction

counter.
Percentage(%)
Indicates the percentage of the coverage area of an exported

prediction counter.
Cumulate(%)
Indicates the cumulative percentage of the coverage area of

an exported prediction counter.
Parameters for Viewing Detailed Prediction Result Reports

This section describes the parameters for viewing detailed prediction result reports. You can
refer to this section when viewing the detailed prediction result reports in the Export Data
window.
Parameters in the Export Data Window

Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of a KPI.

The value segments of the KPI are listed under the KPI name.
Coverage Area(km2)
Indicates the coverage area.
% of Calculate Area
Indicates the percentage of the calculation area.

Indicates the percentage of the calculation area within the value
segment to the total coverage area of this KPI.
% of Cumulate Calculate
Area
Indicates the cumulative percentage of the calculation area.

For example, the cumulative percentage value in row 3 in a list
sorted in ascending order is the sum of the value in row 3 and
the values in all the subsequent rows.
Click
% of Coverage Area
or
to sort the list in ascending or descending order.
Indicates the percentage of the coverage area.

For example, the value in row 3 is the percentage of the
coverage area of row 3 to the total coverage area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
% of Cumulate Coverage
Area
Indicates the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.
DefaultName
Indicates the default name.
For example, the cumulative percentage value in row 3 in a list

sorted in ascending order is the sum of the percentage of row 3
and the percentages in all the subsequent rows.

180
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters for Adjusting the DT Feature Database

This section describes the parameters for adjusting the DT feature database in the DT Adjust
Feature Database dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Drive Test File
DT data file.
Selected from a drop-down list. The default
value is All.
Clutter Resolution(m)
Indicates the clutter resolution. The default

value is 300.
Clutter Shift Threshold(%)
Indicates the clutter shift threshold. The

default value is 50.
3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation

3.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Capacity Simulation

This chapter describes the basic knowledge of capacity simulation, including the relations
between traffic parameters and the capacity simulation algorithm. You can develop a better
understanding of the capacity simulation function by learning the basic knowledge.
Process of Capacity Simulation

This section describes the process for performing capacity simulation through the U-Net.
Figure 3-37 shows the process of capacity simulation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

181
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-37 Process of capacity simulation
Table 3-55 describes the process of capacity simulation.

Table 3-55 Description of the capacity simulation process
Procedure
Operation
3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps
3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group
Choose Calculate from the corresponding shortcut menu.
3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result
Basic Knowledge of Traffic Parameters

The U-Net obtains the information about the average load status of the network by means of
simulation based on specific UE distribution. Traffic parameters, which reflect the basic
information about UE distribution, include the UE type, mobility type, terminal type, service
type, environment type, MCS, and receiver. Traffic parameters can be used to generate specific
traffic map.
Figure 3-38 shows the relationship between traffic parameters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

182
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-38 Relationship between traffic parameters
Table 3-56 describes the meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters.
Table 3-56 Meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters
Traffic
Parameter
Meaning
Relationship with Other

Parameters
MIMO
Describes the number of transmit and receive

antennas working in multiple input multiple
output (MIMO) mode and the gains brought on
the capacity by spatial multiplexing.
Used to set properties of the

receiver.
MCS
Bearing efficiency of the receiver.
Used to set properties of the

receiver.
Mobility
Type
Describes the moving speed of a terminal.
Used to set the receiver,

environment type, and
vector-based traffic map.
Service
Type
Describes information about the service model.
Used to set the user service

type and the traffic map that
is based on cell coverage.
Receiver
Describes the demodulation capability of the

receiver.
l Depends on the mobility,

MIMO, bit error rate
(BER), transmission
mode, and channel
information.
l Used to set the terminal
type.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

183
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Traffic
Parameter
Meaning
Relationship with Other

Parameters
Terminal
Type
Describes information about the terminal, such

as the maximum transmit power.
l Depends on the
information about the
receiver.
l Used to set the UE type.
UE Type
Describes information about the UE type

(common UE or VIP UE).
l Depends on the terminal

type and the service type.
l Used to set the
environment type and
vector-based traffic map.
Environme
nt Type
Describes the information about the

environment.
l Depends on the mobility

type and the UE type.
l Used to set the
environment-based traffic
map.
Capacity Simulation Algorithm

This section describes the capacity simulation algorithm. The U-Net uses the Monte Carlo
algorithm for the capacity simulation of the LTE-FDD system. That is, the U-Net obtains the
information about the network through a series of snapshots.
Overall Process of Capacity Simulation

The Monte Carlo algorithm is applicable to static simulation. By using the Monte Carlo
algorithm, you can obtain statistics and evaluation results of a network through a great number
of random and instant samples. By processing the statistics obtained through multiple snapshots,
you can learn about the overall performance of the network. Figure 3-39 shows the overall
process of capacity simulation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

184
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-39 Overall process of capacity simulation
Table 3-57 describes the overall process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-39.
Table 3-57 Description of the overall process of capacity simulation
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Initializing cell
information
Initialize cell information, which involves determining the

cell calculation area, calculating the RS RE power, assigning
RB data power, calculating noises, and determining
activated cells.
Determining
whether the
number of
current
snapshots is not
greater than the
total number of
snapshots
If the number of current snapshots is greater, the simulation

result can truly reflect the network performance but the
simulation takes a longer time.
Collecting the
statistics of a
snapshot
A snapshot refers to a snapshot captured for a network. You

can collect the statistics of a snapshot by referring to Process
of the Simulation Within a Snapshot and save the
statistical result for the final simulation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
When the number of current snapshots is not greater than the

total number of snapshots, the system starts to calculate the
current snapshots. Otherwise, the system collects the
statistics of the final simulation result.

185
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Number of
current
snapshots++
After the calculation within a snapshot is complete,

calculation of the next snapshot starts.
Processing
simulation
results
After the simulation of all the snapshots is complete, the UNet starts to process the simulation results and generates a
statistical report.
Process of the Simulation Within a Snapshot

To work efficiently, the U-Net cannot dynamically simulate the instantaneous change of the
radio network for a long time. Therefore, it can only statically simulate the network through a
series of snapshots. The network information at different time is different but relevant. The UNet adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network information
according to transmission time interval (TTI) within a snapshot. The unit of the TTI is
millisecond. When a snapshot is complete, the U-Net calculates the average value of all the TTI
instantaneous information within the snapshot and uses the average value as the statistical result
of the snapshot.
Figure 3-40 shows the simulation within a snapshot.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

186
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-40 Process of the simulation within a snapshot
Table 3-58 describes the process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-40.
Table 3-58 Description of the simulation within a snapshot
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Generating UEs
UEs are generated one time for each snapshot and distribute
a certain number of UEs to the specified areas.
NOTE
The UE number and areas are determined by the traffic map.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Querying path
loss
Query the existing path loss matrix based on the UE

geographical location and obtain the path loss values
between the UE and each cell.
Calculating
relevant
counters
The U-Net determines the primary serving cell based on the

highest DL RSRP of each UE. The U-Net also initializes the
SINR and noise information about the PDSCH and PUSCH.

187
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Determining
whether the
number of
current TTIs is
not greater than
the total number
of TTIs
A larger number of TTIs indicates a more stable network and

more accurate simulation result. The simulation, however,
may take a longer time.
Collecting the
statistics of a
TTI
You can calculate the instantaneous statistical results of a

TTI by referring to Process of the Simulation Within a
TTI and save the statistical result for the final processing of
the snapshot.
Number of
current TTIs++
After the calculation within a TTI is complete, calculation

of the next TTI starts.
Processing
statistical results
within a
snapshot
After the calculation of all the TTIs is complete, the U-Net

starts to calculate the average value of all the TTIs within the
snapshot.
If the number of TTIs exceeds the threshold, no operation

will be performed for the exceeded TTIs.
When the number of current TTIs is not greater than the total
number of TTIs, the U-Net starts the calculation of the
current TTIs. Otherwise, the system collects the statistics of
the final snapshot result.
Process of the Simulation Within a TTI

You can collect the statistics of the instantaneous simulation result of each TTI by using the
resource allocation algorithm. The U-Net performs admission control, scheduling, interference
coordination, and power control for UEs within each TTI.
Figure 3-41 shows the simulation within a TTI.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

188
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-41 Process of the simulation within a TTI (LTE-FDD)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

189
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-42 Process of the simulation within a TTI (LTE-TDD)
Table 3-59 describes the process of the simulation within a TTI.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

190
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-59 Description of the simulation within a TTI

Operation
Description
Admission load
control on the
uplink and
downlink
On an actual network, UEs may initiate service requests at any time.

When resources are insufficient and the service satisfaction rate is low,
UEs cannot connect to the network. When resources are sufficient and
the service satisfaction rate is high, UEs can connect to the network
after the resources are successfully allocated.
In admission control, the system determines whether a UE enters the
scheduling queue or suspending queue based on the RB resource usage
of the system, the packet loss rate of voice services, and the service
satisfaction rate.
Uplink and
downlink
scheduling
In scheduling, the U-Net allocates time and frequencies resources for

each UE based on the SINR of the UE channel, requirement on the
service rate, and terminal power.
Uplink and
downlink inter-cell
interference
coordination
(ICIC).
The LTE system uses the 1 x 3 x 1 frequency reuse mode. All the cells
can use all the bandwidths supported by the system. Therefore, intercell interference is unavoidable, especially for UEs at the border of a
cell.
Power control on
the uplink and
downlink
l In power control on the uplink, the transmit power of UEs is adjusted

to control the network interference at a certain level, ensuring the
throughput of UEs at the border of a cell.
In ICIC, the edge band of a cell is separated from that of the adjacent
cell by means of frequency domain coordination. This reduces
interference between adjacent cells and improves performance of UEs
at the border of a cell.
l Downlink power control is to adjust the transmit power the eNodeB

sends frequency resources to the UEs.
Uplink and
downlink
measurement
The U-Net obtains the predicted channel status value based on the
scheduling, ICIC, and power control results. Then, the U-Net calculates
the SINR and uses it as the input value for the next TTI.
Processing of
statistical results
within a TTI
The U-Net starts to process the statistical result of the current TTIs only
when the number of current TTIs exceeds the threshold on the number
of TTIs.
NOTE
When the network is started, it is not stable. At this time, the instantaneous result
obtained by the U-Net cannot be used to evaluate the network performance. The
period from the time when the network is started to the time when the network
works stably is called the warm-up period of the network, which can be
automatically identified by the simulation function. To obtain accurate and stable
statistical data, collect statistics after the warm-up period ends.
Threshold on the number of TTIs = Warm-up period/Duration of the TTI =
Warm-up period.
Capacity Simulation Feature Description

If each antenna under a transceiver has a unique RRU ID, the cell for the transceiver is a single
frequency network (SFN) cell.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

191
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The SFN is supported only when the antenna configuration is 2T2R or 4T4R.
NOTE
In LTE-TDD mode, the MU_BF feature is not selected.
When the antenna configuration is 2T2R, VMIMO is not supported.
When the antenna configuration is 4T4R, VMIMO is supported.

If the serving cell for a user is an SFN cell, the target RRUs of the paring users must be
the same. If the target RRU of any user is changed, the user exits the paring.
3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps

After setting traffic parameters, you need to create a traffic map for the capacity simulation
calculation. During the calculation of capacity simulation, the U-Net generates users based on
the traffic map, and the number of users is determined by the traffic parameters.
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Environment

You can set the traffic of each area based on the type of the geographic environment, such as an
urban area, a suburb area, or a densely populated area.
Prerequisites
l
Traffic parameters are configured.
Polygons are created.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map > Traffic Map(User).
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. See Figure
3-43.
Figure 3-43 Select Map Type
Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Environment.

Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the environment-based traffic map, such as the environment types of
each area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

192
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on
Environments.
Step 7 Click OK.
The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacity
simulation calculation.
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Vectors

You can set the traffic of special geographic conditions such as railways, highways, and densely
populated areas.
Prerequisites
l
Vector objects are created.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Vector.
Step 5 Click Create Map. The Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the vector-based traffic map, such as the number of subscribers for
each service, traffic characteristics, and weight of each clutter.
For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on
Vectors.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Creating a Traffic Map Based on Cell Coverage

You can set the service usage and traffic volume or throughput of each cell based on the actual
coverage of the cells. Before creating a traffic map, you must obtain the coverage prediction
results of each cell.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

193
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
The calculation of the Best Server counter is complete.
Context
CAUTION
Users that are generated on the basis of the cell coverage are distributed in the areas specified
by the calculated Best Server of each cell. Therefore, before creating a traffic map based on the
cell coverage, create the prediction group and complete the calculation of the Best Server
counter.
Procedure
Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage.
Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box is
displayed.
Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the cell coverage-based traffic map. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell Coverage.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
Creating a Traffic Map Based on User Location

You can set the traffic based on user location.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

194
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Step 4 Select Create The Map Based on User Location.
Step 5 Click Create Map to open the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box.
Step 6 Set the traffic map parameters based on user location. For parameter description, see Parameters
for Creating Traffic Maps Based on User Locations.
Step 7 Click OK.
After the setting is complete, the traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.
----End
3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group

This section describes how to create a traffic simulation group. The U-Net calculates capacity
simulation based on traffic simulation groups. Therefore, ensure that simulation groups are
created and related parameters for the simulation calculation are set before performing the
capacity simulation.
Prerequisites
l
A calculation area has been created.
Traffic parameters have been set.
A traffic map has been configured.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.
Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Group Properties dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Set properties for the simulation group. For details, see Parameters for Creating Traffic
Simulation Groups.
Step 5 Determine whether to calculate the capacity simulation immediately.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

195
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to... Then...

Calculate the
1. Select Calculate Now on the General tab page.
capacity
2. Click OK.
simulation
immediately
after the
simulation
group is created
Calculate the
Click OK.
capacity
After the simulation group is created, right-click it and choose Calculate
simulation
manually after from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-44.
the simulation
group is created
Figure 3-44 Calculate
NOTE
l The simulation group is automatically locked after the calculation is complete, as shown in Figure
3-45.
l If you right-click the simulation group and choose Stop from the shortcut menu during the calculation,
the simulation group will not be automatically locked.
l The simulation group is automatically unlocked after its properties are modified.
l You can right-click a certain simulation group and choose Group Locked from the shortcut menu to
manually lock the simulation group. In this case, you need to manually unlock the simulation group
before performing capacity simulation again.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

196
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-45 Group Locked
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the simulation group is created, you can set display properties of this group.
1.
In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
2.
3.
Set the display color for each traffic status and determine whether to display the traffic
status in the legend window.
3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result

You can view the calculation result of capacity simulation in the map window or view the
statistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.
Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of an Entire Network

You can view the capacity simulation results of each radio access system of the entire network
after completing the capacity simulation calculation.
Prerequisites
The capacity simulation calculation is complete.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. The Group Results dialog box is displayed,
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

197
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-46 Group Results
Step 4 View the capacity simulation statistics results for each radio access system in the displayed
dialog box. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation
Results of the Entire Network.
----End
Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network

This section describes how to view the capacity simulation result of an entire network, including
the statistics in the entire network, sites, cells, and hot spots.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result
of the entire network is displayed.. See Figure 3-47.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

198
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-47 Group Result
Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view statistics on the service requirements and the actual services in
the entire network.
For details, see Parameters on the Statistics Tab Page.
NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation
result of the specified hot spot.
l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before
viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.
Step 5 On the Sites(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in the entire network.
For details, see Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page.
Step 6 On the Cells(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in the entire network.
For details, see Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page.
Step 7 Click Close.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites
(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively to filter the statistical results.
199
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
To export the simulation statistics on the sites and cells to a .txt, .xls, or .csv file, choose
Action > Export on the Sites(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively.
To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab
page. Then, you can perform the coverage prediction based on the capacity simulation
result.
For detailed operations, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity
Simulation Results.
Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single Snapshot

You can view the capacity simulation result in a single snapshot, including the statistics on the
snapshot and corresponding sites, cells, users, and hot spots.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a snapshot.
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result of a
single snapshot is displayed.
Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view the statistics on the service requirements and actual services in
a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Statistics tab page.
NOTE
l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulation
result of the specified hot spot.
l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again before
viewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.
Step 5 On the Sites tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Sites tab page.
Step 6 On the Cells tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Cells tab page.
Step 7 On the Mobiles tab page, view the simulation statistics on subscribers in a single snapshot.
For details, see Parameters on the Mobiles tab page.
NOTE
l You can also double-click a user icon on the map window to open the User Properties dialog box and view
the simulation statistics of a single subscriber. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User.
l Red indicates subscribers who are not satisfied with the network (offline, not connected, or no uplink
coverage). Green indicates subscribers who are satisfied with the network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

200
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 8 Click Close.

----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites, Cells, and
Mobiles tab pages to filter the statistical results.
To export the simulation statistics on the sites, cells, or subscribers to a .txt, .xls, or .csv
file, choose Action > Export on the Sites, Cells, and Mobiles tab pages.
To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells tab page. Then,
you can perform the prediction based on the capacity simulation result.
For details, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation
Results.
Querying Capacity Simulation Statistical Results on a Map

After the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can query the capacity simulation
results in different legend colors on the map.
Prerequisites
l
U-Net classifies simulation users by user status, user type, and mobility type.
U-Net can display different types of simulation users in different shapes and colors on map.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Set legends and display properties of capacity simulation.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Symbol dialog box is
displayed.
4.
Select the dimension for classifying the simulation users from the Field Type drop-down
list box, as shown in Figure 3-48.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

201
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-48 Simulation Symbol
5.
Set the legend information for different types of simulation users, such as the shape and
color.
l Table 3-60 classifies the simulation users by user status.
Table 3-60 Simulation users in different states
State
Description
Satisfied
Users that are satisfied with the network quality, that is, users
that are not in any of the following states: ULNoCover,
DLNoCover, NoAccess, and Offline.
ULNoCover
Indicates the user that is not covered in the uplink direction.
DLNoCover
Indicates the user that is not covered in the downlink direction.
NoAccess
Indicates the user that is not accessed.
OffLine
Offline users.
l Table 3-61 classifies the simulation users by service type.

Table 3-61 Simulation users of different service types
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Service
Description
LTEVideo
Conferencing
Indicates the users corresponding to the video conferencing

service.

202
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Service
Description
LTEVoIP
Indicates the users corresponding to the VoIP service.
LTEWeb Browsing
Indicates the users corresponding to the Web browsing

service.
LTEFTP
Indicates the users corresponding to the FTP service.
l Classify simulation users based on user attributes.

l Classify simulation users based on user mobility rates.
l Classify simulation users based on terminal types.
NOTE
When simulation users are classified based on user attributes, mobility rates, service types, or terminal
types, you can customize service types.
6.
Select Add to Legend.

If the option is selected, the legend information is displayed in the Legend window.
7.
Click OK.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the checkbox before Simulations > A simulation group > Network
System > A snapshot > User type.
The map window displays the distribution of users in different states according to the preset
legend shapes and colors in a map.
NOTE
When you move the cursor pointer to a point representing a simulation user, a pop-up message is displayed,
where you can query the detailed information about the simulation user.

Choose Window > Legend. The Legend window is displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can select an area by drawing a polygon and print the capacity simulation result of this area.
Querying Coverage Prediction Results in a PDF or CDF Chart

After the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can query the CDF or PDF charts of
simulation counters by each simulation group. By checking the charts, you can know and analyze
the capacity simulation results.
Prerequisites
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

203
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 3 Choose Graphics Result from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a counter in the Item area and a display mode in the Figure
Style area.
The CDF or PDF chart corresponding to the selected counter is displayed in the right pane.
NOTE
You can query the PDF or CDF chart of the following 21 counters: IoT(UL), IoT(DL), Load(UL), Load(DL),
Cell MAC Throughput(UL), Cell MAC Throughput(DL), Application Throughput(UL), Application
Throughput(DL), RS SINR(DL), Geometry, User MAC Throughput(UL), User MAC Throughput(DL), User
Application Throughput(UL), User Application Throughput(DL), User Service Time(UL), User Service Time
(DL), User Actual Power, Cell Actual Power, PUSCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, and Throughput.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
To save a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Save Image
As from the shortcut menu.
To print a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Print from
the shortcut menu.
To copy a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Copy from
the shortcut menu.
To export the statistical results of a PDF or CDF chart as a .txt file, click Export Data.
Analyzing Capacity Simulation Results by Using the Point Analysis Function

The point analysis function is mainly used to analyze the signal status at a point. After selecting
a terminal or service, you can learn about the signal quality, signal strength, and uplink or
downlink status of a certain point based on the capacity simulation results.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Click
Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.
Step 3 Click a point on the map.
the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

cursor.
204
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, check the list of cells that can receive signals, strength of
received signals, and uplink or downlink status of the selected position based on the capacity
simulation results.
l In Simulation Group, select a capacity simulation group to simulate the uplink load and
downlink power of the network.
l In Terminal, select a terminal type.
l In Service, select a service type.
l In Mobility, select a mobility type.
The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending order
from top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reference Signal Reception tab page. The cell that has
the highest signal strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.
The uplink and downlink status of the selected point is displayed on the right of the tab page.
l The
icon indicates that the current channel meets the demodulation requirements.
l The
icon indicates that the current channel does not meet the demodulation requirements.
Double-click the two icons, you can query the detailed link information. For detailed description
of parameters, see Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail Window.
----End
Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation Results

If capacity simulation is not conducted, the U-Net performs prediction based on the preset
parameters of the cells. If capacity simulation is conducted, you can apply the capacity simulation
results to NEs and the U-Net performs prediction based on the capacity simulation results In this
case, the prediction considers the actual transmit power, load, and interference of the NEs.
Therefore, the prediction results are more accurate.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result
of the entire network is displayed.
Step 4 To apply the simulation results to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab page.
Step 5 Perform the prediction by referring to LTE-FDD Prediction.
----End
3.9.5 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches

After the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can export the capacity simulation
results of the entire network, a snapshot, or all simulation groups.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

205
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
Export capacity simulation results of all simulation groups

1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.
3.
Choose Export Result from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the Path area of the displayed dialog box, click Browse, and select a path.
5.
Select Simulation in Select Export Content to export the capacity simulation results.
6.
Select the export objects in Simulation.
7.
Click Export.
Export capacity simulation results of the entire network

1.
2.
3.
Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu.
4.
Select Cells(Average) tab page.
5.
Click Action.
6.
Select Export.
7.
After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.
Export capacity simulation results of a snapshot

1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a
snapshot.
3.
4.
Select Cells tab page.
5.
Click Action.
6.
Select Export.
7.
After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.
----End
3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for LTE-FDD capacity simulation by using
the U-Net.
Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Environments

This section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on environments or
modifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating traffic
maps in the New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Traffic Map Name
Indicates the name of a traffic map created

according to the environment.

206
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Polygon regions
Indicates all created polygons.
Add
Adds a selected polygon to the environment

list.
Polygon regions in the list
Indicates an added polygon.
Environments in the list
Indicates the environment type

corresponding a polygon.
Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Vectors

This section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on vectors or modifying
the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating traffic maps in
the Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a traffic map created based on

vectors.
Table 3-63 Parameters on the Vector tab page

Parameter
Description
Add
Adds a vector object.

You can click Add and select a vector object
to be added in the displayed Select Vector
dialog box.
Delete
Deletes a vector object.
Name
Name of an added vector object.
Density
User density on a vector object.
Table 3-64 Parameters on the Traffic tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
User Profile
User type.
Mobility
Mobility type.

207
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Density
User density.
NOTE
The value of this parameter determines the user
density on the Vector tab page.
ID
Number of a clutter type.
Clutter Class
Name of a clutter type.
Weight
Weight of a clutter type.

This parameter is displayed when clutter
layer data is provided.
% Indoor
Percentage of indoor users for a clutter type.

Number of indoor users for a clutter type =
Percentage of indoor users x Total number of
users for the clutter type.
Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell Coverage

This section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on cell coverage or
modifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating traffic
maps in the New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box.
Table 3-65 Parameters on the General tab page and Transceiver tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Name
Indicates the name of a traffic map created

according to cell coverage.
Prediction Group
Selects a prediction group.
Generate user number based on Poisson
Indicates whether to generate a user map

based on Poisson distribution.
Users Per Service
Sets the number of users corresponding to

each service type for each cell.
Tx_ID
Indicates the name of a cell.
LTEFTP(UL)
Indicates the number of uplink users

corresponding to the FTP service.
LTEFTP(DL)
Indicates the number of downlink users

corresponding to the FTP service.
LTEVideo Conferencing(UL)

corresponding to the video conferencing
service.

208
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
LTEVideo Conferencing(DL)

corresponding to the video conferencing
service.
LTEVoIP(UL)

corresponding to the VoIP service.
LTEVoIP(DL)

corresponding to the VoIP service.
LTEWeb Browsing(UL)

corresponding to the Web browsing service.
LTEWeb Browsing(DL)

corresponding to the Web browsing service.
Table 3-66 Parameters on the Traffic tab page

Parameter
Description
Terminals area-Terminal
Terminals area-%
Indicates the percentage of users

corresponding to each terminal type.
Number of users corresponding to a terminal
type = Percentage of the users corresponding
to the terminal type x Total number of users
Mobility area-Mobility
Mobility area-%
Indicates the percentage of users

corresponding to each mobility type.
Number of users corresponding to a mobility
type = Percentage of the users corresponding
to the mobility type x Total number of users
Clutters area-ID
Indicates the number of a clutter class.
Clutters area-Clutter Class
Indicates the name of a clutter class.
Clutters area-% Indoor
Indicates the percentage of indoor users

corresponding to a clutter class.
Number of indoor users corresponding to a
clutter class = Percentage of indoor users x
Total number of users corresponding to the
clutter class
Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on User Locations

This section describes the parameters for creating a traffic map based on user locations or
modifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating a
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

209
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
traffic map in the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box or modifying
parameters for an existing traffic map based on user locations.
Parameter
Description
Genera
l tab
page
User Location Traffic Map

Name
Indicates the name of a traffic map based on user

locations.
User
Locati
on tab
page
Use as X and Y
Indicates that the geodetic coordinates are used.
Use as Longitude and Latitude
Indicates that the longitudinal and latitudinal

coordinates are used.
Import
You can import files if user data files are

available.
To import a user data file successfully, ensure that
the column headings of the user data file match
the fields such as UserID and coordinates on the
U-Net.
UserID
Indicates the ID of a user.
Indicates the X coordinate.
Indicates the Y coordinate.
Longitude
Indicates the longitude.
Latitude
Indicates the latitude.
Priority
Indicates a priority.
The value is an integer. The larger the value, the
higher the priority.
Service

l The service type must be defined in the traffic
parameters.
l For details about service types in an LTE-FDD
network, see 3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service
Types.
l For details about service types in an LTE-TDD
network, see 4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service
Types.
Terminal

l The terminal type must be defined in the traffic
parameters.
l For details about terminal types in an LTEFDD network, see 3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD
Terminal Types.
l For details about terminal types in an LTETDD network, see 4.6.4 Setting the LTETDD Terminal Type.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

210
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Mobility

l The mobility type must be defined in the traffic
parameters.
l For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility
Types.
LinkType
Indicates the uplink or downlink type.
IsIndoor
Indicate whether the user is indoor user.

The value can be True or False.
Parameters for Creating Traffic Simulation Groups

This section describes the parameters for creating a traffic simulation group. You can refer to
this section when creating a traffic simulation group in the Simulation Group Properties dialog
box or in the corresponding attribute dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a traffic simulation group.
Site Corr
Shadow fading factor on the base station side.
UL FSS Environment
Gain table used for modifying the UL

frequency selection gain.
Number of Simulations
Number of simulations.
A larger number of simulations indicates a
more precise simulation result, but a longer
time is required for calculation.
Calculate Now
Whether to perform simulation calculation

immediately.
Table 3-68 Parameters on the Source Traffic tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Select Traffic Maps to be Used
Traffic map.
Select Polygon
Calculation area.

211
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-69 Parameters on the Advance tab page

Parameter
Description
Number of TTI
Number of transmission time intervals

(TTIs).
The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic
simulation to obtain instantaneous network
information by TTI. A larger number of TTIs
indicates a more precise simulation result, but
a longer time is required for calculation.
UL IoT Convergence Threshold
Uplink IoT convergence threshold used for

checking whether a network is converged.
DL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%)
Downlink throughput convergence threshold

used for checking whether a network is
converged.
UL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%)
Uplink throughput convergence threshold

used for checking whether a network is
converged.
DL Load Convergence Threshold(%)
Downlink load convergence threshold used

for checking whether a network is converged.
UL Load Convergence Threshold(%)
Uplink load convergence threshold used for

checking whether a network is converged.
Edge User Ratio (%)
Ratio of cell edge users used for calculating

the number of cell edge users.
Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of the Entire Network

This section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of the entire
network.
Parameters on the LTE Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
NetVersion
Indicates the network technology.
FailedSingleModeUserCount
Indicates the number of single-mode users

who fail to access the network.
SuccessSingleModeUserCount
Indicates the number of single-mode users

who successfully access the network.
SingleModeUserCount
Indicates the number of single-mode users.
SuccessMultiModeUserCount
Indicates the number of multi-mode users

who successfully access the network.

212
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Load(UL)
Indicates the uplink load.
Load(DL)
Indicates the downlink load.
Throughput(UL)(Kbps)
Indicates the uplink throughput of the entire

network.
Throughput(DL)(Kbps)
Indicates the downlink throughput of the

entire network.
Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network

This section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of the entire
network.
Parameters on the Statistics Tab Page
CAUTION
l The Request pane lists the total number of users attempted to access and the relevant
throughput, and the number of users attempted to access for each service and the relevant
throughput.
l The Result pane lists the total number of actually accessed users and the actual throughput,
and the number of actually accessed users for each service and the relevant throughput.
l If the throughput is less than 1 MB, the unit is kbit/s. If the throughput is greater than or equal
to 1 MB, the unit is Mbit/s.
Parameter
Description
Requ
est
area
Number of transmission
time intervals (TTIs).
Number of TTI
The U-Net adopts the

semi-dynamic simulation
to obtain instantaneous
network information by
TTI. A larger number of
TTIs indicates a more
precise simulation result,
but a longer time is
required for calculation.
Total Users Trying to
Connect
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Average Users

Indicates the average total

number of users
attempting to gain access
to the network.
213
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/
LTEWeb Browsing/
LTEVideo Conferencing
NOTE
The system collects the
number of users attempted
to access and relevant
throughput for services
such as LTEFTP,
LTEVOiP, and LTEWeb
Browsing. This section
generally describes theses
parameters because they
are the same for all services.
Standard Deviation
Indicates the standard

deviation.
Average Throughput
Demand(DL)

required downlink
throughput on the entire
network.
Average Throughput
Demand(UL)

required uplink
throughput on the entire
network.
Users
Indicates the number of

users attempting to gain
access to each service.
Uplink

uplink users attempting to
gain access to each
service.
Downlink

downlink users
attempting to gain access
to each service.
Max Throughput Demand Indicates the maximum

(UL)
uplink throughput of each
service required for users
on the entire network.
Min Throughput Demand
(UL)
Indicates the minimum

Average Throughput
Demand(UL)

Max Throughput Demand Indicates the maximum

(DL)
downlink throughput of
each service required for
users on the entire
network.
(DL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


users on the entire
network.
214
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Resul
ts area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Total Connected Users
Average Throughput
Demand(DL)

users on the entire
network.
Average Users
Indicates the average total

number and percentage of
users that actually gain
access to the entire
network.
Actual MAC Throughput

(UL)

average throughput at the
MAC layer for uplink
users on the entire
network.

Standard Deviation(UL)

deviation of the actual
users on the entire
network.
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)

application layer for
uplink users on the entire
network.
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(UL)

uplink users on the entire
network.

(DL)

MAC layer for downlink
users on the entire
network.

Standard Deviation(DL)

users on the entire
network.

215
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Actual Application
Throughput(DL)

downlink users on the
entire network.
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(DL)

downlink users on the
entire network.
Breakdown per service:

LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/
LTEWeb Browsing//
LTEVideo Conferencing
Service User
Indicates the number and

percentage of users that
successfully gain access to
each service.
NOTE
The system collects the
number of accessed users
and relevant throughput for
services such as LTEFTP,
LTEVOiP, and LTEWeb
Browsing. This section
generally describes theses
parameters because they
are the same for all services.
Downlink

downlink users that gain
Downlink Standard
Deviation

deviation of the downlink
users that gain access to
each service.
Uplink

uplink users that gain
Uplink Standard
Deviation

deviation of the uplink
users that gain access to
each service.
Offline User

percentage of offline users
corresponding to each
service.
Failed User

percentage of failed users
corresponding to each
service.

(UL)

throughput at the MAC
layer for uplink users of
each service on the entire
network.

216
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Standard Deviation(UL)

layer for uplink users of
each service on the entire
network.
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)

throughput at the
uplink users of each
service on the entire
network.
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(UL)

throughput at the
uplink users of each
network.

(DL)

layer for downlink users
of each service on the
entire network.

Standard Deviation(DL)

layer for downlink users
of each service on the
entire network.
Actual Application
Throughput(DL)

throughput at the
downlink users of each
network.
Actual Application
Throughput Standard
Deviation(DL)

throughput at the
downlink users of each
network.

217
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(UL)
For the entire network,

this parameter is the
statistical throughput at
the MAC layer for uplink
edge users. The value of
this parameter for the
entire network is the
average statistical
layer for uplink edge users
in multiple snapshots.
Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(DL)
For the entire network,

this parameter is the
statistical throughput at
the MAC layer for
downlink edge users. The
value of this parameter for
the entire network is the
average statistical
layer for downlink edge
users in multiple
snapshots.
Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Site
Indicates a site name.
Total MAC Throughput

(UL)(kbps)
Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of

a site.
Total Application
Throughput(UL)(kbps)
Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on the

uplink of a site.
Total MAC Throughput

(DL)(kbps)
Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink

of a site.
Total Application
Throughput(DL)(kbps)
Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on the

downlink of a site.
LTEFTP(UL MAC)
(kbps)
Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of the

FTP service at a site.
LTEFTP(UL
Application)(kbps)
Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink of

the FTP service at a site.
LTEFTP(DL MAC)
(kbps)
Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of the

FTP service at a site.

218
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
LTEFTP(DL
Application)(kbps)
Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlink

of the FTP service at a site.
LTEVoIP(UL MAC)
(kbps)

VoIP service at a site.
LTEVoIP(UL
Application)(kbps)

the VoIP service at a site.
LTEVoIP(DL MAC)
(kbps)

VoIP service at a site.
LTEVoIP(DL
Application)(kbps)

of the VoIP service at a site.
LTEWebBrowsing(UL
MAC)(kbps)

Web Browsing service at a site.
LTEWebBrowsing(UL
Application)(kbps)

the Web Browsing service at a site.
LTEWebBrowsing(DL
MAC)(kbps)

Web Browsing service at a site.
LTEWebBrowsing(DL
Application)(kbps)

of the Web Browsing service at a site.
LTEVideoConferencing
(UL MAC)(kbps)

Video Conferencing service at a site.
(UL Application)(kbps)

the Video Conferencing service at a site.
(DL MAC)(kbps)

Video Conferencing service at a site.
(DL Application)(kbps)

of the Video Conferencing service at a site.
Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Site
Indicates a site name.
Transceiver
Indicates a transceiver name.
Cell
Indicates a cell name.
Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the TX power for a cell. The unit is dBm.
IoT(UL)(dB)
Indicates the ratio of the sum of interference noise to the noise on

the uplink of a cell. The unit is dB.

219
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Load(UL)
Indicates the cell uplink load.

Uplink load = Overhead of traffic channels/(System bandwidth Overhead of the control channel)
Average Used RB(UL)
Indicates the number of uplink RBs in use for a cell.

Number of RBs used in the uplink direction = Overhead of traffic
channels + Overhead of the control channel
Load(DL)
Indicates the cell downlink load.

Downlink load = Overhead of traffic channels/System bandwidth
Average Used RB(DL)
Indicates the number of downlink RBs in use for a cell.

Number of downlink RBs in use = Total number of RBs within
the bandwidth x Downlink load
MAC Throughput(UL)
(kbps)
Indicates the uplink average throughput at the MAC layer for a

cell.
Application Throughput
(UL)(kbps)
Indicates the uplink average throughput at the application layer

for a cell.
MAC Throughput(DL)
(kbps)
Indicates the downlink average throughput at the MAC layer for

a cell.
Application Throughput
(DL)(kbps)
Indicates the downlink average throughput at the application

layer for a cell.
Service User
Indicates the number of users that can gain access to cell services.
Offline User
Indicates the number of users involved in call drops in a cell.
Parameters for Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single Snapshot

This section describes the parameters for viewing the capacity simulation result in a single
snapshot. You can refer to this section when viewing the capacity simulation result in the XXX
Parameters on the Statistics tab page

Parameter
Reque
st area
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Total Users Trying

to Connect
Users
Total number of subscribers

attempting to gain access in a
single snapshot.
Downlink
Number of downlink subscribers

attempting to gain access to
services in a single snapshot.

220
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Breakdown per
service
LTEFTP/
LTEVoIP/
LTEWeb
Browsing/
LTEVideo
Conferencing
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Uplink
Number of uplink subscribers

attempting to gain access to
services in a single snapshot.
Max Throughput
Demand(DL)
Maximum throughput required

by downlink subscribers in a
single snapshot.

(DL)
Minimum throughput required

by downlink subscribers in a
single snapshot.
Average Throughput
Demand(DL)
Average throughput required by

downlink subscribers in a single
snapshot.
Max Throughput
Demand(UL)
Maximum throughput required

by uplink subscribers in a single
snapshot.

(UL)
Minimum throughput required

by uplink subscribers in a single
snapshot.
Average Throughput
Demand(UL)
Average throughput required by

uplink subscribers in a single
snapshot.
Users
Number of subscribers
attempting to gain access to each
service in a single snapshot.
Downlink

Uplink

Max Throughput
Demand(DL)
Maximum throughput of each

service required by downlink
subscribers in a single snapshot.

(DL)
Minimum throughput of each

Average Throughput
Demand(DL)
Average throughput of each


221
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
NOTE
The system collects
the number of
subscribers
attempting to gain
access and relevant
throughput for
services such as
LTEFTP,
LTEVoIP,
LTEWeb
Browsing, and
LTEVideo
Conferencing
respectively. This
section generally
describes theses
parameters because
they are the same
for all services.
Result
area
Max Throughput
Demand(UL)
Maximum throughput of each

service required by uplink

(UL)
Minimum throughput of each

Average Throughput
Demand(UL)
Average throughput of each

Number of TTI
Number of TTIs when the

calculation within a snapshot is
complete.
The U-Net adopts the semidynamic simulation to obtain
instantaneous network
information by TTI. A larger
number of TTIs indicates a more
precise simulation result, but a
longer time is required for
calculation.
Stat Start Time
TTI at which statistics starts.
IsConvergence
Whether a snapshot is
converged.
Total Connected
Users
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Users
Average total number and

percentage of subscribers that
actually gain access to services in
a single snapshot.

(DL)
Actual average throughput on the

Actual Application
Throughput(DL)

application layer for downlink

(UL)


222
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)

application layer for uplink
Breakdown per
service:
LTEFTP/
LTEVoIP/
LTEWeb
Browsing/
LTEVideo
Conferencing
Users
Number and percentage of

subscribers that successfully
gain access to each service in a
single snapshot.
Downlink

that gain access to each service in
a single snapshot.
NOTE
The system collects
the number of
accessed
subscribers and
relevant throughput
for services such as
LTEFTP,
LTEVoIP,
LTEWeb
Browsing, and
LTEVideo
Conferencing
respectively. This
section generally
describes theses
parameters because
they are the same
for all services.
Uplink

that gain access to each service in
a single snapshot.

(DL)
Actual throughput of each

service on the MAC layer for
snapshot.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation of each

snapshot.
Actual Application
Throughput(DL)

service on the application layer
for downlink subscribers in a
single snapshot.
Standard Deviation

for downlink subscribers in a
single snapshot.

(UL)

snapshot.
Standard Deviation

snapshot.
Actual Application
Throughput(UL)

for uplink subscribers in a single
snapshot.

223
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Breakdown per
unsuccessful
reason
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Standard Deviation

for uplink subscribers in a single
snapshot.
DLNoCover User
Number of subscribers that are

not covered in the downlink
direction.
ULNoCover User
Number of subscribers that are

not covered in the uplink
direction.
NoAccess User
Number of subscribers that fail to

gain access to services.
Offline User
Number of subscribers involved

in call drops.
Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(UL)
Statistical throughput on the

MAC layer for uplink cell edge
subscribers. The value of this
parameter for a single snapshot is
the first top 5% throughput
among all throughput ranked in
ascending order on the MAC
layer for all uplink subscribers in
the snapshot.
Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(DL)
Statistical throughput on the

MAC layer for downlink cell
edge subscribers. The value of
this parameter for a single
snapshot is the first top 5%
throughput among all throughput
ranked in ascending order on the
MAC layer for all downlink
subscribers in the snapshot.
User Throughput Distribution
Distribution of user throughput

in a single snapshot.
User DL RS SINR Distribution
Distribution of downlink RS
SINR.
User PDSCH SINR Distribution
Distribution of downlink
PDSCH SINR.

224
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters on the Sites tab page

The parameters on this tab page for a single snapshot are similar to those on the same tab page
for the whole network. Therefore, you can see the parameter description for the whole
network.. For details, see Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page.
Parameters on the Cells tab page

The parameters on this tab page for a single snapshot are similar to those on the same tab page
for the whole network. Therefore, you can see the parameter description for the whole
network.. For details, see Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page.
Parameters on the Mobiles tab page

Parameter
Description
ID
ID of a user.
The x-coordinate of a user on the map.
The y-coordinate of a user on the map.
Group Name
Name of a simulation group.
SnapShot Name
Name of a snapshot.
User Profile
User type.
Service
Service type.
Terminal
Terminal type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Connection State
Connection status.
There are five user states: Satisfied,
ULNoCover, DLNoCover, NoAccess, and
OffLine.
Best Server
The best serving cell.

After load control is performed, the value of
BestServer changes.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Link Type
Link type (uplink and downlink).
Indoor
Whether the terminal is used indoors.
Link Loss(UL)(dB)
Uplink link loss.
Link Loss(DL)(dB)
Downlink link loss.
RSRP(UL)(dBm)
Uplink reference signal received power.
RSRP(DL)(dBm)
Downlink reference signal received power.

225
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
IoT(DL)(dB)
Downlink interference over thermal. The unit

is dB.
Simulate the last measurement value.
PDSCH MCS
Downlink modulation coding scheme

(MCS).
PUSCH MCS
Uplink MCS.
MIMO Mode
Multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO)

type.
Tx Power(dBm)
Transmit power of a terminal.

The downlink user is empty.
PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)
Throughput of the PUSCH channel on the

MAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.
PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)
Throughput of the PDSCH channel on the

PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

application layer. The unit is kbit/s.
PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

Average Used RB Number
Average number of used RBs.
RS SINR(DL)(dB)
Signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)

of the downlink reference signal. The unit is
dB.
PUSCH SINR(dB)
SINR of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.
PDSCH SINR(dB)
SINR of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.
Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single User

This section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of a single user.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Layer
Snapshot location of a user.
ID
ID of a user.
The x-coordinate of a user on the map.
The y-coordinate of a user on the map.
Link Type
Link type (uplink and downlink).

226
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indoor
Whether the terminal is used indoors.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Service
Service type.
Terminal
Terminal type.
Best Server
The best serving cell.

After load control is performed, the value of
BestServer changes.
Link Loss(UL)(dB)
Uplink link loss.
Link Loss(DL)(dB)
Downlink link loss.
RSRP(UL)(dBm)
Uplink reference signal received power.
RSRP(DL)(dBm)
Downlink reference signal received power.
IoT(DL)(dB)
Downlink interference over thermal. The unit

is dB.
PDSCH MCS
Downlink modulation coding scheme

(MCS).
PUSCH MCS
Uplink MCS.
MIMO Mode
Multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO)

type.
Tx Power(dBm)
Transmit power of a terminal.

The downlink user is empty.
PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)

PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps)

PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps)

RS SINR(DL)(dB)
Signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)

of the downlink reference signal. The unit is
dB.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
PUSCH SINR(dB)
SINR of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.
PDSCH SINR(dB)
SINR of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.

227
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters for Viewing Point Analysis Statistics

This section describes the parameters for viewing point analysis statistics. You can refer to this
section when viewing the detailed information about propagation models in the Model
Details window, detailed information about the link budget in the Link Budget window, or
analysis results of uplink and downlink signals in the Analysis Detail window.
Parameter Description of the Model Details Window

The following parameters are valid only when the propagation model is SPM.
Parameter
Description
Number Pts
Indicates the number of Bin points involved in the statistics.
Dist.
Indicates the distance from a point to the transmitter.
Alt.
Indicates the altitude of a point.
Tot.H.
Indicates the total height of a point.
Clut.
Indicates the clutter ID of a point.
Effective Tx Height
Indicates the effective antenna height of the transmitter.
Receiver Height
Indicates the receiver height of a point.
Antenna Gain
Diffraction Loss
Indicates the diffraction loss.
Effective Rx Height
Indicates the effective antenna height of the receiver.
Clutter Loss
Indicates the clutter loss.
NOTE
Some parameters in the Model Details window are not described in this table. They are calculated according to
Parameter Description of the Link Budget Window
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceiver
Receiver
Indicates the coordinates of a point.
Distance
Indicates the distance from a point to the transmitter.
Max Power
Indicates the maximum transmit power of the carrier.
Reference Signal Power
Indicates the power of a single reference signal of the carrier.

228
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Path Loss
Indicates the path loss.
Shadow Fading Margin
Indicates the margin of shadow fading.
Penetration Loss
Indicates the penetration loss.
Equipment Loss
Indicates the equipment loss on the base station side, including

the feeder loss, jumper loss, and TMA loss.
Reference Signal Level
Indicates the strength of the reference signal.
Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail Window

Parameter
Description
Down
link
Received Reference
Signal Level
Indicates the strength of the reference signal received by

the terminal.
PDSCH Total Noise(I

+N)
Indicates the sum of the interference power received by the

terminal and the noise power of the terminal.
Reference Signal C/(I

+N)
Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the reference signal.
PDSCH C/(I+N)
Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the downlink traffic

channel.
Bearer
Indicates the modulation and demodulation mode used by

the terminal.
PDSCH Peak
Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink traffic

channel.
Received PUSCH
Power
Indicates the strength of the signal received by the cell.
Transmission Power
Indicates the transmit power of the terminal.
PUSCH Total Noise(I

+N)
Indicates the sum of the interference power received by the

cell and the noise power of the cell.
PUSCH C/(I+N)
Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the uplink traffic

channel.
Bearer
Indicates the demodulation and modulation mode used by

the cell.
PUSCH Peak
Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink traffic channel.
Uplin
k
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

229
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters

You can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD network
through the U-Net.
3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning

The physical cell IDs (PCIs) of an LTE network is limited. Therefore, reuse of PCIs is
unavoidable in LTE networking. To reduce the downlink interference of intra-frequency and
co-PCI cells, you must assign a proper PCI to each cell. On the U-Net, you can enable the system
to automatically plan PCIs or you can manually plan a PCI for each cell. After the PCI planning
is complete, you can check whether the PCI planning results are proper.
Basic Knowledge of PCI Planning

In PCI planning, the U-Net assigns proper IDs to cells. This ensures that no interference is
generated between the downlink signals of intra-frequency and co-PCI cells and terminals can
properly synchronize and decode the pilot channels of normal serving cells. The PCI planning
function can be used to create and expand networks.
Principles
In LTE-FDD mode, you can search for cells according to cell groups. That is, you can determine
the ID of the corresponding cell group based on the SSCH and determine the specific cell ID
based on the PSCH.
Considering the networking capability, a large number of cell IDs is preferred. In the case of a
large number of cell IDs, sufficient and high-performance SCHs are required to support quick
and accurate query of cell IDs. Therefore, in LTE-FDD mode, each cell ID group consists of
three cell IDs. Therefore, the number of cell IDs is a multiple of 3. The number of downlink
scrambling codes is a multiple of 6. In the case of the WCDMA network, the maximum number
of cell IDs is 512. Therefore, to ensure that the number of cell IDs is a multiple of both 3 and 6,
the recommended number of cell IDs is 504.
The number of PCIs is limited. Therefore, in the actual network, PCI reuse is unavoidable. The
reuse of PCIs, however, may result in interference when the distance between the cells sharing
the same PCI is excessively small. By using the PCI planning function on the U-Net, you can
plan PCIs properly for cells, reducing the interference between intra-frequency and co-PCI cells.
Layer-0 Base Station

This section introduces the definition of layer-0 base station based on the schematic diagram in
Figure 3-49.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

230
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-49 Schematic diagram of layer-0 base station
In the circle, the line between base station A and base station B, that is, line AB, is the diameter.
Line DG and line EF run parallel with line AB. The length of either line OD or OE is one third
of the length of line AB.
The number of base stations involved in the gray area represents the number of layers between
base station A and base station B. If no base station is involved in the gray area, base station A
and base station B are called layer-0 base stations.
Mode 3 and Mode 6

l
When the PCIs of cells are divided by 6 and the remainders are the same, these cells have
the same mode 6. For example, the PCI of cell A is 16 and the PCI of cell B is 10; the
remainder of dividing 16 by 6 is 4 and the remainder of dividing 10 by 6 is also 4. Therefore,
cell A and cell B have the same mode 6.
When the PCIs of cells are divided by 3 and the remainders are the same, these cells have
the same mode 3. For example, the PCI of cell A is 8 and the PCI of cell B is 5; the remainder
of dividing 8 by 3 is 2 and the remainder of dividing 5 by 3 is also 2. Therefore, cell A and
cell B have the same mode 3.
Planning PCIs
The U-Net provides the function of planning PCIs. The planning results can be applied to the
cells.
Prerequisites
A base station is created.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: View the PCIs of existing cells.
1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

231
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.
3.
Right-click and choose Open PCI Codes from the shortcut menu. The PCI Planning
Display window is displayed. View the PCIs of existing cells.

Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.
Step 4 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-50.
Figure 3-50 Automatic Allocation
Step 5 In the LTE PCI Planning dialog box, set the planning parameters. For parameter description,
see Parameters for Planning PCIs.
Step 6 Select whether to expand the PCIs based on the existing PCIs.
If...
Then...
Expand the PCIs based on the existing

PCIs.
Click Load to import the existing PCI cluster

configuration file of the network.
Replan all the PCIs.
Perform Step 7.
Step 7 Click Run.

l During planning, you can right-click LTE PCI Planning on the Operation tab page of the
explorer window, and then choose Stop PCI Codes Planning from the shortcut menu to
stop the PCI planning.
l The planning result is displayed at the lower-part of the U-Net main interface. For parameter
description, see Parameters for Viewing PCI Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the PCI planning is complete, you can filter, verify, apply, and export the PCI planning
result. For details, see Managing the PCI Planning Result.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

232
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Managing the PCI Planning Result

This section describes how to manage PCI planning result. After the PCI planning is complete,
you can filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, and export the PCI planning result.
Prerequisites
The PCI planning is complete.
Procedure
l

If...
Then...
You want to filter PCI

planning result
1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and

choose Filter from the shortcut menu. For details, see
Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI
Planning Results.
2. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed in green on
the map, as shown in Figure 3-51.
NOTE
l You need to select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree
so that the filtered cells can be displayed in green in the map
window.
l If you click None in the Filter dialog box or close the PCI
Planning Display window, the color of filtered cells in the
map window is cleared.
You want to remove the

filter effect on the PCI
planning result
Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and

choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The PCI
Planning Display window switches back to the state when
no filter criterion was used, and the color of cells is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.
You want to Audit the PCI

planning result

choose Audit from the shortcut menu. For details, see
Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning
Results.
The audit result is saved as an .xls file.
You want to apply the PCI

planning result to each cell

choose Commit from the shortcut menu.
PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planning
result is applied.
You want to export the PCI

planning result
1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window and

choose Export Result from the shortcut menu.
2. Set parameters in the Data Export dialog box. For
details, see 10.17.5 Parameters for Importing and
Exporting Data.
3. Click Export to export the planning result.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

233
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
You want to view the PCI

values of cells in the map
window
1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.
4. In the displayed dialog box, add the PCI field to the
Selected Fields area.
5. Click OK.
The PCI values of cells will be displayed in the map
window.
PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planning
result is applied.
You want to enable the map

window to display the PCI
planning result together
with that in the planning
result table
1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.

2. Select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree.
3. In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.
4. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
5. Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties.
6. Click OK.
7. Select a source cell in the map window or click a row
heading in the planning result table.
The PCI planning result is displayed in the map
window and planning result table at the same time.
You want to manually

modify PCI configurations
In the PCI Planning Display window, manually modify

the value of Confirm Code. Then, right-click in the PCI
Planning Display window and choose Commit from the
shortcut menu.
1. Select a transceiver in the map window.
3. In the displayed dialog box, manually modify the PCI
configurations on the LTE-FDDCell tab page.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

234
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-51 Filter
----End
3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning

To ensure successful random access to an LTE-FDD network, you must plan the physical random
access channel (PRACH) of each cell on the LTE-FDD network. The planning of PRACHs
involves the planning of the Zadoff-Chu Sequence (ZC).
Basic Knowledge of PRACHs

The PRACH planning is also called the ZC sequence planning. During the planning of ZC
sequences, proper preamble sequences are assigned to cells to ensure that the high-speed cells
or cells with larger radius can be configured with high-performance preamble sequences.
Currently, the U-Net supports the PRACH planning of only co-channel cells.
Planning of ZC Sequence Indexes

The PRACH uses the ZC sequence as the root sequence. The number of preamble sequences of
each cell is 64. The preamble sequences are generated through cyclic shifts (Ncs, CyclicShifts)
of ZC sequences. Preamble sequences used by a UE are allocated by a base station or randomly
selected. To reduce the interference of preamble sequences between adjacent cells, you need to
plan ZC sequence indexes properly.
In LTE FDD mode, the number of ZC sequence indexes is 838, and 16 types of Ncs values are
available. The U-Net configures ZC sequence indexes and Ncs values for multiple cells
according to the cell properties (such as the cell radius and high speed cell) to ensure that the
generated preamble sequences of adjacent cells are different. Thus, the interference caused by
the use of the same preamble sequence between adjacent cells is reduced.
Planning PRACH
You can manually plan the PRACH parameters of one or multiple cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

235
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
A base station is created.
Procedure
Step 1 Set Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) for each cell.
The default value of Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) is 2 for each cell.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Change the value of Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor).
5.
Click OK.
Step 2 Importing the existing neighboring relationships. For details, see Importing Neighbor
Relationships.
Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose LTE PRACH Planning.
Step 5 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.
Step 6 Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Planning the PRACH.
Step 7 Click Run.
The planning results of the PRACH parameters are displayed in a pane under the U-Net main
interface. You can check the planning results. For details about the parameters, see Parameters
for Viewing PRACH Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If you need to...
Then...
Apply the PRACH planning

results
Right-click in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box

and choose Commit from the shortcut menu to apply the
PRACH planning results.
The value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index is
submitted.
The value of Min Root Sequence Index is updated after the
PRACH planning results are submitted.
Export the PRACH planning

results
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Right-click in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box

and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the
PRACH planning results.

236
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Modify the PRACH

configurations manually
In the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box, modify the

value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index in the table
manually.
The U-Net will automatically change the value of
Confirmed End Root Sequence Index.
The PRACH planning results

are displayed in the map
window.

4. In the displayed dialog box, add the Min Root Sequence
Index field to the Selected Fields area.
The cells using PRACH reuse

are displayed in the map
window.
1. In the navigation tree, select the box in front of LTE

PRACH Planning.
Modify the value of Min Root

Sequence Index.
2. Select a cell in the map window or click the head of a row

in the planning result table.
The selected cell and the cells using PRACH reuse with
the selected cell are displayed in the same color on the
map.

3. Choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.
4. Modify the value of Min Root Sequence Index.
NOTE
l If you have planned the PRACH parameters of the cell but the
planning results are not submitted, the modification of Min Root
Sequence Index will be synchronized to Existed Min Root
Sequence Index but not to Confirmed Start Root Sequence
Index.
l The value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index is
submitted when you submit the PRACH planning results.
3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning

After creating base stations, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the LTE network.
You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for
each cell one by one.
Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning

This section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighbor
relationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and that
the handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS of
the network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planning
is to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network.
Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whether
neighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

237
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency.
Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,
reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustments
to the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.
The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supports
neighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. These
features of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.
The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:
l
If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a
neighboring cell of the serving cell.
If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as a
The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.
Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional
neighbor relationship.
The U-Net provides the following neighboring cell planning algorithms:

l
Topology: algorithm based on topology
Prediction: algorithm based on coverage prediction
Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction

The U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on coverage prediction.
If the neighbor relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determined
according to the algorithm based on coverage prediction, the U-Net determines neighboring
cells using the algorithm based on topology.
Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to the
following scenarios:
l
6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network
6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration

NOTE
For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboring
cells.
Importing Neighbor Relationships

This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the function
of importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on the
network can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to the
actual situation of the network.
Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
238
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship

template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighbor
relationships.
Neighbor relationships of GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD networks are matched
by cell name.
Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.
Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network

technology.
Context
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.
Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
Relations dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.
If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the
neighbor relationships are imported.
NOTE
Update Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.
Step 5 Click Browse to choose a neighbor relationship file.

Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring Cells

The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enable
the U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handover
problems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.
Prerequisites
l
cells.
In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

239
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-52 Neighbor Automatic Allocation
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Net
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
Neighboring Cell Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
3.
Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,
see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.
Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning

This section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planning
is complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, export, and modify
neighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

240
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
The neighboring cell planning is complete.
Procedure
NOTE
You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can
be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu.

If you need to...
Then...
View neighboring cell

relationships
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.
Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shown
in Figure 3-53.
The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell are
displayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
Filter neighboring cells
1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from the
shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor
Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. The
filtered cells are displayed in green in the map window, as
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filtered
cells in the map window is cleared.
Remove the filter effect

on neighboring cells
Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose

Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell area
switches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and the
color of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.
NOTE
Audit neighboring cell

relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table and
choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,
see Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheet
shows the result that meets certain audit conditions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

241
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Apply the result of

neighboring cell planning
to each cell
In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Commit All from
the shortcut menu..
Export the result of

1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from the
shortcut menu..
After the result of neighboring cell planning is applied, all the

original neighboring cell relationships are updated.
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an export

mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the changed
neighboring cell relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
NOTE
In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to the
values in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTE
network when creating MML scripts.
Delete neighboring cell

relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whose

neighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted.
2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirm
column of the table in the right pane.
Modify neighboring cell

relationships
1. Select a source cell on the map.

2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to
add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships.
3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to
add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships.
NOTE
l If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as
an existing one, the check box for the selected cell in the
Confirm column of the table in the right pane is automatically
selected or cleared.
l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from the
existing ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to the
neighboring cell list and the value of Cause for the cell is force
in the Cause column.
l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximum
number, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when more
neighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add these
neighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

242
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Export the X2 interface

relationship data
This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network.

The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after the
planning result is applied to each cell.
1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.
2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the
shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box is
displayed.
3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationship
data needs to be exported.
4. Specify an export path.
5. Click OK.
Clear the result of

1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and choose

Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing result
of neighboring cell planning is cleared.
NOTE
You can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that the
planning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

243
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-53 Clicking a cell in the map window
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

244
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-54 Filter
----End
3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning

After base stations are created, you must assign EARFCNs to cells on the network. The U-Net
provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink edge six
frequency band, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. When the frequency band is determined, you
can enable the U-Net to plan EARFCNs automatically or you can manually plan EARFCNs for
each cell.
Frequency Planning Basics

An LTE-FDD broadband network does not have sufficient EARFCNs. However, it supports
dense frequency reuse owning to its orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)
features. The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC
downlink six frequency band allocation, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes.
LTE-FDD Network Frequency Planning

The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink
six frequency band allocation, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes.
l
1x1+ICIC soft frequency reuse

In this mode, cells of all eNodeBs use the same EARFCN and a site is used as a reuse cluster
to implement seamless coverage of the entire network. To reduce the interference between
adjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the fullfrequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band.
1x1+ICIC downlink edge six frequency band allocation reuse

In this mode, cells of all eNodeBs use the same EARFCN and a site is used as a reuse cluster
to implement seamless coverage of the entire network. To reduce the interference between
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

245
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
adjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the fullfrequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band.
l
1x3 frequency reuse

In this mode, the network uses three EARFCNs. The three cells in an eNodeB use different
EARFCNs. An eNodeB and its three cells are used as a reuse cluster to implement seamless
coverage of the entire network.
Planning EARFCNs
The U-Net provides the automatic frequency planning function. You can enable the U-Net to
automatically assign EARFCNs to each cell based on different frequency reuse modes to avoid
improper frequency configuration, which greatly reduces the interference problems caused by
improper frequency configuration.
Prerequisites
The frequency band information is set.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning.
Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.The Parameter Setting dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 3-55.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

246
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-55 Parameter Setting
Step 4 On the General tab page, select the target area in Select Area.
l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in
the area.
l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction,
and set whether to match cases.
Step 5 Set the minimum interference distance in Min Interference Distance(km).
Step 6 Select a frequency reuse mode in Frequency Reuse Pattern. The default reuse mode is 1x1,
Static ICIC.
Step 7 On the Frequency tab page, select a band in Frequency Band and available ARFCNs in
Channel Index.
You can select only one ARFCN in 1x1 frequency reuse mode and three ARFCNs in 1x3
frequency reuse mode.
Step 8 Click Run.
After the frequency planning is complete, open the window of frequency planning results. For
detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Frequency Planning
Results.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

247
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
To export the frequency planning results, click Export in the window of frequency planning
results.
To apply the frequency planning results to the cells, click Commit in the window of
frequency planning results.
Checking the Information About Intra-Frequency Cells and Inter-Frequency Cells

You can check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of a specified ARFCN or a
specified cell. The intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells can be displayed in different
colors in the map window on the U-Net.
Prerequisites
A base station is deployed. ARFCNs are assigned to each cell under the base station.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning.
Step 3 Choose Frequency Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Frequency Statistics dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Set a band in Frequency Band and ARFCNs in Channel Index.
Step 5 Click Find to check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of the specified ARFCN.
Step 6 Click Geometry to query the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells on the map.
Click Color to set the display colors of intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells.
----End
3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells

The LTE cell automatic planning function is used to adjust the mechanical tilt angle, azimuth,
and reference signal power of antennas on the network to meet user requirements. This avoids
manual interventions and reduces repeated parameter adjustments.
The purpose of this function is to improve the network coverage range, control and reduce intercell interference, and expand the network capacity, while ensuring signal receive quality. If the
live network coverage does not meet requirements, you can enable this function to automatically
adjust cell parameters to optimize the coverage.
Planning the Link Matrix

Before optimizing cells, you need to calculate the link data of each cell to improve cell planning
efficiency.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

248
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been
imported or created.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose Calculate LinkLoss Matrix from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 3-56.
Figure 3-56 Calculate LinkLoss Matrix
Step 4 Set related parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box. For details about
parameters, see Setting Link Matrix Parameters.
Step 5 Click Run to start calculating pass loss, as shown in Figure 3-57.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

249
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-57 Calculate
----End
Planning Cells
This section describes how to plan cells. Before planning cells, you need to set parameters such
as analysis and simulation areas, number of iteration times, weight of each coverage counter
(such as RSRP and RS SINR), and maximum adjustment range of the antenna tilt angle,
azimuth, and reference signal transmit power.
Prerequisites
l
Base stations have been created.
Analysis and simulation areas have been created.
The link matrix planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose New from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell
Planning dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-58.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

250
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-58 LTE Cell Planning
Step 4 Set cell planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, see
Parameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After creating an LTE cell planning group, you can plan LTE cells.
1.
In the browser window, click the Operation tab.
2.
Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click Groupx and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu. The system starts
planning LTE cells, as shown in Figure 3-59.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

251
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-59 Calculate LTE Cell Planning
NOTE
You can right-click Groupx and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating LTE cell groups.
When LTE cells are being planned, the Event Viewer window in the lower part of the U-Net main window
displays the planning progress.
After LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result. For details, see Viewing the LTE
Cell Planning Result.
Viewing the LTE Cell Planning Result

After LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result of each iteration and the planning
result of the LTE cell parameters for each cell in each iteration. You can also compare the
parameter values before and after the planning. In addition, you can view the planning result of
each iteration in a line graph. The planning result can apply to actual cells.
Prerequisites
l
Links have been calculated.
LTE cell planning groups have been created and calculated.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click Groupx and choose Result from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell Planning:
Groupx dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, view the LTE cell planning result, as shown in Figure 3-60. For
details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning Results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

252
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 3-60 LTE Cell Planning: Groupx
NOTE
On the Cells tab page in the LTE Cell Planning :Groupx dialog box, click Commit to apply the cell
planning result to each cell.
----End
3.10.6 Interface Reference to LTE-FDD Network Parameter

Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for LTE-FDD network parameter planning
by using the U-Net.
Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells

This section describes parameters for planning neighboring LTE-FDD cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

253
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-70 Parameters displayed on the General tab page

Parameter
Description
Methods Select
Selects a network planning scenario.

l Topology: Plans neighboring cells based on the network
topology.
l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on prediction
results. This method is applicable only to outdoor base
stations.
l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on
both the network topology and the prediction results.
Max Neighbor Distance(km)
Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.

If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified
value, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.
Planning Neighbor based on

existed Neighbors
Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboring

relationships.
If this option is not selected, the existing neighboring
relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are
replanned.
Force Co-Site As Neighbor
Forcibly configures internal cells as bidirectional

neighboring cells.
Co-Site Distance(m)
Configures two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when

the distance between the two cells is less than the value of
this parameter.
Reference Existed Neighbors
Whether to reference the neighbor relationships of existing

cells.
Azimuth Difference ()
Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be

planned and the referenced cells.
Reference Site Distance(m)
Sets the distance difference between the cell to be planned

and the referenced cell.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the precision for the calculation.

This parameter is valid only when the network planning
scenario is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Handover Area Percent(%)
Indicates the handover area proportion.

Compute Shadowing
Indicates whether to impose shadow fading.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

254
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Cell Edge Coverage

Probability(%)
Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This

parameter is valid only when shadow fading is imposed. The
value of the parameter is directly proportional to the value
of shadow fading.
Compute Indoor Loss
Indicates whether to impose penetration loss.

Min Signal Level(dBm)
Indicates the minimum signal receive level.

Handover Threshold(dB)
Indicates the handover area threshold.

Area
Indicates the planning area.

l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to
select only the cells to be planned in the area.
l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to
be found, set the search direction, and set whether to
match cases.
Table 3-71 Parameters displayed on the Intra-Frequency tab page

Parameter
Description
Max Neighbor Number of

Indoor Cell
Indicates the maximum number of indoor intra-frequency

neighboring cells.
This parameter is valid only when neighboring cells are
planned based on network topology.

Outdoor Cell
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor intra-frequency

neighboring cells.
Force Symmetry
Indicates whether to configure cells as bidirectional

neighboring cells.
If this option is selected during network capacity expansion,
the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured as
bidirectional neighboring cells to adjust the original
neighboring relationship table.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

255
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-72 Parameters displayed on the Inter-Frequency tab page

Parameter
Description

Indoor Cell
Indicates the maximum number of indoor inter-frequency

neighboring cells.
This parameter is valid only when neighbor relationships are
planned based on the topology.

Outdoor Cell
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor inter-frequency

neighboring cells.
Force Symmetry

neighboring cells.
Table 3-73 Parameters displayed on the Inter-RAT tab page (available in multi-mode)
Parameter
Description
Co-Site Distance
Indicates the co-site distance. The default value is

30 km.
If the distance between two base stations is less than
or equal to the value of this parameter, the cells
under the two base stations are considered as co-site
cells.
If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTS
networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or
repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are
considered as co-site cells only if the distances
between all antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDD
base station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/
UMTS base station are less than or equal to the
value of this parameter.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

CAUTION
On the General
tab page, if you
select a network
planning mode
(Methods
Select), the
required
conditions must
be met so that you
can use the cell as
a neighboring
LTE-FDD cell for
blind handover.
For details, see
Table 3-74.
256
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Co-Transceiver
Azimuth
Difference
Indicates the co-transceiver azimuth difference.

The default value is 5o.
If the difference between the antenna azimuths of
two cells is less than or equal to the co-transceiver
azimuth difference, the two cells are considered as
co-transceiver cells.
If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTS
networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or
repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are
considered as co-transceiver cells only if the
azimuth difference between all antennas (or
repeaters) of the LTE-FDD base station and
antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS base
station is less than or equal to the value of this
parameter.
Min Signal Level

(dBm)
Indicates the minimum signal receive level. The

default value is 110 dBm.
The signal receive level of the LTE-FDD cell must
be less than the preset Min Signal Level(dBm)
value.
Best Handover
Area Percent
Indicates the best handover area proportion. The

default value is 90%.
On multi-mode networks, the LTE-FDD Best
Server area may overlap the GSM/UMTS Best
Server area. The ratio of the overlapped area to the
LTE-FDD Best Server area is the handover area
proportion.
This value must be greater or equal to the preset
Best Handover Area Percent.
SourceNetType
Indicates the system to which the source cell belongs.
To
Indicates the system to which the cell to be planned belongs.

NOTE
If the RAT is switched to UMTS, you can set the ARFCN to be handed over. If
the RAT is switched to GSM, you can set the frequency band to be handed over.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Min Signal Level

(dBm)
Indicates the minimum signal receive level of the inter-RAT neighboring

cell.
Handover
Threshold(dB)
Max Number
Indicates the maximum number of neighboring cells.

257
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-74 Conditions for blind neighboring LTE-FDD cell handover

If you need to...
Then...
The Topology
mode is selected
A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTEFDD cell must meet the following conditions:
l Co-Site Distance
l Co-Transceiver Azimuth Difference
l Min Signal Level(dBm)
The Prediction
mode is selected
A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTEFDD cell must meet the following conditions:
l Co-Site Distance
l Best Handover Area Percent
NOTE
If there are repeaters, neighboring cell planning based on predictions is not
supported.
The U-Net determines neighboring cells based on prediction. If the

neighboring relationships between the serving cell and some cells
cannot be determined based on prediction, the U-Net determines
neighboring cells based on their topology relationships.
Topology +
Prediction is
selected
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells

This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Display Links
Identifies neighboring relationships by lines.
Display Cell Color
Identifies neighboring relationships in cell colors.
Fit Neighbor Cell Visible
Displays the neighboring relationships of a cell on the

map after you select the cell in the neighboring
relationship table.
Selected Cell Color
Sets the color of the source cell.
Intra Frequency Neighbors
Displays intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter Frequency Neighbors
Displays inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Displays inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Intra Technology Neighbors
Displays intra-Technology neighboring cells.

258
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-76 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page

Legend
Description
Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of intra-frequency unidirectional

neighboring cells on the map.
Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of inter-frequency unidirectional

Inter-RAT
Sets the display color of inter-RAT unidirectional

Intra Technology
Sets the display color of intra-technology unidirectional

Paired Intra Frequency
Sets the display color of intra-frequency bidirectional

Paired Inter Frequency
Sets the display color of inter-frequency bidirectional

Paired Inter-RAT
Sets the display color of inter-RAT bidirectional

Paired Intra Technology
Sets the display color of intra-technology bidirectional

Add To Legend
Displays the neighboring relationships on the map.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of the color.
NOTE
The neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You can
view the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.
Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships and

Filtering Neighboring Cells
This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighbor
relationships and filtering neighboring cells.
Table 3-77 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Selects the source cell.
Intra-Frequency
Filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Intra-Technology
Filters the intra-RAT neighboring cells.

259
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Inter-RAT
Filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Average No.of Neighbors
Indicates the average number of neighboring cells.
Empty List
Filters the unconfigured neighboring cells.
Missing Co-Site
Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.
Missing Symmetry
Filters the unconfigured bidirectional neighboring cells.
List > No:
Filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are

more than the specified value.
Percentage of Reference
Neighbors
Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share the

neighboring relationships with the GSM cells at the same
site as the UMTS cells.
Same PCI
Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. This
parameter is available only for the LTE network.
None
Sets no filter criterion.
Highlighted on Geographic
Interface
Determines whether to highlight filtered cells on the map or

not.
This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filtering
neighboring cells in each network system. Certain parameters may be available in a specific
network system. Read the parameter description on the actual parameter.
Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results

This section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to this
section when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning is
complete.
Table 3-78 Tab page description
Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Indicates intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency
Indicates inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT
Indicates inter-RAT neighboring cells.
The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on the
actual tab page.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

260
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-79 Parameter description

Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.
Cause
Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell

of the serving cell.
l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the
network.
l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships.
l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added
by users.
l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.
Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of
the serving cell.
Confirm
If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboring

cell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell is
not configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.
Blind Handover
Indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover.
Parameters for Viewing Frequency Planning Results

This section describes the parameters for viewing LTE frequency planning results. You can refer
to this section when viewing frequency planning results in the 11 Result and 13 Result dialog
boxes.
Parameter
Description
Site
Indicates the name of a site.
Transceiver
Indicates the name of a transmitter.
Frequency
Indicates the frequency band.
Bandwidth
Indicates the bandwidth.
11 Result
dialog box
Edge Frequency
(UL)
Indicates the allocation mode of the uplink edge

frequency band. The value can be Style1, Style2, or
Style3.
NOTE
When the downlink six edge frequency band allocation
modes are used, the uplink edge frequency band mode has
no output.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

261
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Edge Frequency
(DL)
When Static ICIC is selected, the downlink three

frequency band allocation modes are used. The value
can be Style1, Style2, or Style3.
When Adaptive ICIC is selected, the downlink six
frequency band allocation modes are used. The value
can be Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or
Style3b.
13 Result
dialog box
Channel Index
Indicates the ARFCN, which represents an offset of

the frequency based on the current frequency band.
For example, if the frequency band is 1800 MHz, the
bandwidth is 20 MHz, and there are 10 ARFCNs,
ARFCN 8 represents 1800 + 20 x 8 (MHz).
Parameters for Planning PCIs

This section describes the parameters for automatically planning PCIs. You can refer to this
section when planning PCIs in the LTE PCI Planning dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Available PCI
Available PCIs. The value ranges from 0 to

503.
Planning With Exist PCI
Whether to conduct planning based on

existing PCIs.
PCI Mod 3 Matching Azimuth order
Allocate PCI Mod 3 based on azimuth order.
Iteratively General PCI
Sets whether to generate PCIs by iterations.

When this option is selected, the PCIs are
allocated in the following manner when PCI
allocation in a cell fails: The PCIs are
allocated by reducing the reuse distance by
iterations based on the steps as defined by
Distance Descending Percentage(%).
Distance Descending Percentage(%)
Indicates the percentage of the step for

reducing the PCI reuse distance.
Area
Indicates the PCI planning area.
Filter
l You can select all the cells in an area or

click Filter to select only the cells to be
planned in the area.
l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify
the contents to be found, set the search
direction, and set whether to match cases.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

262
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 3-81 Parameters on the Advanced Parameter tab page

Parameter
Description
Topology
Select Topology to plan PCIs based on the

network topology such as the cell location
and antenna azimuth.
Prediction
Select Prediction to plan PCIs based on the

prediction results such as cell coverage area.
If the NE parameters are correctly configured,
you are advised to plan PCIs based on the
prediction results.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the coverage calculation precision.

Indicates the threshold of minimum receive

signal level.
Handover area threshold(dB)
Shadowing taken into account
Select Shadowing taken into account to

take into account the shadow fading during
the calculation of path loss.
Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell

Edge Coverage Probability(%).
This parameter is valid only when shadow
fading is taken into account. The value of the
parameter is directly proportional to the value
of shadowing fading.
Select Indoor Coverage to take into account
indoor coverage during the calculation of
path loss.
Indoor Coverage
Parameters for Viewing PCI Planning Results

This section describes the parameters for viewing PCI planning results.
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Existing Code
Indicates the existing PCI value.

Before you submit PCI results, the PCI value remains
unchanged.
Suggest Code
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the suggested PCI value and also the planned PCI
value.
263
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Confirm Code
Indicates the confirmed PCI value.

The default value of this parameter is equal to the planned
PCI value. The value of this parameter can be changed
manually.
When you submit PCI planning results, the value of this
parameter is submitted.
Min Reuse Distance(m)
Indicates the minimum reuse distance of PCI in the current

line. No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.
Min Reuse Tier
Indicates the minimum reuse tier of PCI in the current line.

No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.
Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning Results

This section describes the parameters for filtering and auditing PCI planning results.
Parameter
Description
Filter Target
Indicates the range of cells to be filtered.

l All: all cells.
l Planning: planned cells.
None
No condition is specified.
Reuse Tier <=
Indicates the maximum number of reuse layers.
Reuse Distance(km) <=
Indicates the maximum reuse distance.
Interface
Indicates whether to highlight filtered cells on the map

or not.
Parameters for Planning the PRACH

This section describes the parameters for planning the LTE PRACH. You can refer to this section
when setting PRACH parameters in the LTE PRACH Planning dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Available Root Sequence

Index
Available Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequence indexes.

l Preamble Format (0-3): ZC sequence indexes available
for the cells whose preamble format is set to 0-3. The
maximum value range is from 0 to 837.
l Preamble Format (4): ZC sequence indexes available
for the cells whose preamble format is set to 4. The
maximum value range is from 0 to 137. This parameter is
available only for the LTE-TDD network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

264
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Calculate Cell Radius
Whether to calculate the cell radius.

If this option is selected, the cell radius needs to be calculated.
If this option is not selected, the cell radius set for an NE is
used.
Propagation Radius
Cell radius is calculated based on the calculation radius of

Propagation Radius Factor
Conversion factor for the Calculation radius of a propagation

model.
Coverage Radius
Cell radius is calculated based on the signal coverage of cells.
Resolution(m)
Precision of the coverage calculation. The default value is

50.
Minimum receive level of signals for cell coverage.
Shadowing taken into account
Whether to consider shadow fading when calculating signal

coverage of cells.
Cell Edge Coverage

Probability(%)
Cell edge coverage probability used for calculating shadow

fading.
Indoor Coverage
Whether to take penetration loss into account.
Area
Area for PRACH planning.

l You can select all the cells in an area or click Cell
Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the area.
match cases.
Parameters for Viewing PRACH Planning Results

This section describes the parameters for viewing or modifying PRACH planning results. You
can refer to this section when viewing PRACH planning results in the PRACH Parameter
Display dialog box or in the carrier property window.
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
HighSpeed
Indicates whether the cell is a high-speed cell.

In PRACH planning, high-speed cells are preferentially
planned.
Preamble Format(4)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Whether the preamble format of the cell is 4.

265
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Ncs
Indicates the cyclic shift, that is, the configuration of zerocorrelated cells allocated for a cell.
The value of this parameter is a result of the PRACH
planning. The possible values of this parameter are as
follows:
l High-speed cell: 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 55, 68, 82,
100, 128, 158, 202, or 237.
l Low-speed cell: 0, 13, 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 59,
76, 93, 119, 167, 279, or 419.
Cell Radius
Existed Min Root Sequence

Index
Indicates the existing start ZC root sequence index of the

cell.
Suggested Start Root Sequence

Index
Indicates the planned start ZC root sequence index of the

cell.
Suggested End Root Sequence

Index
Indicates the planned end ZC root sequence index of the

cell.
Confirmed Start Root Sequence

Index
Indicates the confirmed start ZC root sequence index.
Confirmed End Root Sequence

Index
Indicates the confirmed end ZC root sequence index.
Reuse Tier (Topology)
Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based on the

geographical location.
Reuse Distance(m)
Indicates the PARCH reuse distance, that is, the minimum

reuse distance when the same root sequence is reused.
Reuse Tier (Neighbor)
Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based on

neighboring relationship.
Actual Required Reuse Tier

(Neighbor)
Indicates the actually required number of reuse tiers when

resources are allocated to cells.
Lower Reuse Tier (Neighbor)
Indicates whether the number of reuse tiers is reduced

when resources are allocated to cells.
Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties

This section describes the parameters for setting PCI Display Properties in the PCI Display
Options dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

266
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Display Links
Marks PCI results in lines of different colors.
Display Cell Color
Identifies PCI results in cell colors.
Selected Cell Color
Select PCI type
Selects the PCI results to be displayed in the map window.
Table 3-83 Parameters on the PCI Display Color tab page

Parameter
Description
Same PCI
Indicates the cells with the same PCI.
Same MOD3
Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 3 with the
specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.
Same MOD6
Indicates the cells that have the same PCI mode 6 with the
specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations.
Basic Parameters of a Site

This section describes the parameters displayed or hidden in the Sites table. You can refer to
this section when viewing basic parameters of a site in the Columns to be displayed dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Site Name
Name of a site. This parameter uniquely

identifies a site.
new site.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Site ID
Site ID.
Geodetic coordinate X (X coordinate).
Geodetic coordinate Y (Y coordinate).
Longitude
Longitudinal coordinate.
Latitude
Latitudinal coordinate.
Altitude(m)
Altitude.
Whether to manually type the altitude of a site

for calculation. If this item is selected, you
need to type the altitude of a site manually.
Comments
Comments on a site.
267
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Support Type
Base station type.

Macro indicates a macro base station,
Micro indicates a micro base station.
Setting Link Matrix Parameters

This section describes the parameters required for planning LTE cells. You can refer to this
section when setting parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Resolution (m)
Indicates the link matrix calculation

resolution. The default value is 50.
With Shadow
Indicates whether to impose shadow fading.

By default, this option is selected.
Indicates the cell edge coverage. The default

value is 75%.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when shadow
fading is imposed.
Indoor Coverage
Indicates whether to impose indoor coverage.

Terminal
Select a preset terminal type from the dropdown list.
Service
Select a preset service type from the dropdown list.
Polygon Region
Select a polygon region.
Select DT Data
Select a DT data source.
Parameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group

This section describes the parameters for creating and setting an LTE cell planning group. You
can refer to this section when creating or setting an LTE cell planning group in the LTE Cell
Planning dialog box.
Parameters on the General Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of an LTE cell planning

group.
268
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
DL RSRP Target Ratio
Indicates the percentage of the downlink

RSRP that reaches the specified threshold in
the selected calculation area. The value range
is from 0% to 100%.
DL RSRP Threshold(dBm)
Indicates the threshold that the downlink

RSRP reaches.
DL RS SINR Target Ratio
Indicates the percentage of the downlink RS

SINR that reaches the specified threshold in
is from 0% to 100%.
DL RS SINR Threshold(dBm)
Indicates the threshold that the downlink RS

SINR reaches.
UL RSRP Target Ratio
Indicates the percentage of the uplink RSRP

that reaches the specified threshold in the
selected calculation area. The value range is
from 0% to 100%.
UL RSRP Threshold(dBm)
Indicates the threshold that the uplink RSRP

reaches.
UL RS SINR Target Ratio
Indicates the percentage of the uplink RS

SINR that reaches the specified threshold in
is from 0% to 100%.
UL RS SINR Threshold(dBm)
Indicates the threshold that the uplink RS

SINR reaches.
DL RSRP Fitness Weight
Indicates the weight of the downlink RSRP

performance counter of a cell. The value
range is from 0 to 100.
DL RS SINR Fitness Weight
Indicates the weight of the downlink RS

SINR performance counter of a cell. The
value range is from 0 to 100.
UL RSRP Fitness Weight
Indicates the weight of the uplink RSRP

UL RS SINR Fitness Weight
Indicates the weight of the uplink RS SINR


269
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameters on the Advanced Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Azimuth Step Size()
Indicates the step length at which the antenna

azimuth is adjusted. The value range is from
-360 to 360.
Tilt Step Size()
Indicates the step length at which the antenna

tile angle is adjusted. The value range is from
-90 to 90.
RS Power Step Size(dBm)
Indicates the step length at which the cell

transmit power is adjusted. The value range
is from 0 to 46.
Search Range
Indicates the range to be calculated for each

optimization during the planning. The value
A larger parameter value indicates a more
accurate planning result but a longer
calculation time.
Iteration Count
Indicates the maximum number of iterations

during the whole planning. The value ranges
from 1 to 100.
A larger parameter value indicates a more
accurate planning result but a longer
calculation time.
Fitness Statistics Based on DT
Indicates whether to plan LTE cells based on

DT data.
l If this parameter is selected, LTE cells are
planned based on DT data.
l If this parameter is not selected, LTE cells
are not planned based on DT data.
Parameters on the Area Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Analysis Area
Indicates the analysis area for LTE cell

automatic planning. Cells in this area are
involved in LTE Cell parameter adjustment.

270
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Simulation Area
Simulation area for automatic LTE cell

planning. This area monitors the entire LTE
Cell adjustment effect. During the planning,
the system imposes the interference of sites
in the simulation area to the sites in the
analysis area.
NOTE
l If the project contains only one polygon, this
polygon is selected in both the analysis and
simulation areas.
l If the project contains polygons, the simulation
area must contain the analysis area.
Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning Results

This section describes parameters for viewing LTE cell planning results.
Table 3-84 Parameters on the Cells Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Iteration
Indicates the number of an iteration.
Site Name
Indicates the name of a site.
Site ID
Indicates the ID of a site.
Cell Name
Local Cell ID
Indicates the internal code of a cell for

differentiating the cell from other cells under
the same eNodeB.
Original Azimuth()
Indicates the original antenna azimuth for a

cell.
Optimized Azimuth()
Indicates the optimized antenna azimuth for

a cell.
Original RS Power(dBm)
Indicates the original RS power for a cell.
Optimized RS Power(dBm)
Indicates the optimized RS power for a cell.
Original Tilt()
Indicates the original antenna tilt angle for a

cell.
Optimized Tilt()
Indicates the optimized antenna tilt angle for

a cell.

271
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Original Fitness
Indicates the original fitness value of a cell.

The fitness value represents cell
performance.
Optimized Fitness
Indicates the optimized fitness value of a cell.
Table 3-85 Parameters on the Fitness Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Iteration
Indicates the number of an iteration.
Fitness
Indicates the fitness value of each iteration.

NOTE
The system automatically calculates the value after
each iteration.
Table 3-86 Parameters on the Coverage KPI Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
DL RSRP
After DL RSRP is selected, the DL RSRP coverage prediction

charts of any two iterations is displayed.
DL RS SINR
After DL RS SINR is selected, the DLRS SINR coverage

prediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.
UL RSRP
After UL RSRP is selected, the UL RSRP coverage prediction

charts of any two iterations is displayed.
UL RS SINR
After UL RS SINR is selected, the ULRS SINR coverage

prediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.
Iteration
Indicates the first iteration to be compared.
Compare Iteration
Indicates the second iteration to be compared.

272
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
LTE-TDD Network Planning
About This Chapter

The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actual
network environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating
base stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parameters
and predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements on
network planning in different scenarios.
4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning
This section describes the process of LTE-TDD network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning an LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.
4.5 Adding a Device
4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

273
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters
separately.
4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction
channel quality.
4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation
4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters
This section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of the
LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

274
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning

This section describes the process of LTE-TDD network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning an LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.
Figure 4-1 shows the process of LTE-TDD network planning.
Figure 4-1 Process of LTE-TDD network planning
Table 4-1describes the detailed information about Figure 4-1.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

275
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 4-1 Description of the LTE-TDD network planning process

No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data

grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also add
points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The
Managing
propagation models
and bands

Adding a device

or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Setting traffic
parameters

4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters.
Setting NE
parameters

Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters.

loss
The method for calculating the path loss for different

network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details,
see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.
Predicting network
performance
For details, see 4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction.
Planning PCI/
frequency/PRACH/
neighboring cells
For details, see 4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network

Parameters.
10
Creating a traffic
map
The method for creating a traffic map for LTE-FDD and

LTE-TDD network on the U-Net is the same. For details,
see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.
11
Performing
capacity simulation
For details, see 4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation.
Exporting network
planning results

Planning.
12
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
The capacity simulation results can be applied to

prediction.

276
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Context
l
network.
Procedure

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l

file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

277
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE

NOTE

Context
The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.

Context
The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems
on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.
For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters for
Setting Bands.
4.5 Adding a Device

Context
The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

278
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters

4.6.1 Setting MCS Types

This section describes how to set an MCS. You can modify the parameters (mainly the
demodulation mode and coding rate) of an existing MCS type. When the existing MCS types
do not meet your requirements, you can create a new MCS type.
Context
The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes
(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD.
Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.
Step 4 Click the blank row (marked with *) in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-3. For information
on how to set a new MCS type, see Table 4-2.
Figure 4-3 MCS
Table 4-2 Parameters for Setting the MCS
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Index
Indicates the index of an MCS.

279
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Highest modulation
Indicates a modulation scheme, which can any of the

following:
l QPSK
l 16QAM
l 64QAM
Modulation Order
Indicates a modulation exponent.
Coding Rate
Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to

2.
Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE)
Indicates the bearer efficiency.

Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulation
exponent
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types

Context
For an LTE-TDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideo
Conferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.
Procedure
If...
Then...

LTE-TDD.
4-3.
Modify an existing
service type

LTE-TDD > the existing service type.
3. Modify the parameters for the existing service type by referring
to Table 4-3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

280
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 4-4 New
Table 4-3 Description of service parameters

Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a service type.
Type
Service type.
l Voice: CS services.
l Data: PS services.
GBR
GBR service.
Priority
Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the service

priority for subscribers in capacity simulation.
1 indicates the lowest priority.
Activity Factor
Uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required only

for CS services.
to 1.
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s.

Value range: 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

281
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
MAC PDU(kbit)
Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.
Max Throughput
(kbit/s)
Maximum uplink/downlink throughput.

107.
from 0 to 107.
NOTE
Min Throughput
(kbit/s)
Minimum uplink/downlink throughput.

107.
from 0 to 107.
NOTE
Average Throughput
(kbit/s)
Average uplink/downlink throughput.

Transmission
Efficiency
Uplink/downlink transmission rate.

to 1.
Offset(kbit/s)
Fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an

encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC
layer.
107.
IBLER(%)
Block error rate. The value ranges from 0 to 100.
Body Loss(dB)
Body loss.
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
4.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver Types

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

282
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-TDD.
If...
Then...
In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the new

receiver and select type of MCS Table.

type.
Perform Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parameters
for the receiver type by referring to Table 4-4.
If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 4-4 Parameters for setting LTE-TDD receivers
Parameter
Description
Name
MCS Table
Indicates the modulation and coding scheme.
Mobility

For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
MIMO
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0

to 100.
Channel Relativity
Indicates the channel relativity.
Transmission Mode

This parameter is valid only when the MCS Table is set
to PDSCH MCS.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

283
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
MCS Threshold
Indicates the MCS bearer table of a receiver.

You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed
MCS bearer information in the Demodulation area.
l SINR: indicates the threshold of the SINR required
during demodulation.
l Spectrum Efficiency: indicate the efficiency of the
spectrum.
l The chart in the right pane shows the demodulation
thresholds.
----End
4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type

Procedure
If...
Then...
type
LTE-TDD.
3. See Table 4-5 to set the parameters of a new terminal type.
Modify an
1. On the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >
existing terminal
LTE-TDD > Existing Terminals.
type
3. See Table 4-5 to modify the parameters of an existing terminal type.
Table 4-5 Parameter description of a terminal type

Parameter
Meaning
Name
UE Category
Indicates the category of a terminal.

The terminals are classified into five categories
ranging from 1 to 5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

284
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
UL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Indicates the peak throughput in the uplink

direction.
DL Peak Throughput(Kbps)
Indicates the peak throughput in the downlink

direction.
Support UL 64 QAM
Indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink

direction.
Maximum Layer Number
Indicates the maximum number of layers.
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the minimum transmit power of a

terminal.
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of a

terminal.
Noise Figure(dB)
Cable Loss(dB)
Supported BF
Indicates whether to support the beamforming

(BF).
The available options are Not supported, TM7,
and TM8.
UL RS Offset(dB)
Indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the

uplink direction.
RB Number
Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs)

supported by the terminal. This parameter is only
applicable to prediction.
Reception Equipment
Gain(dBi)
Number of Transmission Antenna Ports
Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter

for a terminal.
Number of Reception Antenna Ports
Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver

for a terminal.
----End

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

285
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For
details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.

Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see
3.6.6 Setting User Types.

Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,
see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.
4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters

separately.

the same way.
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. For
details, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

286
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.
4.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station Template

Procedure
l

1.
Select Template Management from the

drop-down list on
the toolbar. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-5.
2.
drop-down list.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

287
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
For example,
l

1.

2.
Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for Setting
LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.

1.
2.
3.
Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
station template.

Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the same
way. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.

Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

288
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,
see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.
4.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell Parameters

This section describes how to set LTE-TDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can
Procedure
Step 4 On the LTE-TDDCell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the LTE-TDD
cell, as shown in Figure 4-6. For parameter description, see Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells.
Figure 4-6 LTE-TDDCell
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

289
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
4.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters

This section describes the parameters for setting LTE-TDD NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates

Site Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Name
Support Type

micro base station.

Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Transceiver Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Model
Site Equipment
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical tilt angle.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical tilt angle.
Height/Ground(m)
Indicates the azimuth of the first sector.
Transmission in the
Number of Antennas area

290
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description

Antennas area
Transmission in the
Number of Antenna Ports
area
Total Loss(DL)
Total Loss(UL)
Comments
Description.
General Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
RS Power(dBm)

The unit is dBm.
Actual Load(DL)

from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL)
0 to 1.
Target IoT(UL)(dB)

Actual IoT(UL)(dB)

uplink.
CCU IoT(dB)

12.5.
CEU IoT(dB)

10.5.
Frequency Band
Channel Index
Reception
Transmission Mode

For the details of the value, see Table 4-6.
DwPTS-GP-UpPTS
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS.

291
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Frame Configuration
Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes.

l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes are
included.
l For example, the value of this parameter can be
DSUUUDSUUU.
D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, special
subframe, and uplink subframe respectively.
Priority
Channel Relativity

COMP
Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabled

on the base station.
Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for the
base station to increase cell edge capacity and average cell
throughput. By default, this option is not selected.
IRC

Advance Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Downlink
Indicates the downlink parameters.

You can set downlink parameters in the text boxes in this area.
Uplink
Indicates the uplink parameters.

You can set uplink parameters in the text boxes in this area.
Schedule

function.
ICIC(UL)

coordination (ICIC) in the uplink.
properties.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

292
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
ICIC(DL)

modes and then deliver the band modes without having to
configure the parameter for the cells one by one.

in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2,
or Style3).

in the downlink.
(LowPowerReuse1).
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in the
cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Power Control
Indicates the power control in the downlink.
Target Load
Indicates the target load.

downlink PDCCH.
Max Schedule Users
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)


293
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description

(DL)(dB)

access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit is
dB.
Schedule Policy

algorithm.
TTI Bundling
VMIMO

Power Offset Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
PBCH to RS(dB)

the unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB)

the unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relative

PDCCH to RS(dB)

PHICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the power

of the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. The
unit is dB.
PA(dB)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

294
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CCU PA(dB)

power.
CEU PA(dB)

The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.
PB(dB)

1, 2, or 3.
Propagation Models Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model

Radius(m)
Resolution(m)

Value
Description
TM1
TM2

TM3

TM4

TM6

TM7

network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

295
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Value
Description
TM8

network.
OL_Adaptive

and TM3.
CL_Adaptive

and TM6.
OL_CL_Adaptive

TM3, TM4, and TM6.
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive

network.
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive

network.
Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells

This section describes the parameters for creating an LTE-TDD cell or modifying the properties
of an LTE-TDD cell.
LTE-TDDCell Tab Page

Table 4-7 LTE-TDDCell tab page
Parameter
Description
GCI
Indicates the global cell identity of a cell.
Name
Indicates the name of a carrier.

The U-Net enters the default name for each new carrier.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Active
Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.
Frequency Band
Channel Index

296
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges

from 0 to 1.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value

ranges from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(UL)
Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges

from 0 to 1.
Actual Load(DL)
Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value

ranges from 0 to 1.
RS Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the reference signal on a

subcarrier. The unit is dBm.
PBCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the

power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
SCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the

power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.
PCFICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink physical control

format indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to
the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from
PDCCH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power

relative to the power of the reference signal. The value
ranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.
PHICH to RS(dB)
Indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQ

indicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power
of the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15.
The unit is dB.
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is

dBm.
Actual IoT(UL)(dB)

uplink.
High Speed
Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set

to one of the following values:
l LowSpeed
l HighSpeed
l HighwaySpeed
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Radius(m)
Min Root Sequence Index
Indicates the minimum ZC sequence of a cell.

297
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor)
Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on

the neighbor relationship).
The value of this parameter must be an integer larger
than 0.
Preamble Format
Preamble format.
Reception
RS SINR Access Threshold(DL)

(dB)
Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio

(SINR) access threshold of the downlink reference
signal. The unit is dB.
Priority
Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell

is, the higher the priority of the cell is.
PB(dB)
Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B

symbols of the RE relative to the RSRE power. The
value can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Schedule Policy

l RR: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the
polling algorithm.
l PF: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the
polling algorithm and the maximum signal to
interference ratio.
l MAX_CI: Indicates that the scheduling is based on
the maximum signal to interference ratio.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
PCI
Indicates the physical ID of a cell.
PCI Reuse Distance(Km)
Indicates the minimum PCI reuse distance.
PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor)
Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on the

Scene
MCC
MNC
CI
DlEarfcn
Indicates a downlink ARFCN.
UlEarfcn
Indicates an uplink ARFCN.
TAC
Indicates the tracking area code (TAC).
Local Cell ID
Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating

the cell from other cells under the same eNodeB.
Reselect Priority
Indicates the cell reselection priority.

298
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the transmit power on the PDCCH

RE relative to that on the RS RE.
-3.
CCU PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received

by users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the
RS power.
-6.
CEU PA(dB)
Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received

by users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the
RS power.
-1.77.
CCU IoT(dB)

12.5.
CEU IoT(dB)

10.5.
Alpha
This is an open loop power control parameter and

indicates the path loss compensation coefficient.
Po(dBm)
This is an open loop power control parameter.
TTI Bundling

Multi-user Beamforming
Determines whether to enable the Multi-user

Beamforming function during downlink scheduling.
VMIMO
Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multipleoutput (VMIMO) is considered.

IRC

If colored interference is strong, enable the IRC to
suppress combining signal interference and increase
uplink gain. By default, this option is not selected.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

299
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
COMP
Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is

enabled on the base station.
Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink
for the base station to increase cell edge capacity and
average cell throughput. By default, this option is not
selected.
Channel Relativity

Transmission Mode

VIP
For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters

cannot be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt,
and pilot power.
Throughput(UL)
Uplink throughput of a single subscriber. The value

Throughput(DL)
Downlink throughput of a single subscriber. The value

Cell Throughput(UL)
Uplink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 to

int.Max.
Cell Throughput(DL)
Downlink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0

to int.Max.
Density
Density of subscribers. The value ranges from 0 to

int.Max.
Azimuth Locked
Whether the azimuth is locked.
Azimuth Min. Value
Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value

Azimuth Max. Value
Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value

Electronic Downtilt Locked
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Whether the electrical tilt is locked.

300
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Electronic Downtilt Min. Value
Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The

value ranges from -90 to 90.
Electronic Downtilt Max. Value
Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The

value ranges from -90 to 90.
RsPower Locked
Indicates whether the pilot power is locked.
RsPower Min. Value(dB)
Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The

value ranges from 0 to 46.
RsPower Max. Value(dB)
Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The

value ranges from 0 to 46.
Fitness Threshold(%)
Fitness threshold. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Comments
Description.
State
Cell status, which is used to determine a cell in outage.

The value can be Working or Outage.
The default value is Working.
Advance Parameters
Sets advanced parameters by clicking this button.

DwPTS-GP-UpPTS
Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, and

UpPTS.
Frame Configuration
Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes.

l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes
are included.
l For example, the value of this parameter can be
DSUUUDSUUU.
D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, special
subframe, and uplink subframe respectively.
Neighbours list
Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button.

Propagation Models
Sets the propagation model by clicking this button.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

301
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Value
Description
TM1
TM2

TM3

TM4

TM6

TM7

network.
TM8

network.
OL_Adaptive

and TM3.
CL_Adaptive

and TM6.
OL_CL_Adaptive

TM3, TM4, and TM6.
TM7_MIMO_Adaptive

network.
TM8_MIMO_Adaptive

network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

302
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 4-9 Advance Parameters tab page

Parameter
Description
Schedule

function.
ICIC(UL)

coordination (ICIC) on the uplink.
properties.
ICIC(DL)

modes and then deliver the band modes without having
to configure the parameter for the cells one by one.

in the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1,
Style2, or Style3).

in the downlink.
(LowPowerReuse1).
set to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in
the cell is set to the value of CCU PA.
Power Control
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the power control on the downlink.

303
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Edge Frequency Style

on the uplink and downlink.

downlink PDCCH.
Max Schedule Users

Target IoT(UL)(dB)

Table 4-10 Cell Neighbors tab page

Parameter
Description
Intra-frequency Neighbors
Indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-frequency Neighbors
Indicates a list of inter-frequency neighboring cells.
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Indicates a list of inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Table 4-11 Propagation tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the main propagation

model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation precision of the main propagation

model.
Propagation Model
Indicates the extension propagation model.
Radius(m)
Indicates the calculation radius of the extended propagation

model.
Resolution(m)
Indicates the calculation precision of the extended

propagation model.

304
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
General Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Name

transceiver.
Site

Hexagon Radius(m)

by default.

of Antennas area

Antennas area

Comments
Antenna Config Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Antenna ID

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)

Dy(m)

Longitude

305
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Latitude
Main Antenna

Azimuth

is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID

Equipment

Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss

the total loss.
loss.
Site Equipment
TMA

Feeder
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
to
Feeder Length(m)



306
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Total Loss(dB)

4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction

channel quality.
4.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction

Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters

This section describes the meanings of LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
NOTE
menu.
Table 4-15 lists the LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Table 4-15 Description of LTE-TDD prediction counters
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Category
Counter
Meaning
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
Best Server
Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells that

receive downlink signals.
DL RSRP
Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS)

received from the primary serving cell.
DL BandWidth RSRP
Indicates the strength of downlink reference signals

on the entire bandwidth.

307
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Meaning
DL RSSI
Total power received by a UE on the entire

bandwidth. The power includes the receive power of
the serving cell, interference power of other cells,
and the noise power of the UE.
PDSCH Signal Level
Indicates the received power of the traffic channel

RE.
Handover Area
Whether an area is a handover area.
DL ICIC Zone
Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink central

area and edge area that meet the downlink ICIC
threshold.
Pilot Pollution
Determines whether a point has pilot pollution and

check the number of cells producing pilot pollution.
To obtain a more accurate result, you are advised to
select With Shadow.
NOTE
By analyzing the number of cells covering each spot that
reaches the pilot pollution threshold, you can learn about
pilot pollution in areas such as the poor coverage area
intuitively.
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(DL)
Coverage by
Signal Level
(UL)
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(UL)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
DL RS SINR
Signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of the

downlink reference signal that a UE receives. This
counter reflects the quality of the downlink reference
signal.
PDSCH SINR
Indicates the Signal Interference and Noise Ratio

(SINR) of the traffic channel. This counter reflects
the quality of the traffic channel.
DL RSRQ
Quality of the received downlink reference signals.
PDCCH SINR
Indicates the PDCCH SINR.
UL RSRP
Strength of the uplink reference signal on an RE.
PUSCH Signal Level
Indicates the power that a cell receives on the

PUSCH RE.
UL User RB TxPower
Uplink transmit power on a resource block (RB).
UL User BandWidth
TxPower
Indicates the uplink transmit power on the user

bandwidth.
UL ICIC Zone
Indicates the uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink

central area and edge area that meet the uplink ICIC
threshold.
UL RS SINR
SINR of the uplink reference signal.
PUSCH SINR
Indicates the SINR of the traffic channel. This

counter reflects the quality of the traffic channel.

308
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Category
Counter
Meaning
Coverage by
MCS(UL)
PUSCH MCS
The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.
Coverage by
MCS(DL)
PDSCH MCS
The highest MCS supported by the downlink

PDSCH.
Coverage by
Throughput
(UL)
UL MAC Peak
Throughput
Uplink peak throughput on the MAC layer.
UL Application Peak
Throughput
Uplink peak throughput on the application layer.
Coverage by
Throughput
(DL)
DL MAC Peak
Throughput
Downlink peak throughput on the MAC layer.
DL Application Peak
Throughput
Downlink peak throughput on the application layer.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

309
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
LTE-TDD Prediction Algorithm

channel quality. This section describes the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm through a schematic
diagram.
Figure 4-8 shows the schematic diagram of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

310
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 4-8 LTE-TDD prediction algorithm
Table 4-16 describes the process of LTE-TDD prediction algorithm.

Table 4-16 Description of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm
Step
Operation
Description

activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction
Obtaining the path

loss matrix

path loss matrix.
l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtained
directly.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



311
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step
Operation
Description

by using the
shadowing margin

a certain probability. Certain power of the base station
is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reserved
You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowing
margin into account during the calculation of link loss.
Calculating the DL
RSRP to determine the
The DL RSRP indicates the receive level at the

downlink and it is a key counter in prediction. You can
counter.

to determine the
handover area

Determining the target

RRU in the uplink
If a cell in the calculation area is an SFN cell, you must

determine the target RRU of the cell in the uplink.
of the traffic channel
and common channel
based on the BIN
Calculating counters of the traffic channel and

common channel such as DL RS SINR, PDSCH
SINR, UL RS SINR, and PUSCH SINR based on the
BIN
results


l
of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base
station + Total loss of the base station
gain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the
base station + Total loss of the base station
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

312
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the

human body

Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Path loss
Shadow fading

Penetration loss

and leaves.

station

station

Prerequisites
l
Context
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Calculation

313
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l
Force calculation
Procedure
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate

Calculate forcibly

Click

in Figure 4-9.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

314
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
directory.

Context
l
RS SINR.
Nt.
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

315
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
If ...
Then ...

not imported

Deviation.

imported

Deviation.
NOTE
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
4.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction Group

Prerequisites
l
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

316
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.

select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
4.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell

The U-Net can perform a single cell prediction in a specified area. In this case, other cells are
deactivated by default. The single cell prediction enables you to effectively observe the
prediction results of each cell in batches in the case that no interference to cells is caused.
Prerequisites
l
Procedure
Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialog
box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

317
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
select prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the number
of cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to view
details.
4.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results

Procedure
l
View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction
Statistical Results (on a Map).
View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing
Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).
----End
4.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction Result

After calculation on prediction, you can further analyze the prediction result. For example, after
improving network parameters, you can re-analyze the prediction result and compare the
prediction results before and after parameter adjustment. Based on the overall result of prediction
analysis, you can use the point-based analysis function to further analyze a focus object.
Context
The method of analyzing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as
that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction
Result.
4.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results

Bin point.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

318
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The methods of exporting and printing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode
are the same as those for networks in the LTE-FDD mode.
Procedure
l
Export prediction results in batches. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in
Batches.
Export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. For details, see Exporting the Detailed
LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point.
Print prediction results in batches. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in
Batches.
----End

The DT data can be used to rectify the coverage prediction group after its calculation is complete
in order to improve the origin authentication and simulation degree of feature database. This
helps to improve the locating precision. The rectification is not required if DT data is unavailable,
and this procedure can be ignored.
Context
The method of verifying the feature database based on DT data in LTE-TDD is similar to that
in LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on
DT Data.
4.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database Data

You can export the feature database data after the prediction calculation is complete for
geographical locating.
Context
The method of exporting the feature database in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.
4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

319
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Group Name

Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now

immediately.
Parameter in the Group Properties dialog box

Parameter
Description
Name
Name of a prediction group.
Resolution(m)
Precision of the prediction.
Intra-Frequency Handover(dB)
Handover threshold of intra-frequency cells.

Area is set.
Inter-Frequency Handover(dB)
Handover threshold of inter-frequency cells.

Area is set.
Polygon
Calculation area for the prediction.
Neighbour PDSCH Load
Whether the load on the neighboring cell is

taken into account in the calculation.
Neighbour PDCCH Load
Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboring

cell is taken into account in the calculation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
With Shadow
Whether the shadow fading is taken into

account in the calculation.
Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, the

probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the
edge of a cell.

320
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indoor Coverage
Whether the penetration loss is taken into

account.
Table 4-19 Parameters on the Condition tab page

Parameter
Description
Signal Level(DL)(dBm)
Receive threshold of the downlink reference

signal.
Signal Level(UL)(dBm)
Receive threshold of the uplink reference

signal.
Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm)
Interference threshold.
Terminal
Mobility type.
Service
Service type.
Mobility
Mobility type.
Table 4-20 Parameters on the Advanced tab page

Parameter
Description
Frequency Name
Name of a frequency band.
Channel Index
Frequency corresponding to a frequency

band.
4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation

Context
The method of capacity simulation for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that for
networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.
4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters

This section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of the
LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

321
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.10.1 LTE PCI Planning

The physical cell IDs (PCIs) of an LTE network is limited. Therefore, reuse of PCIs is
unavoidable in LTE networking. To reduce the downlink interference of intra-frequency and
co-PCI cells, you must assign a proper PCI to each cell. On the U-Net, you can enable the system
to automatically plan PCIs or you can manually plan a PCI for each cell. After the PCI planning
is complete, you can check whether the PCI planning results are proper.
Context
For PCI planning, see 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning.
4.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning

To ensure successful random access of the LTE-TDD network, you must plan the physical
random access channel (PRACH) parameters for each cell in the LTE-TDD network. PRACH
planning refers to the Zadoff-Chu Sequence (ZC) planning.
Context
The method of planning PRACH parameters for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same
as that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning.
4.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell Planning

After creating base stations, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the LTE network.
Context
The method for planning neighboring cells in LTE-TDD network is the same as that in LTEFDD network. For details, see 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning.
4.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning

After base stations are created, you must assign EARFCNs to cells on the network. The U-Net
provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink edge six
frequency band, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. When the frequency band is determined, you
can enable the U-Net to plan EARFCNs automatically or you can manually plan EARFCNs for
each cell.
Context
For frequency planning, see 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.
4.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic Planning

This section describes how to perform LTE cell automatic planning. You can use this function
to adjust the electrical downtilt and azimuth of an antenna and transmission power of a cell so
that each prediction counter in the calculation area meets your configuration requirements. This
reduces the dependence on network planning engineers' experience and the times of adjusting
parameter settings.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

322
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
For details about the LTE cell automatic planning, see 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE
Cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

323
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
GSM Network Planning
About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual network
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell
parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet your
network planning requirements.
5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning
This section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section when
planning a GSM network by using the U-Net.
5.5 Adding a Device
5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

324
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You
must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.
5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters
separately.
5.8 GSM Prediction
channel quality.
5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning
After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You
can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each
cell one by one.
5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the UNet.
5.11 TSC Planning
This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created,
you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based,
and VAMOS-based TSC planning.
5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

325
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.1 Process of GSM Network Planning

This section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section when
planning a GSM network by using the U-Net.
Figure 5-1 shows the process of GSM network planning.
Figure 5-1 Process of GSM network planning
Table 5-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 5-1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

326
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 5-1 Process of GSM network planning

No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data

grid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also
add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The
Managing
propagation models
and bands

Adding a device

or site equipment.The method for creating site equipment
for different network systems on the U-Net is the
same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Setting traffic
parameters

5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters.
Setting NE
parameters

Setting GSM NE Parameters.

loss
Planning
neighboring cells
For details, see 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning .
Predicting network
performance
For details, see 5.8 GSM Prediction.
10
Planning TSC
For details, see 5.11 TSC Planning.
11
Exporting network
planning results

Planning.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

327
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
network.
Procedure

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l

file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

328
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE

NOTE

Context

Context
Setting Bands.
5.5 Adding a Device

Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

329
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters

environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. You
must ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.
5.6.1 Setting MOS

This section describes how to set the Mean Opinion Score (MOS). The MOS indicates the quality
of calls in the current network status. You can refer to this section to modify the attributes of
MOS as required. You can also create new MOS types if the existing MOS types do not meet
your requirements.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM.
Step 3 Right-click and then choose MOS from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-3. The MOS
Table dialog box is displayed
Figure 5-3 MOS
Step 4 Set related parameters to create or modify MOS types by referring to Table 5-2.
You can set the new MOS type in the blank line (marked with *) of the dialog box.
Table 5-2 Description of parameters in the MOS Table dialog box
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Meaning
Index
Indicates the MOS index.

330
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of the speech coding scheme.
Mobility
Indicates the mobility type of a receiving device.
C/(I+N)-MOS
Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the MOS.
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
5.6.2 Setting GSM Service Types

Context
The U-Net provides three default GSM service types: GSMVoice, GSMMobile Internet
Access, and GSMMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure
Option
Description
If...
Then...
1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >

Services > GSM.
3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to
Table 5-3.
Modify an existing service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >
Services > GSM > An existing service type.
3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by
referring to Table 5-3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

331
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 5-4 New
Table 5-3 Parameters for setting GSM services

Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of a service type.
Type

l CSServie: CS services.
l PSServie: PS services.
Priority
Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. The

weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority.
The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.
Body Loss(dB)
Indicates the loss due to the human body.
Activity
Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is

required for only CS services.
to 1.
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Indicates the rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s.

The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
FER(%)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.

332
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Max Throughput
(kbit/s)
Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput.

104.
from 0 to 104.
NOTE
Minimum throughput Average throughput Maximum throughput
Min Throughput
(kbit/s)
Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput.

104.
from 0 to 104.
NOTE
Average Throughput
(kbit/s)
Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput.

NOTE
Transmission
Efficiency
Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate.

to 1.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to
100.
Offset(kbit/s)
Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length

added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC
or RLC layer.
100.
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

333
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > GSM.
If you need to...
Then...
Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked

with *) in the dialog box. Set Link Type.

type.
Go to Step 5 directly.
Step 5 Double-click the first column of the receiver and set property parameters in the displayed dialog
box. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 5-4.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 5-4 Parameters for setting GSM receivers
Parameter
Meaning
Name
LinkType
Indicates whether a receiver is on the uplink or downlink.
Mobility

For details about how to create or modify a mobility type,
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER).
Demodulation
l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services if

this parameter is located in the PSService area. You
can double-click the related cell to set this parameter.
l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services if
this parameter is located in the CSService area. You
FER(%)
Indicates the frame error rate.
Voice Code Model
Indicates a voice coding scheme.
C/(I+N) Threshold
Indicates the threshold of the SINR for CS or PS services.
C/(I+N)-Throughput
Indicates the SINR throughput of CS or PS services.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

334
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal Types

Procedure
If you need to...
Then...
type
GSM.
Modify an
existing terminal
GSM > An existing terminal type.
type
3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table
5-5.
Table 5-5 Parameters for setting GSM terminal types

Parameter
Meaning
Name
Support Frequency Band
Indicates the main frequency used by a terminal.
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Max Tx Power(dBm)
Noise Figure(dB)
Cable Loss(dB)
Attenuation(dB)
Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.
Gain(dBi)
Reception Equipment

For details, see 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.
Number of Transmission Antennas
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for

a terminal.

335
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Number of Reception Antennas
Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a

terminal.
Code Configuration
Indicates a voice coding scheme.
Technology
Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.
Number of TimeSlots(DL)
Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supported

on the downlink.
This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSM
because a GSM user occupies only one channel.
Number of Timeslots(UL)
Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supported

on the uplink.
This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSM
because a GSM user occupies only one channel.
Support Half-Rate
Indicates whether the half rate is supported.
Support DTX
Indicates whether DTX is supported.
----End

Context
5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters

separately.

the same way.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

336
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context

Context
5.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS Template

Procedure
l

1.
dropOn the toolbar, select Template Management from the

down list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

337
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
drop-down list.
Such as

1.

2.
Set properties of the BTS template. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.

1.
2.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
station template.
5.7.4 Creating a Base Station Automatically

Context
5.7.5 Creating a Repeater

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

338
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context

Context
5.7.7 Setting GSM Cell Parameters

Procedure
Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-6.
Step 4 Set the properties of GSM cells on the GSMTRX tab page. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

339
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
5.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE Parameters

This section describes the parameters for setting GSM NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates

Site Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Name
Support Type

micro base station.

Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Transceiver Area on the GSM Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Comments
Description.
Model
Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.
Site Equipment
Indicates the azimuth of the first antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Indicates the mechanical downtilt.
Electrical Downtilt
Indicates the electrical downtilt.
Height/Ground(m)
Total Loss(DL)

340
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Total Loss(UL)
General Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power.
IoT Target(UL)
Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on the

uplink.
DTX
Indicates whether the discontinuous transmission (DTX) is

used.
TRX Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is

from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is

from 0 to 1.
Frequency Band
Reception
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model

Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells

This section describes the parameters for creating a GSM cell or modifying the properties of a
GSM cell.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

341
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 5-6 GSMCell tab page

Parameter
Description
Name
Active
Indicates whether to activate the current cell.
Frequency Band
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value

Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value

DTX
Indicates whether the discontinuous transmission

(DTX) is used.
IoT Target(UL)
Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on

the uplink.
Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of a

transceiver.
When the value of Max Power(dBm), Frequency
Band, or PB(dB) is changed, the system
automatically calculates the value of RS Power
(dBm).
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
MS Max Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum transmit power of an MS. The

unit is dBm.
Reception
SynchroRank
Indicates the synchronization parameter.
TRX Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.
Coverage Type
Indicates the cell coverage type used during capacity

planning.
Co-BCCH Signal Difference
Indicates the signal strength difference between

GSM900 and GSM1800.
Mapping Cell
Indicates the indoor mapping cell.
Use In Capability
Indicates whether the cell is used for capacity

absorption.
Scene
MCC
MNC
LAC
Indicates a location area code.
CI

342
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CGI
Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).
RAC
Indicates the route area code.
BSC ID
Indicates the ID of the BSC that a cell belongs to.
BTS ID
Indicates the ID of the BTS that a cell belongs to.
Local Cell ID
Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating

the cell from other cells under the same BSC.
BSC Name
Indicates the name of a base station controller.
Module Type
Indicates the type of a module.
Module Info
Indicates the module information.
TRX Number
Indicates the number of TRXs.
Max TRX Number
Indicates the number of TRXs that can be configured

in a cell.
Swap Status
Indicates the swapping status.
Hopping Mode
Indicates the hopping mode of a cell. This parameter

can be set to one of the following values:
l NO_FH
l BaseBand_FH
l Hybrid_FH
l RF_FH
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Frame Offset
Indicates the frame offset.
BSIC
Indicates the base transceiver station identity code.
BCCH
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel

number (ARFCN) of the BCCH TRX in a cell.
TCH
Indicates the collection of ARFCNs of the TCH

TRXs in a cell.
MAIO
Indicates the collection of mobile allocation index

offsets (MAIOs) of TRXs in a cell.
AFPFreqNum
Indicates the number of GSM TRXs generated by one

row of data when users import the engineering
parameters.
HSN
Indicates the hopping sequence number (HSN) of a

cell. The value range is from 0 to 63.
MA
Indicates a set of frequency hopping ARFCNs.
MAIO Plan
Indicates the MAIO planning information.
TSC
Indicates the training sequence code.

343
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
VAMOS Main TSC
Indicates the primary training sequence code for

VAMOS.
VAMOS Sub TSC
Indicates the secondary training sequence code for

VAMOS.
Comments
Description.
Propagation Models

Parameter
Description
Name

transceiver.
Site

Hexagon Radius(m)

by default.

of Antennas area

Antennas area

Comments

Parameter
Description
Antenna ID

Power Ratio
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

344
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Sector ID
Dx(m)

Dy(m)

Longitude
Latitude
Main Antenna

Azimuth

is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID

Equipment

Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss

the total loss.
loss.
Site Equipment
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

345
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
TMA

Feeder
to
Feeder Length(m)


JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Total Loss(dB)

5.8 GSM Prediction

channel quality.
5.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction

Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction Counters

This section describes the meanings of the GSM prediction counters. The U-Net can be used to
predict multiple GSM counters.
NOTE
menu.
Table 5-10 lists the GSM prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

346
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 5-10 Description of GSM prediction counters

Category
Counter
Description
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
DL BCCH Signal
Level
Indicates the strength of the downlink BCCH signals

received by a terminal.
Best Server
Indicates the cell that has the strongest DL BCCH

signal strength among the cells that receive downlink
signals.
DL TCH Signal Level
Indicates the strength of the downlink traffic signals

received by a terminal.
DL BCCH CIR
Indicates the quality of received downlink BCCH

signals.
DL Service CIR
Indicates the receive quality of the downlink TCH/

PDCH.
Geometry
Indicates a geographical factor, which represents the

difference between the highest receive power and the
interference power.
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(UL)
UL Service CIR
Indicates the receive quality of the uplink TCH/

PDCH.
Coverage
Area
Analysis
Coding Scheme
Indicates the best coding scheme that you can select

according to channels.
MOS
Indicates the mean opinion score (MOS), which is

used for assessing voice quality.
Handover Area
Indicates whether an area is a handover area.
Coverage Area
Indicates the coverage area of the current network.
Coverage by
Throughput
(DL)
DL PDCH MAC Peak

Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink

PDCH at the MAClayer.
DL PDCH
Application Peak
Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink

PDCH at the application layer.
Coverage by
Throughput
(UL)
UL PDCH MAC Peak

Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH

at the MAC layer.
UL PDCH
Application Peak
Throughput
Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCH

at the application layer.
Coverage by
C/(I+N)
Level(DL)
Procedure for Performing Coverage Prediction

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

347
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
GSM Prediction Algorithm

channel quality. This section describes the GSM prediction algorithm through a schematic chart.
Figure 5-8 shows the schematic chart of the GSM prediction algorithm.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

348
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 5-8 GSM prediction algorithm
Table 5-11 describes the process of GSM prediction algorithm.

Table 5-11 Description of the GSM prediction algorithm
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Determines whether the cells in the calculation area

are activated. If a cell is not activated, the prediction

349
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Obtaining the path

loss matrix
l If the path loss matrix does not exist, it needs to be

calculated.
l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be
directly obtained.



by using the shadow
fading margin

a certain probability, certain power of the base station
is reserved against the shadow fading. The reserved
You can enable the U-Net to consider the shadowing
margin during the calculation of link loss.
Calculating the DL
BCCH to determine
the primary serving
cell
DL BCCH indicates the receive level of the downlink

broadcast frequency and it is a key counter in
prediction. You can determine the primary serving cell
based on this counter.

to determine the
handover area

of traffic channels and
common channels
based on the Bin
points
You can calculate the required counters and custom

counters such as DL BCCH Rx Power, Best Server,
power of interference noises, and handover area of Bin
points.
results

colors in a window and provides a prediction report.

l
of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station
gain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

350
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the

human body

Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Antenna fading of a
terminal
Fading of the antenna on a terminal.
Path loss
Shadow fading

Penetration loss

and leaves.

station

station

Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

351
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
Calculation
Force calculation
Procedure
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate

Calculate forcibly

Click

in Figure 5-9.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

352
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
directory.

Context
l
RS SINR.
Nt.
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

353
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
If ...
Then ...

not imported

Deviation.

imported

Deviation.
NOTE
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
5.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction Group

Prerequisites
l
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

354
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.

Figure 5-10 New
select prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction
Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.For parameter description, see
5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
5.8.5 Viewing the Prediction Result

Procedure
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
355
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
3.

1.
2.
1.
2.
3.

NOTE
on the map window.
4.
5.
----End
Example
1.
2.
3.
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

356
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Follow-up Procedure
l
menu.
menu.
5.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning Results

Bin point.
Exporting Prediction Results in Batches

Context
The method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systems
from the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.
Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result by Bin Point

Procedure
l
in this area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.

If...
Then...
Export the detailed

prediction group

357
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
Export the detailed

single counter in a
prediction group

> counter item.
3.
4.
5.
Click Export.
Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to
You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a
Bin point within the range.
1.
2.

If...
Then...
Export the detailed

prediction group
Export the detailed

single counter in a
prediction group

> DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal
Level.
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level from
the shortcut menu.
When you perform prediction calculation, select at least one of the preceding two
indicators. Otherwise, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.
The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified
range.
5.
l
Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable
only to single-mode networks.
1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click Export.

358
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.The dialog box
as shown in Figure 5-11 is displayed.
4.
Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N
records to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
6.
After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.
NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include DL BCCH Signal
Level when you create a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-12.
l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of
TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-13. This value
specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
Figure 5-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box
Figure 5-12 Indicator selection
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

359
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 5-13 Property setting
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.
The exported contents mainly include:
l

are exported.
Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.
Printing Prediction Results in Batches

batches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

360
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the UNet is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.

Prerequisites
l
The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or
created.
The coverage prediction for DL BCCH Signal Level is complete.
The DT data file has been imported.
Context
The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.

Context
For detailed operations of exporting the feature database in GSM, see Export the top N records
of the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result
by Bin Point.
5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning

After creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. You
can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for each
cell one by one.
5.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

361
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l

l

l

NOTE
cells.
5.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations

Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
cells.
362
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

relationships.
by cell name.

technology.
Context
Procedure
NOTE

Step 6 Click OK.
----End
5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells

Prerequisites
l
cells.
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

363
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see 5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing
----End
Follow-up Procedure
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
3.
4.
relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3 Parameters
for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.
5.
Click OK.
5.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning

Prerequisites
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

364
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE

If you need to...
Then...

relationships
in Figure 5-15.
simultaneously.
shortcut menu..
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.
NOTE


NOTE

relationships
see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.
Apply the result of

to each cell
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
the shortcut menu..

365
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...

shortcut menu..
mode.
3. Click Export.
NOTE

relationships


relationships

NOTE

relationship data

displayed.
5. Click OK.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

366
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Clear the result of


NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

367
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 5-16 Filter
----End
5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the UNet.
5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups


Parameter
Description
Group Name

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.

368
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Calculate Now

immediately.
Parameters in the GSM Group Properties Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Name
Resolution(m)
Indicates the prediction precision.
Polygon
Indicates the area calculated in prediction.
Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that

is, the probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a
cell.
With Shadow
Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the

calculation.
Indoor Coverage
Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in

the calculation.

Parameter
Description
Signal Level(dBm)
Indicates the receive threshold of the downlink

reference signal.
Terminal
Service
Mobility
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
TopNSignalLevel
Indicates the number of top receive levels to be

ranked.

369
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
TrxDTXFactor
Indicates the DTX factor.
5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells

This section describes the parameters for planning GSM neighboring cells.
Parameter
Description
Methods Select
Indicates a network planning scenario to be selected.

l Topology: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of network
topology.
l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of prediction
results. This method applies only to outdoor base stations.
l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis
of both the network topology and the prediction results.
Max Neighbor Distance

(km)
Planning Neighbor based

on existed Neighbors

relationships.
If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, the
two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.

relationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Force Co-Site As
Neighbor
Indicates that internal cells are forcibly configured as

bidirectional neighboring cells.
Co-Site Distance(m)
Configures the two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when

the distance between the two cells is smaller than the value of this
parameter.
Swapped out cells taken

into planning
Indicates whether swapped-out cells need to be planned.
Reference Existed
Neighbors
Indicates whether existing neighboring cells need to be referred.
Azimuth Difference()
Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be planned

and the cells used for reference.
Reference Site Distance

(m)
Indicates the distance difference between the site of the cells to

be planned and the site of the cells used for reference.
Consider Handover
Statistics
Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path for
saving the handover data.

370
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Planning Weight
Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring cell

ranking.
Handover Statistics
Weight
Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring cell

ranking.
Resolution(m)

This parameter is valid only when the network planning scenario
is set to Prediction or Topology + Prediction.
Handover Area Percent

(%)
Compute Shadowing
Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation.


Cell Edge Coverage
Probability(%)
Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameter

is valid only when shadow fading is considered. The value of this
parameter is directly proportional to the value of shadowing
fading.
Compute Indoor Loss
Indicates whether the penetration loss is considered in the

calculation.


Area

l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select
only the cells to be planned in the area.
l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be
found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

371
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 5-17 Parameters on the Intra-Technology tab page

Parameter
Description

Indoor Cell

neighboring cells.
This parameter is valid only when neighboring cells are
planned on the basis of network topology.

Outdoor Cell

neighboring cells.
Force Symmetry

neighboring cells.
bidirectional neighboring cells, adjusting the original
neighbor relationship table.
Table 5-18 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring
cell planning)
Parameter
Description
SourceNetType
Indicates the system that the source cell belongs to.
To
Indicates the system that the cells to be planned belong to.

NOTE
If the target system for handovers is UMTS, you can set the UTRA
absolute radio frequency channel number (UARFCN) for the
handovers.
Max Number
5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring

Cells
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Display Links
Display Cell Color

372
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description

relationship table.
Selected Cell Color
Inter-RAT Neighbors

Legend
Description
Intra Frequency

Inter Frequency

Inter-RAT

Intra Technology



Paired Inter-RAT


Add To Legend
Transparency
NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

373
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based
on Neighboring Relations
neighboring cells
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Intra-Technology
Inter-RAT
Empty List
Missing Co-Site
Missing Symmetry
List > No:

Neighbors

Same PCI
None
Interface

not.
5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results

complete.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

374
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
actual tab page.
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Cause

network.
by users.
Confirm

the serving cell.
5.11 TSC Planning

This section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created,
you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based,
and VAMOS-based TSC planning.
The VAMOS feature increases the GSM network capacity when the network cannot be expanded
due to restricted frequency. The IBCA feature improves voice quality and network performance
without new hardware.
In the VAMOS-based TSC planning, orthogonal TSCs are used to multiplex two subscribers to
the same timeslot to increase voice capacity, but the voice quality decreases accordingly. The
orthogonal TSCs need to be configured in pair to avoid intra-frequency interference when two
VAMOS subscribers are using the same timeslot of the same frequency.
In the IBCA-based TSC planning, the IBCA algorithm is used to search interference calls and
allocate the channels with the minimum interference to subscribers. In this way, network
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

375
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
performance can be improved. The IBCA feature improves channel quality by reducing the
interference traffic. Therefore, TSCs need to be configured to ensure the minimum of
interference traffic of the same TSC station. Manual configuration of TSCs is complicated. In
this case, the U-Net is required.
5.11.1 Planning TSC

This section describes how to perform TSC planning for the allocation of TSCs in cells and at
sites in GSM networks. The planning result can be used for the VAMOS and IBCA features.
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Procedure
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu, as shown
in Figure 5-17.
Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.1 Parameters for
TSC Planning.
Step 5 Click Run.
l You can right-click TSC Planning on the Operation tab page and choose Stop from the
shortcut menu to stop the planning of TSCs.
l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For
details, see 5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

376
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
Set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes.
1.
2.
On the displayed Operation tab page, click TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click TSC Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.
4.
In the displayed TSC Display Options dialog box, set the color of cells displayed in
the map window for different TSC planning modes. For details, see 5.12.5 Parameters
for Setting the TSC Display Effect.
5.
Click OK.
5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result

This section describes how to manage the TSC planning result. After the TSC planning is
complete, you can apply and export the planning result.
Prerequisites
The TSC planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select TSC Planning in the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click TSC Planning and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure
5-18.
Figure 5-18 Open TSC Table
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

377
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Apply the TSC planning result to each cell
1. Right-click in the TSC Planning

Display window and choose Commit
from the shortcut menu.
2. NE data is updated automatically after the
TSC planning result is applied.
NOTE
l In the TSC Planning Display window, if you
modify the values in the Confirm
VamosMainTSC column, the values in the
Confirm VamosSubTSC and Confirm TSC
Group columns change accordingly.
l In the main window of the U-Net, a message
indicating whether the data is submitted
successfully is displayed in the Event
Viewer docked window in the lower part.
Alternatively, you can access the GSM Cell
Table tab page and check whether data is
changed. If data on the GSM Cell Table tab
page is changed, the data has been submitted
successfully.
Export the TSC planning result
1. Right-click in the TSC Planning

Display window and choose Export from
the shortcut menu.
2. Set parameters in the displayed Data
Export dialog box. For details, see
Parameters in the Data Export Dialog
Box.
3. Click Export.
4. Set the file format and file name and
specify the saving path. Then, click
Save.
After the data is exported successfully, you
can open it to view and modify the data.
Enable the map window and the planning

result table to display the TSC planning result
simultaneously
1. In the TSC Planning Display window,

click a row heading. Alternatively, click a
certain cell in the map window.
2. Information about the selected cell is
displayed in the map window and the
planning result table in the right pane of
the TSC Planning Display window
simultaneously, as shown in Figure
5-19.
NOTE
You need to select TSC Planning in the
navigation tree so that the selected cell can be
displayed in the map window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

378
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Enable the U-Net to display or hide certain

columns
1. In the right pane of the TSC Planning

Display window, right-click a certain
table heading and choose Display
Columns from the shortcut menu.
2. In the displayed Columns to be
displayed dialog box, select or clear the
check boxes of columns to be displayed or
hidden.
NOTE
You can right-click a certain table heading in the
TSC Planning Display window and choose Hide
Columns from the shortcut menu to hide the
selected column.
Figure 5-19 Display
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

379
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
5.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning

This section describes how to perform IBCA interference neighboring cell planning. The IBCA
feature improves voice quality and network performance in GSM networks. The configuration
data of interference neighboring cells is required for the IBCA feature, which can be obtained
after the interference neighboring cell planning is complete.
Prerequisites
l
Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and
cells.
The parameters MA and MAIO Plan have been configured for the cells.
Procedure
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation
tree.
Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut
IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.
Step 5 Click Run.
l You can right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor on the Operation tab page and choose
Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells.
l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For
details, see 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring
Cell Planning.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

380
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell

Planning
This section describes how to manage the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning.
After the planning is complete, you can export the planning result.
Prerequisites
The planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells is complete.
Procedure
Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select IBCA Interference Neighbor in the navigation
tree.
NOTE
You need to select IBCA Interference Neighbor so that the IBCA interference neighboring cell
relationships can be displayed in the map window.
Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The
IBCA Interference Neighbor window is displayed.
If...
Then...
You want to export the result of IBCA

interference neighboring cell planning
1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor

window, right-click in the left pane and
choose Export from the shortcut menu, as
2. Set parameters in the displayed Data
Export dialog box. For details, see
Parameters in the Data Export Dialog
Box.
3. Click Export.
4. Set the file format and file name and
specify the saving path. Then, click
Save.
After the data is exported to a file, you can
open it to view and modify the data.
You want to enable the map window to

display the result of IBCA interference
neighboring cell planning together with that
in the planning result table
1. In the IBCA Interference Neighbor

window, click a cell in the left pane.
Alternatively, click a certain cell in the
map window.
2. In the right pane of the IBCA
Interference Neighbor window, the
interference neighboring cells of the
selected cell is displayed in the map
window and the planning result table at
the same time, as shown in Figure 5-22.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

381
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 5-21 Export
Figure 5-22 IBCA Interference Neighbor
----End
5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning

5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning
This section describes the parameters used for TSC planning in GSM networks. You can refer
to this section when setting planning parameters in the TSC Parameter Setting dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

382
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Planning on
Network planning scenario

l Common asynchronous network: TSC
planning is performed on a common
asynchronous network.
l IBCA network: TSC planning is
performed on an IBCA network.
l VAMOS asynchronous network: TSC
planning is performed on a VAMOS
asynchronous network.
l VAMOS synchronization network:
TSC planning is performed on a VAMOS
synchronization network.
Planning based on
l Site: TSC planning is performed based on

sites.
l Cell: TSC planning is performed based on
cells.
Planning TSC based on existed TSC
If this item is selected, TSC planning is

performed based on existing TSCs.
Data
l Interference Matrix Path: directory of

the interference matrix file to be imported.
NOTE
Set parameters in the Data Import dialog box.
For details, see Parameters in the Data
Import Dialog Box.
l The count of interference: maximum

number of interference neighboring cells.
Area
Planning area
You can select all the cells in an area or click
Filter and select only the cells to be planned
in the area.
If you select Full Map, all the cells on the
map are to be planned.
You can set filter criteria such as Direction
and Match case in the Filter dialog box.
5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result

This section describes the parameters for viewing the TSC planning result. You can refer to this
section when viewing the TSC planning result in the TSC Planning Display area after the TSC
planning is complete.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

383
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Site Name
Name of a site.
Site ID
ID of a site.
Cell Name
Name of a cell.
CI
ID of a cell.
Existed TSC
Existing TSC.
Existed VamosMainTSC
Existing VAMOS main TSC.
Existed VamosSubTSC
Existing VAMOS sub-TSC.
Existed TSC Group
Existing VAMOS TSC group.
Suggest TSC
Suggested TSC, that is, the TSC planning

result.
Suggest indicates that the obtained data after
the TSC planning has not been applied to
NEs.
Suggest VamosMainTSC
Obtained VAMOS main TSC after the

planning.
Suggest VamosSubTSC
Obtained VAMOS sub-TSC after the

planning.
Suggest TSC Group
Obtained VAMOS TSC group after the

planning.
Confirm TSC
Confirmed TSC.
By default, the value of Confirm TSC is the
same as that of Suggest TSC. You can change
the value manually.
You submit the value of Confirm TSC as the
TSC planning result.
Confirm VamosMainTSC
Confirmed VAMOS main TSC.
Confirm VamosSubTSC
Confirmed VAMOS sub-TSC.
Confirm TSC Group
Confirmed VAMOS TSC group.
5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning

The section describes the parameters used for IBCA interference neighboring cell planning in
GSM networks. You can refer to this section when setting planning parameters in the IBCA
Interference Neighbor dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

384
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Data
l Interference Matrix Path: directory of

the interference matrix file to be imported.
NOTE
Set planning parameters in the Data Import
dialog box. For details, see Parameters in the
Data Import Dialog Box.
l The count of interference: maximum

number of interference neighboring cells.
Interference sort strategy
Mode for ranking interference neighboring

cells.
l Interferenced traffic to others: ranking
interference neighboring cells by
interference traffic of other cells caused
by an interference neighboring cell.
l Interferenced traffic by others: ranking
interference neighboring cells by
interference traffic of an interference
neighboring cell caused by other cells.
l Total Interference: Interference
neighboring cells are ranked based on the
sum of the interference traffic of other
cells caused by an interference
neighboring cell and the interference
traffic of an interference neighboring cell
caused by other cells.
Area
Planning area.
You can select all the cells in an area or click
Filter and select only the cells to be planned
in the area.
If you select Full Map, all the cells on the
map are to be planned.
You can set filter criteria such as Direction
and Match case in the Filter dialog box.
5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference

Neighboring Cell Planning
This section describes the parameters in the IBCA Interference Neighbor window. You can
refer to this section when viewing the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Name of an interference neighboring cell.

385
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
CI
ID of a cell.
Co Traffic
Co-frequency interference traffic.
Adj Traffic
Adjacent frequency interference traffic.
Interference Relation
Interference relationship.
This parameter is used to determine cofrequency and adjacent frequency
interference, co-frequency interference, and
adjacent frequency interference based on
interference probability.
5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect

This section describes the parameters used for setting the TSC display effect in the TSC Display
Options dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
TSC
Indicates the rendering effect for common

TSCs.
Vamos TSC
Indicates the rendering effect for the VAMOS

TSCs.
Selected Cell Color
Indicates the color of the source cell.
Co-TSCCell Color
Indicates the color of cells with the same TSC

value as that of the source cell in the TSC
planning.
Co-TSCPair Cell
Indicates the color of cells with the value of

VamosMainTSC being the same as that of
VamosMainTSC in the source cell in the
VAMOS-based TSC planning.
Related-TSC Cell
Indicates the color of cells with the value of

VamosMainTSC being the same as that of
VamosSubTSC in the source cell in the
VAMOS-based TSC planning.

386
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
UMTS Network Planning
About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual network
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells and
scrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to
meet you network planning requirements.
6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning
This section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net.
6.5 Adding a Device
6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters
Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map.
6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

387
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
separately.
6.8 UMTS Prediction
channel quality.
6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells
After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network.
6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning
This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for
differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code
planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and
vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios
such as scrambling code check and network deployment.
6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis
This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement
report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze
the live network.
6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis
Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the
UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.
6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the
U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

388
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
6.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning

This section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net.
Figure 6-1 shows the process of UMTS network planning.
Figure 6-1 Process of UMTS network planning

Table 6-1 Description of the UMTS network planning process
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project

389
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
No.
Procedure
Description
Importing
geographic data

Managing
propagation models
and bands

Adding a device

Setting traffic
parameters

6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters.
Setting NE
parameters

Setting UMTS NE Parameters.

loss
Planning
scrambling codes/
Planning
neighboring cells
For details, see 6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code

Planning and 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells.
Analyzing Network
Capacity
Expansion/
Analyzing
Measurement
Reports
For details, see 6.12 UMTS Network Capacity

Expansion Analysis and 6.11 UMTS Measurement
Reports Analysis.
10
Predicting network
performance
For details, see 6.8 UMTS Prediction.
11
Exporting network
planning results

Planning.

390
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Context
l
network.
Procedure

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l

file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

391
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE

NOTE

Context

Context
Setting Bands.
6.5 Adding a Device

Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

392
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters

Traffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,
Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map.
6.6.1 Setting MIMO Types

You can modify the parameters of existing MIMO types. If the existing MIMO types do not
meet the requirements, you can create MIMO types.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.
Step 3 Right-click Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS and choose MIMO from the shortcut
menu, as shown in Figure 6-3. The MIMO Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Figure 6-3 MIMO
Step 4 Modify the parameters of an existing MIMO type. Alternatively, click a blank line marked with
an asterisk (*) in the dialog box to set parameters for the new MIMO type.
For detailed description of parameters of MIMO types, see Table 6-2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

393
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 6-2 Parameters for setting MIMO types

Parameter
Meaning
Name
Indicates the name of the MIMO.
TX_ANTENNAS
Indicates the number of transmit antennas.
RX_ANTENNAS
Indicates the number of receive antennas.
SM_SUPPORTED
Indicates whether space division multiplexing is

supported.
SM_GAIN(dB)
Indicates the MIMO gain.

The SM_GAIN(dB) takes effect only after the
SM_SUPPORTED is selected.
Step 5 Click
to close MIMO Configuration.
----End
6.6.2 Setting UMTS Service Types

Context
The U-Net provides six default UMTS service types: UMTSVideo Conferencing,
UMTSVoice, UMTSHSDPA, UMTSHSUPA, UMTSMobile Internet Access, and
UMTSMultimedia Messaging Service.
Procedure
If you need to...
Then...

Services > UMTS.
6-3.
Modify an existing service

type

Services > UMTS > An existing service type.
3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by referring
to Table 6-3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

394
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-4 New
Table 6-3 Parameters for setting UMTS services

Parameter
Meaning
Name
Body Loss
Indicates the loss due to the human body.
Priority
Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services.

The weighting factor is assigned depending on the service
priority.
The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.
Type

l CSServie: CS services.
l PSServie: PS services.
Is VOIP
Indicates whether the voice over IP (VoIP) is used.

This parameter is available only for the PS services.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
R99 Bearer
Indicates the R99 bearer table assigned to a service type.
Soft Handoff Allowed
Indicates whether a soft handoff is supported.
HSDPA
Indicates whether the HSDPA service is supported.
HSUPA
Indicates whether the HSUPA service is supported.

395
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Activity
Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter

is required for only voice services.
l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to
1.
l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.
FER(%)
This parameter is available only for the CS services.

Max Throughput(kbit/s)

l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges
from 0 to 107.
l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value
NOTE
Min Throughput(kbit/s)

l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from
0 to 107.
l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value
NOTE
Average Throughput(kbit/
s)

NOTE
Transmission Efficiency

l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0
to 1.
l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0
to 100.
Offset(kbit/s)
Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the

length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission
at the MAC or RLC layer.
l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to
107.
l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from
0 to 107.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

396
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Click OK.

----End
6.6.3 Setting UMTS Receivers

Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.
If you need to...
Then...
Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (marked

with *) in the dialog box. Select Bearer Selection Table.

type.
Go to Step 5.
Step 5 Double-click the heading of the receiver and set properties in the displayed dialog box. For
detailed description of parameters, see Table 6-4.
Step 6 Click OK.
Table 6-4 Parameters for setting UMTS receivers
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Bearer Selection Table
Indicates the bearer table.
Mobility

For detailed description of parameters, see 3.6.7 Setting
Mobility Types.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
MIMO
IBLER(%)
Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges

from 0 to 100.
Retransmission Gain(dB)
Indicates the retransmission gain.

397
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Demodulation
l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services if

this parameter is located in the PSService area. You can
double-click the related cell to set this parameter.
l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services if
this parameter is located in the CSService area. You
Bearer Index
Indicates the index of the HSDPA or HSUPA bearer table.
Ec/Nt(dB)
Indicates the demodulation threshold.
----End
6.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal Types

Procedure
If you need to...
Then...
UMTS.
type
Modify an
1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS > Existing
existing terminal
Terminal from the navigation tree.
type
3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table
6-5.
Table 6-5 Parameters for setting UMTS terminal types
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Min Tx Power(dBm)
Max Tx Power(dBm)

398
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Gain(dBi)
Cable Loss(dB)
Compressed Mode
Indicates whether to use the compressed mode.
Noise Figure(dB)
Attenuation(dB)
Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.
Active Set Size
Indicates the threshold for the number of cells in an active

set. The value ranges from 1 to 6.
Rake Factor(DL)
Indicates the efficiency factor of the Rake receiver on the

downlink. The value ranges from -32768 to 32768.
Reception Equipment

For details, see 3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.
Frequency Band
Indicates the frequency band.
Technology
Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.
HSDPA UE Category
Indicates the UE category supported by the HSDPA. The

value range is relevant to the value range of HSDPA UE
Category.
HSUPA UE Category
Indicates the UE category supported by the HSUPA. The

value range is relevant to the value range of HSUPA UE
Category.
Space Multiplexing Supported

(DL)
Indicates whether the space division multiplexing is

supported on the downlink.
Space Multiplexing Supported

(UL)
Indicates whether the space division multiplexing is

supported on the uplink.
Number of Reception Antennas
Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a

terminal.
Number of Transmission
Antennas
Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for a

terminal.
----End

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

399
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
6.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer Table

The U-Net needs to access the HSUPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the
prediction, you must set the HSUPA bearer table.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA Bearer Table
window is displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 Description of the parameters in the HSUPA bearer table
Parameter
Description
Radio Bearer Index
Indicates the index of the HSUPA bearer table. Its value is greater
than 0.
TTI Duration (ms)
Indicates the duration of TTI scheduling. Its value is either 10 ms or

2 ms.
Number of EDPDCH codes
Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The value ranges from
1 to 32767.
Min Spreading
Factor
Indicates the minimum spreading factor. The value ranges from 2 to

32767.
Number of CEs Used
Indicates the total CEs of the bearer service.
Transport Block Size

(bits)
Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer.
RLC Peak Rate (bps)
Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer.
Highest modulation
Indicates a modulation mode.
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer Table

The U-Net needs to access the HSDPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the
prediction, you must set the HSDPA bearer table.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

400
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA Bearer Table
Table 6-7 Description of the parameters in the HSDPA bearer table
Parameter
Description
Index
Indicates the index.
CQI
Indicates the channel quality indicator.
Transport Block Size

(bits)
Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer. The unit
is bit. The default value is 0.
Number of Used HSPDSCH Channels
Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The default value is 1.
RLC Peak Rate (bps)
Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer. The unit is bit/s. The default
value is 0.
Highest Modulation
Indicates a modulation mode. Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, and

64QAM. The default value is QPSK.
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer Table

The U-Net needs to access the R99 bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before the
prediction, you must set the R99 bearer table.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose R99 Bearer from the shortcut menu. The UMTS R99 Bearer Table
Table 6-8 Description of the parameters in the R99 bearer table
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the name of the R99 bearer service.

401
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Nominal Rate(UL)
Indicates the nominal rate of the uplink bearer service.
Nominal Rate(DL)
Indicates the nominal rate of the downlink bearer service.
Min TCH Power

(dBm)
Indicates the allowed lowest power of the downlink traffic channel.

The unit is dBm.
Max TCH Power

(dBm)
Indicates the allowed highest power of the downlink traffic channel.

The unit is dBm.
CE Used Num(UL)
Specifies the total CEs of the uplink bearer service.
CE Used Num(DL)
Specifies the total CEs of the downlink bearer service.
Spreading Factor
(UL)
Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the uplink nominal

rate.
Spreading Factor
(DL)
Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the downlink nominal

rate.
Step 5 Double-click the column heading of the bearer table to open the UMTS Service Quality dialog
box. Then, set relevant parameters, and click OK.
NOTE
l Each bearer service in the R99 bearer table must be set. That is, each row in the table must be set.
l Mobility: set mobility.
l UL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the uplink traffic channel for the related mobility.
l DL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the downlink traffic channel for the related mobility.
Step 6 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category Table

The U-Net needs to access the HSUPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore,
before the prediction, you must set the HSUPA UE Category table.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA UE
Category Table window is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

402
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 6-9 Description of parameters in the HSUPA UE Category table

Parameter
Description
Category
Indicates the power level of the UPA terminal.

The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must be
greater than or equal to 1.
Max Number of E-DPDCH

Codes
Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.
TTI 2ms
Indicates whether to support TTI scheduling of 2 ms.
Min Spreading Factor
Indicates the minimum spreading factor.
Its value is greater than or equal to 1.

Max Block Size for a 2ms TTI
(bits)
Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during

TTI scheduling of 2 ms.
Max Block Size for a 10ms TTI

(bits)
Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred during

TTI scheduling of 10 ms.
Highest Modulation
Indicates the highest modulation mode.

Its value is either QPSK or 16QAM.
Step 5 Click
to close the table.
----End
6.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category Table

The U-Net needs to access the HSDPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore,
before the prediction, you must set the HSDPA UE Category table.
Procedure
Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA UE
Category Table window is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

403
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 6-10 Description of parameters in the HSDPA UE Category table

Parameter
Description
Category
Indicates the power level of the DPA terminal.

The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must be
greater than or equal to 1.
Max Number of HS-PDSCH

Codes
Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.
Min Inter-TTI interval
Indicates the minimum interval between the TTI

scheduling.

Max Transport Block Size(bits)
Indicates the maximum size of a transported block.

Highest Modulation
Indicates the highest modulation mode.

Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM.
MIMO Support
Step 5 Click
Indicates whether MIMO is supported.
to close the table.
----End
6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters

separately.

the same way.
Context

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

404
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
6.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station Templates

Procedure
l

1.
dropOn the toolbar, select Template Management from the

down list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 6-5.
2.
drop-down list.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

405
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Such as
l

1.

2.
Set properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, see
Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.

1.
2.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of
parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
station template.

Context

Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

406
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Context
6.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell Parameters

This section describes how to set UMTS cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net
automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can set
cell parameters.
Procedure
Step 4 Set the properties of UMTS cells on the UMTSCell tab page in the displayed dialog box, as
shown in Figure 6-6. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of UMTS Cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

407
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-6 UMTSCell
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
6.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE Parameters

This section describes the parameters for setting UMTS NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates

Site Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Name
Support Type

micro base station.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

408
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description

Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Transceiver area on the UMTS tab page

Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Comments
Description.
Model
Site Equipment
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height/Ground(m)
Transmission in Number of
Antennas area
Reception in Number of
Antennas area
Transmission in Number of
Antenna Ports area
Total Loss(DL)
Total Loss(UL)
General tab in the Cell area on the UMTS tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Max Power(dBm)
Pilot Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of pilot channels.
CCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.

409
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Available HSDPA Power

(dBm)
Indicates the maximum available power of HSDPA.
Actual Power(dBm)
Indicates the actual transmit power.
HS-SCCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range is

from 0 to 1.
Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from
0 to 1.
Max Load(DL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the downlink. The

Max Load(UL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSUPA on the uplink. The

SHO Threshold(dB)
Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.
SHO Reserve Ratio
Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The value range is

from 0 to 1.
Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the total
uplink load.
Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the
total downlink load.
Max Noise Rise
Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.
UL Rake Factor
Indicates the combination efficiency of a Rake transceiver.

The value range is from 0 to 1.
Frequency Band
ARFCN
Indicates the downlink ARFCN.
Reception
Cell Type
Indicates the type of a cell.

The parameter value can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA,
R99AndHSUPA, or R99AndHSDPA.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

410
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the UMTS Tab Page
Parameter
Description
Propagation Model

Radius(m)
Resolution(m)
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells

This section describes the parameters for creating a UMTS cell or modifying the properties of
a UMTS cell.
Table 6-11 Parameters on the UMTSCell tab page
Parameter
Description
Name
Active
Frequency Band
ARFCN
Indicates the downlink ARFCN.
Target Load(DL)
Indicates the target load on the downlink. The

Target Load(UL)
Indicates the target load on the uplink. The

Cell Type
Indicates the type of a cell.

The cell type can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA,
R99 And HSUPA, or R99 And HSDPA.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Available HSDPA Power(dBm)
Indicates the maximum available power of

HSDPA.
CCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.
Code Allocation Ratio
Indicates the static allocation ratio of codes of

a cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Dynamic HSDPA Power
Indicates whether dynamically allocated

power is used for the HSDPA.
HSDPA Code Allocation
Indicates the allocation mode of codes of a

cell.

411
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
HS-SCCH Power(dBm)
Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.
Max Load(DL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on

the downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Max Noise Rise
Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.
Max Power(dBm)
Max Load(UL)
Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on

the uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Pilot Power(dBm)
Indicates the transmit power of pilot

channels.
Power Allocation Ratio
Indicates the static power allocation ratio of

a cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.
Reception
SHO Reserve Ratio
Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The

Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft
handoff to the total uplink load.
Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft
handoff to the total downlink load.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
SHO Threshold(dB)
Actual Power(dBm)
Indicates the actual transmit power.
UL Rake Factor
Indicates the combination efficiency of a

Rake transceiver. The value range is from 0
to 1.
Load Factor(UL)
Indicates the total uplink load. The value

HSUPA Load(UL)
Indicates the HSUPA uplink load. The value

Scrambling Code
Indicates the scrambling code assigned to a

cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Distance(km)
Indicates the reuse distance of a scrambling

code.
Scrambling Code Reuse Tier
Indicates the number of reuse layers of a

scrambling code.
Forbidden Scrambling Code
Indicates a forbidden scrambling code.
Scene
MCC

412
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
MNC
CI
CGI
Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).
RNC ID
Indicates the ID of an RNC.
LAC
Indicates a location area code.
RNC Name
Indicates the name of a radio network

controller.
Swap Status
Indicates the swapping status.
Comments
Remarks
Neighbors list
Indicates a list of neighboring cells.
Propagation Models

Parameter
Description
Name

transceiver.
Site

Hexagon Radius(m)

by default.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

of Antennas area

Antennas area

Comments

413
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Antenna ID

Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)

Dy(m)

Longitude
Latitude
Main Antenna

Azimuth

is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID

Equipment
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

414
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss

the total loss.
loss.
Site Equipment
TMA

Feeder
to
Feeder Length(m)


JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Total Loss(dB)

6.8 UMTS Prediction

channel quality.
6.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction

Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters

The U-Net can be used to predict multiple UMTS counters. This section describes the meanings
of the UMTS prediction counters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

415
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
menu.
Table 6-15 lists the UMTS prediction counters supported by the U-Net.
Table 6-15 Description of UMTS prediction counters
Category
Counter
Description
Coverage by
Signal Level
(DL)
CPICH RSCP
Indicates Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of

the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH).
Best Server
Indicates the best serving cell that has the highest

CPICH RSCP on a specified frequency.
UE RSSI
Indicates the total receive power of a UE on the entire

bandwidth.
Handover Area
Indicates whether an area is a handover area.
Pilot Pollution
Indicates the pilot pollution
Number Of Service
Indicates the number of cells that can be added to the

active set.
DL Noise Rise
Indicates the downlink noise rise.
Ec/Io
CPICH Ec/Io
Indicates the Ec/Io of the pilot signal received by a

UE.
Eb/Nt(UL)
UL DPCH Eb/Nt
Indicates the Eb/Nt of the uplink DPCH.
Eb/Nt(DL)
DL DPCH Eb/Nt
Indicates the Eb/Nt of the downlink DPCH.
HSDPA
Coverage
HS PDSCH Ec/Nt
Indicates the Ec/Nt of the signals received on the HSPDSCH.
HSDPA CQI
Indicates the HSDPA channel quality indicator.
HSDPA Peak
Throughput
Indicates the HSDPA peak throughput.
E DPDCH Ec/Nt
Indicates the Eb/Nt of the E-DPDCH.
HSUPA Peak
Throughput
Indicates the HSUPA peak throughput.
Coverage
Area
Analysis
HSUPA
Coverage

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

416
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
UMTS Prediction Algorithm

channel quality. This section describes the UMTS prediction algorithm through a schematic
chart.
Figure 6-8 shows the schematic chart of the UMTS prediction algorithm.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

417
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-8 UMTS prediction algorithm
Table 6-16 describes the processes shown in Figure 6-8.

Table 6-16 Description of the UMTS prediction algorithm
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Traversing all the

cells

activated. If a cell is not activated, the counters of this
cell are not calculated.
Obtaining the path

loss matrix

path loss matrix.
l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can be
obtained directly.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)



418
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedur
e
Operation
Description
Predicting slow
fading by using the
shadow fading
margin

a certain probability. A certain amount of power of the
base station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. The
reserved power is called shadow fading margin.
During the calculation of link loss, you can enable the
U-Net to take the shadow fading margin into account.
Calculating the
CPICH RSCP to
determine the
CPICH RSCP indicates the Received Signal Code

Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH).
It is an important counter used for prediction. You can
counter.
Calculating the
power of interference
noise to determine
the handover area.
You can calculate the power of interference and noise

and determine the handover area.
of traffic channels
and common
channels based on the
Bin points
You must calculate the mandatory counters and custom

counters based on the BIN.
Displaying
prediction results


l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

419
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the

human body

Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Antenna fading of a
terminal
Path loss
Shadow fading

Penetration loss

and leaves.

station

station

Prerequisites
l
Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

420
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Calculation
Force calculation
Procedure
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate

Calculate forcibly

Click

in Figure 6-9.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

421
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
----End
Follow-up Procedure
directory.

Context
l
RS SINR.
Nt.
Coverage By CIR.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

422
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
If ...
Then ...

not imported

Deviation.

imported

Deviation.
NOTE
Step 5 Click OK.

----End
6.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction Group

Prerequisites
l
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

423
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.

Figure 6-10 New
select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction
Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of
parameters, see 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

424
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
3.

1.
2.
1.
2.
3.

NOTE
on the map window.
4.
5.
----End
Example
1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

425
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
2.
3.
4.
5.
Follow-up Procedure
l
menu.
menu.
6.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning Results

Bin point.
Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in Batches

Context
Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by Bin Point

Procedure
l
in this area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.

426
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
Export the detailed

prediction group
Export the detailed

single counter in a
prediction group

> counter item.
3.
4.
5.
Click Export.
Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to
You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of a
Bin point within the range.
1.
2.

If...
Then...
Export the detailed

single counter in a
prediction group
Export the detailed

single counter in a
prediction group

> CPICH RSCP.
NOTE
You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > CPICH RSCP from the shortcut menu.
When you do not select the CPICH RSRP indicator when performing prediction
calculation, you cannot export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power.
4.
In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.
The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specified
range.
5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click Export.
427
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable
only to single-mode networks.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.
3.
Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu. The dialog box
as shown in Figure 6-11 is displayed.
4.
Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N
records to be exported.
5.
Click Export.
6.
After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.
NOTE
l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include CPICH RSCP
when you creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-12.
l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value of
TopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-13. This value
specifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.
Figure 6-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

428
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-12 Indicator selection
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

429
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-13 Property setting
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.
The exported contents mainly include:
l

are exported.
Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.
Printing Coverage Prediction Results in Batches

Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

430
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Prerequisites
l
The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or
created.
The coverage prediction for CPICH RSCP is complete.
The DT data file has been imported.
Context
The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. For
detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.

Context
For detailed operations of exporting the feature database, see Export the top N records of the
reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by
Bin Point.
6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells

After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

431
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l

l

l

NOTE
cells.

Prerequisites
l
cells.

relationships.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

432
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
by cell name.

technology.
Procedure
NOTE

Step 6 Click OK.
----End

This section describes how to perform neighboring cell planning for a new network. The U-Net
provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. This function helps to plan
the neighboring cells for each cell automatically, which reduces the number of handover
problems due to improper neighboring cell configuration.
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.
Context
On a new network, neighboring cell relationships do not exist. All neighboring cells are planned
initially. The initial planning of neighboring cells includes intra-frequency neighboring cell
planning, inter-frequency neighboring cell planning, and inter-RAT neighboring cell planning.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

433
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
NOTE
You can right-click UMTS and choose Stop Neighbor Allocation from the shortcut menu to stop the
current neighboring cell planning.
main window. For details, see 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning
Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.
3.
4.
5.
Click OK.
After the neighboring cell planning is complete, You can check and optimize neighboring cell
configuration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell
Configuration.
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded

Network
This section describes how to replan neighboring cells for an expanded network. The capacity
of a network may reach a limit after the network works for a long period of time. Therefore, the
network needs to be expanded. The neighboring cells in the expanded areas and adjacent areas
need to be replanned.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

434
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
Base station information has been created or imported, including network information before
the expansion and added site information after the expansion.
Procedure
Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the network before the expansion.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
4.
Select the Update Blind Handover Flag check box as required.

If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when
neighboring cell relationships are being imported.
5.
Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.

NOTE
l Select and import neighboring cell relationship files containing neighboring cell relationships
that are in the Added and No Change status.
l The values of CellName and NeighborCellName need to be the same as the names of cells and
neighboring cells on NEs respectively. The names of intra-RAT cells on NEs must be unique.
6.
Click OK.
Step 2 Set neighboring cell replanning parameters.

1.
2.
3.
Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-15.
4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters
for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
435
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
5.
Click Run.
main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6
Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.
----End
6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G

Network
This section describes how to plan neighboring cells on a 3G network based on neighboring cell
information on the 2G network after creating a 3G network.
Prerequisites
l
A GSM/UMTS network has been created.
Base station information has been imported or created and the Cell Table files of 2G
network and 3G network have been imported respectively.
Context
The coverage area of 3G network is the same as that of the 2G network and the addresses of
sites on the 3G network are the same as those on the 2G network. Therefore, neighboring cells
on the 2G network are inherited on the 3G network. For the expansion of a 3G network, see
6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.
Procedure
Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the 2G network.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.
3.
Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import Neighbor
4.
Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.
5.
Click OK.
Step 2 Set planning parameters.

1.
2.
3.
Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-16.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

436
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
4.
Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters
for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.
5.
Click Run.
main window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6
Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.
----End

This section describes how to check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. When the
neighboring cell planning in a scenario is complete, you can view, modify, apply, export, filter,
and collect the neighboring cell planning data. Based on the result of neighboring cell planning,
you can create neighboring cell planning scripts and check missing neighboring cell
relationships.
Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTE
You need to select RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in the
map window, as shown in Figure 6-17.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

437
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-17 Selecting the RAT

If you need to...
Then...
View neighboring cell relationships
In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell

in the Cell area. Alternatively, click a certain
cell in the map window, as shown in Figure
6-18.
The neighboring cell relationships of the
selected cell are displayed in the table in the
Cell area and in the map window
simultaneously.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

438
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Manually adjust neighboring cell

relationships

2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except
the source cell to add or delete
unidirectional neighboring cell
relationships.
3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except
the source cell to add or delete
bidirectional neighboring cell
relationships.
NOTE
l If an added or deleted neighboring cell
relationship is the same as an existing one,
the check box in the Confirm column of
the neighboring cell list is automatically
l If an added neighboring cell relationship is
different from the existing ones, the
neighboring cell relationship is added to
the neighboring cell list and force is
displayed in the Cause column.
l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell
reaches the maximum number, a
confirmation dialog box is displayed when
more neighboring cells are added. You can
click Yes to add these neighboring cells,
or click No to cancel the operation.
Apply the result of neighboring cell planning

to each cell
In the Cell area of the main window, Choose

Commit All from the shortcut menu..
After the result of neighboring cell planning
is applied, all the original neighboring cell
relationships are updated.
Export the result of neighboring cell planning
1. In the Cell area of the main window,

Choose Export from the shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog
box, select an export mode.
l Incremental Export: Export only the
changed neighboring cell
relationships.
l Full Export: Export all neighboring
cell relationships.
3. Click Export.
Delete neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, select

a cell whose neighboring cell
relationships need to be adjusted.
2. Clear the check boxes in the Confirm
column for the selected cells in the table
in the right pane.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

439
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Filter neighboring cell relationships

Choose Filter from the shortcut menu..
2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog
box. For details, see 6.13.4 Parameters
for Setting the Audit and Filter
Conditions Based on Neighboring
Relations.
3. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed
in green in the map window, as shown in
Figure 6-19.
NOTE
If you select the None option in the Filter dialog
box, the color of filtered cells in the map window
is cleared.
Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells
Right-click in the Cell area of the main

window and choose Remove Filter from the
shortcut menu. The table in the right pane
switches back to the state when no filter
criterion is used, and the color of filtered cells
in the map window is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria
are used.
Audit neighboring cell relationships
1. In the Cell area of the main window, rightclick the table and choose Statistic from
the shortcut menu.
2. Set audit conditions in the displayed
dialog box. For details, see Parameters
for Setting Conditions for Checking
Neighbor Relationships and Filtering
Neighboring Cells.
3. Click OK. The neighboring cell
relationship check report is exported to an
XLS file.
The exported file contains multiple sheets,
and each sheet shows the result that meets
certain audit conditions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

440
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Check missing neighboring cell relationships

Choose Export from the shortcut menu..
2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog
box, select Incremental Export.
l Incremental Export: Export only the
changed neighboring cell
relationships.
3. Click Export.
Check the status of exported neighboring cell
relationships. The neighboring cell
relationships in the Added state are missing
Clear the neighboring cell planning result
1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main

window and choose Clear Existed
Neighbors from the shortcut menu, as
2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click
Y. The existing neighboring cell
relationships are cleared.
NOTE
You can clear the existing result of neighboring
cell planning so that the planning of neighboring
cells next time will not be affected.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

441
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

442
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-19 Filter
Figure 6-20 clear existed neighbors
NOTE
You can create neighboring cell planning scripts based on the result of neighboring cell planning. The UNet is applicable to the planning of intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells under different
RNCs. If inter-RNC neighboring cells are involved in the planning, type the RNC ID of each cell in the
RNCID column in the table in the Cell area.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

443
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning

This section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used for
differentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code
planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping and
vertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenarios
such as scrambling code check and network deployment.
6.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code Planning

This section describes basic knowledge of scrambling code planning. The scrambling code
planning is performed to allocate a primary scrambling code for each cell and different
scrambling codes for the cells adjacent to this cell. The scrambling code planning ensures that
no interference is generated between downlink signals of cells that are allocated the same
frequency and scrambling code.
Scrambling codes in the UMTS system are classified into uplink scrambling codes and downlink
scrambling codes. Uplink scrambling codes are classified into long scrambling codes and short
scrambling codes. The uplink scrambling codes are allocated randomly by the RNC for
differentiating users. Therefore, the planning of uplink scrambling codes is not required.
Downlink scrambling codes are used on UEs. Only long scrambling codes are used for
differentiating cells. Downlink scrambling codes are divided into 512 groups. Each group
consists of 16 scrambling codes. The first scrambling code in each group is the primary
scrambling code. The other 15 scrambling codes in the same group are secondary scrambling
codes. Secondary scrambling codes must be used together with the primary scrambling code.
Figure 6-21 shows the procedure for scrambling code planning.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

444
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-21 Procedure for scrambling code planning
The planning and optimization of UMTS scrambling codes are applicable to the following
scenarios. Figure 6-22 shows the operation procedure.
l
6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network
6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

445
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-22 Operation procedure for scenario-based scrambling code planning and optimization
6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network

This section describes how to use the U-Net to plan scrambling codes for a simple new network
by setting the rules of reusing scrambling codes.
Context
On the UMTS network, the U-Net supports the allocation of scrambling codes based on tier
reuse, distance reuse, and maximum-usage or average allocation principles. The U-Net also
provides multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping, vertical grouping, and
customized grouping. Users can use the U-Net to allocate scrambling code groups based on cell
types.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

446
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
l Scrambling code planning based on tier reuse is available after neighboring cell planning is complete.
l Maximum-usage allocation maximizes the reuse of scrambling code resources to increase the usage of
scrambling codes.
l Average allocation ensures that all scrambling codes are equally used.
Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Check the allocation of scrambling codes in the existing cells.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.
3.
Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is
displayed.View the scrambling codes of existing cells.
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.

Step 3 Choose Set Scrambling Code Resource from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 Set Scrambling Code Resource
Step 4 Set scrambling code resource in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parameters
for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes.
Step 5 Click OK.
Step 7 Choose Automatic Identify High-Site from the shortcut menu.
Step 8 After the Height of High-Site is set, click Identify.
The U-Net automatically selects the cells that meet the height requirement from the Normal
cells and High_Site cells. The Scene of selected cells is set to High_Site, and the Scene of the
other cells is set to Normal. Cells in the two scenarios are displayed in the Cell area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

447
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The Scene parameter in cell properties indicates the scenario of a cell.

Step 9 Click OK.
Step 10 Repeat Step 2.
Step 11 Choose Scanning from the shortcut menu to check the usage of any scrambling code in cells of
the entire network.
Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, set the value of Scrambing Code from the drop-down list box. The
Step 13 Repeat Step 2.
Step 15 Set parameters in the displayed Scrambling Code Plan dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6
Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes.
Step 16 Click Run.
main window.. For details, see 6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS
Scrambling Codes .
NOTE
You can right-click UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and choose Stop Scrambling Codes Planning
from the shortcut menu to stop the current scrambling code planning.
----End
6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration

After UMTS scrambling codes are planned, you can view, manually adjust, apply, export, filter,
and collect statistics about the planning results.
Prerequisites
UMTS scrambling codes have been planned.
Context
The scrambling code plan changes frequently on the live network due to causes such as network
expansion. Therefore, the distribution of the current scrambling codes needs to be checked
periodically to ensure that scrambling codes are properly distributed. The scrambling code
planning is a process of checking whether scrambling codes are reused based on preset reuse
tier and distance. The requirements of reuse tier and distance vary based on scenarios. Suburbs
and rural areas require more reuse tiers and longer reuse distance.
Procedure
Step 1 If the Scrambling Code Display window has been opened, go to Step 5. Otherwise, proceed
to Step 2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

448
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 4 Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed.
If you need to...
Then...
Enable geographic display of scrambling

codes
1. In the Explorer window, click the

Network tab.
2. In the navigation tree, choose
Transceiver.
3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut
menu. The Display Field dialog box is
displayed.
4. On the Label Display tab page, add
Scrambling Code to the Selected Fields
area.
Enable the cells using the same scrambling

code as that of the selected cell in the planning
result table to be displayed on the map
1. In the navigation tree, select UMTS

Scrambling Code Planning.
2. Choose Display Option from the shortcut
menu.
3. In the displayed Scrambling Code
Display Option dialog box, set the mode
and color for geographic display of
scrambling codes.
l Co Scrambling Code Cell: sets the
color for the cells that use the same
scrambling code with that of the
selected cell.
l Selected Cell Color: sets a color for
the selected cell.
l Link: identifies the scrambling code
planning results by lines.
l Cell: sets the color of the line
corresponding to the scrambling code
planning results.
4. Click OK.
5. Select a cell on the map or click a row
heading in the planning result table.
The cells that use the same scrambling
code as that of the selected cell are
displayed on the map at the same time.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Manually adjust scrambling codes
In the result window, change the values of

Confirm Code.
Apply the planning results
Right-click in the result window and choose

Commit from the shortcut menu to submit
the values of Confirm Code for all cells to
NEs.

449
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Export the planning file of scrambling codes

Export from the shortcut menu to export the
scrambling code planning results as a file. For
details about the parameters, see Parameters
in the Data Export Dialog Box.
Export MML script planning file for the

scrambling codes
Export the scrambling code planning result

data for generating the MML script file.
Collect statistics about the usage of

scrambling codes
1. Right-click in the result window and

choose Graphic Result from the shortcut
menu.
2. In the Graphic Result window, set
parameters. For details about the
parameters, see Table 6-18.
graphic and data areas display the statistical
results.
You can double-click a column heading in the
table in the data area to sort the results.
Filter scrambling code planning results

choose Filter from the shortcut menu.
2. Specify a cell range from the Filter
Target drop-down list in the displayed
dialog box. All indicates all the cells on
the entire network, and Planning
indicates the cells in the planning area.
3. Select filter parameters. For details about
the parameters, see 6.13.8 Parameters
for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling
Code Planning Results.
4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the
downlink ARFCN.
NOTE
If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to
set it.
5. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed

green on the map.
NOTE
If you set the filtering criterion to None in the
Filter dialog box, the color of the filtered cells on
the map is cleared.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

450
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...

Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The
Scrambling Code Display window switches
back to the status when no filter criterion was
used in Filter, and the color of cells is cleared.
NOTE
Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria
are set in Filter.
Check the scrambling code planning results

choose Audit from the shortcut menu.
2. Specify a cell range from the Audit
Target drop-down list in the displayed
dialog box. All indicates all the cells on
the entire network, and Planning
indicates the cells in the planning area.
3. Select one or more statistical parameters.
For details about the parameters, see
6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and
Auditing Scrambling Code Planning
Results.
4. Set ARFCN, which indicates the
downlink ARFCN.
NOTE
If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need to
set it.
Clear the scrambling code planning results

choose Clear Existed Scrambling Code
from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-24.
2. In the displayed confirmation dialog box,
click Yes (Y). The existing scrambling
code planning results on NEs are cleared.
NOTE
After the planned scrambling codes are cleared, the
new scrambling code planning will not be affected.
Table 6-18 Parameters in the Graphic Result window
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Main ARFCN
Sets the downlink ARFCN.
Use Times
Collects statistics based on the number of

times scrambling codes are reused.
Min Reuse Distance(km)
Collects statistics based on the reuse

distances of scrambling codes.

451
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Min Reuse Tier
Collects statistics based on the reuse tiers of

scrambling codes.
Cell Type
Sets the cell type.

l Indicates the type of a cell (All, Indoor,
High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Normal,
Special, Outdoor, and Boundary).
l This parameter is available only when Use
times is selected.
Figure 6-24 Clear Existed Scrambling Code
----End
6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis

This chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurement
report analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyze
the live network.
6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group

This section describes how to create a measurement report analysis group and modify the group
attributes. The U-Net can analyze measurement report analysis groups. Each measurement report
analysis group contains one or multiple analysis items.
Prerequisites
l
You have imported geographic data.
NodeBs are available.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

452
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report.
Step 3 Right-click UMTS Measure Report and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 New
Step 4 In the displayed UMTS Measure Report dialog box, select a computation area and set the data
source for measurement report analysis. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.10
Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.
Step 5 Click OK to create a new measurement report analysis group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate
the measurement report analysis group.
Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop
calculating the measurement report analysis group.
6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis

Results
After calculating a measurement report analysis group, you can create network counters in the
measurement report analysis group to view the live network analysis results displayed in color
rendering mode in the map window.
Prerequisites
l
You have created a measurement report analysis group.
You have calculated the measurement report analysis group.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

453
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report > existing measurement report analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing measurement report analysis group and choose New from the shortcut
Figure 6-26 New
Step 4 In the displayed Measure Report Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as
shown in Figure 6-27. For details about these counters, see 6.13.11 Parameters for
Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

454
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-27 Measure Report Study Types
Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create measurement report analysis counters.
NOTE
After measurement report analysis counters are created, the live network data analysis results of the counters
are geographically displayed in the map window.
----End
6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis

Using the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand the
UMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.
6.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Basics

This section describes how to use the U-Net to perform network capacity expansion analysis.
Before expanding the network capacity, you can use the U-Net to analyze the impacts of network
capacity expansion on coverage and capacity and then adopt a proper expansion policy and
determine the number of required resources.
NOTE
The U-Net supports only UMTS network capacity expansion by splitting sectors.
Figure 6-28 shows the flow chart for analyzing network capacity expansion through the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

455
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-28 Flow chart
6.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group

This section describes how to create a capacity expansion analysis group and modify the group
attributes. The U-Net performs network capacity expansion analysis based on analysis groups.
Each analysis group contains one or more analysis items.
Prerequisites
l
NodeBs are available.
Procedure
Step 2 Choose UMTS Network Expansion from the navigation tree.
Step 3 Right-click UMTS Network Expansion and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in
Figure 6-29.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

456
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-29 New
Step 4 In the displayed Network Expansion Analysis dialog box, select a computation area, set a data
source and policy for expansion analysis, and set algorithm parameters for soft handovers and
MR-based traffic evaluation. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.12 Parameters for
Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.
Step 5 Click OK or Apply to create a network capacity expansion analysis group.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate
the capacity expansion analysis group.
Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop
calculating the capacity expansion analysis group.
NOTE
l
l The time required for the calculation depends on the selected MR data size, computation area, and the
selected expansion policy. The required calculation time is directly proportional to the MR data size,
computation area, and expansion policy complexity.
6.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis

Results
After calculating a capacity expansion analysis group, you can create network counters in the
capacity expansion analysis group to view the analysis results displayed in color rendering mode
in the map window.
Prerequisites
l
You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.
You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

457
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, as
Figure 6-30 New
Step 4 In the displayed Expansion Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shown
in Figure 6-31. For details about these counters, see 6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically
Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

458
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 6-31 Expansion Study Types
NOTE
You can check Initial, Final, and Variation analysis results for each counter.
Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create capacity expansion counter analysis
items.
NOTE
After the analysis items are created, the expansion analysis results of the counters are geographically
----End
6.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion Results

This section describes how to check network capacity expansion results after calculating a
capacity expansion analysis group.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

459
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prerequisites
l
You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.
You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysis
group.
Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose Result from the shortcut menu, as
Figure 6-32 Result
Step 4 In the displayed Result dialog box, check the network capacity expansion results. For details
about these parameters, see 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion
Results.
----End
6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using the
U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

460
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups


Parameter
Description
Group Name

Prediction Type
Prediction type.
Study Selected
Prediction counter.
Calculate Now

immediately.
Parameters in the UMTS Group Properties Dialog Box

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Resolution(m)
Polygon
Indicates the area calculated in prediction.
Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that is,

the probability that the receive signal strength is
stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a
cell.
With Shadow

calculation.
Indoor Coverage
Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the

calculation.
DLFrequencyBand
Indicates the downlink frequency band.
ARFCN
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel

number (ARFCN).

461
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Signal Level(dBm)
Indicates the receive threshold of the downlink

reference signal.
Terminal
Service
Mobility

Parameter
Description
DLDivGain
Indicates the downlink diversity gain.
MacroDivGain
Indicates the macro diversity gain.
MaxSpatialMultiplexingFactor
Indicates the maximum spatial diversity gain.
MinCPICHEcIo
Indicates the threshold of the minimum signal to

interference plus noise ratio (SINR).
OrthoFactor
Indicates the orthogonal factor.
PilotEcIoMargin
Indicates the minimum SINR of the pilot signal.
PilotPollutionMargin
Indicates the threshold of pilot pollution.
SHOThreshold
SpatialMultiplexingFactor
Indicates the spatial diversity gain.
TopNSignalLevel
Indicates the number of top receive levels to be

ranked.
ULDivGain
Indicates the uplink diversity gain.
6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells

This section describes the parameters for planning neighboring UMTS cells.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

462
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Methods Select
Selects a network planning scenario.

l Topology: Plans neighboring cells based on network
topology.
l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on prediction
results. This method is applicable only to outdoor base
stations.
l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on
both the network topology and the prediction results.


existed Neighbors

relationships.
replanned.
Force Co-Site As Neighbor
Forcibly configures internal cells as bidirectional

neighboring cells.
Co-Site Distance(m)
Configures two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells when

the distance between the two cells is less than the value of
this parameter.
Reference Existed Neighbors
Whether to reference the neighbor relationships of existing

cells.
Azimuth Difference ()
Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be

planned and the cells used for reference.
Reference Site Distance(m)
Sets the distance difference between the cell to be planned

and the referenced cell.
Consider Handover Statistics
Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path

for saving the handover data.
Planning Weight
Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring

cell ranking.
Handover Statistics Weight
Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring

cell ranking.
Resolution(m)

Handover Area Percent(%)

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

463
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Compute Shadowing

calculation.
Cell Edge Coverage

Probability(%)
Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This

parameter is valid only when shadow fading is considered
in the calculation. The value of the parameter is directly
proportional to the value of shadow fading.
Compute Indoor Loss
Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the

calculation.


Area

By default, the full map is planned.
match cases.
l Comments: Users can filter cells based on the
information defined in Comments.
Table 6-23 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description

Indoor Cell

neighboring cells.

Outdoor Cell

neighboring cells.

464
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Force Symmetry

neighboring cells.
Table 6-24 Parameters on the Inter-Frequency tab page

Parameter
Description

Indoor Cell
Indicates the maximum number of indoor inter-frequency

neighboring cells.

Outdoor Cell
Indicates the maximum number of outdoor inter-frequency

neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency Config
Indicates frequency band parameters and handover modes.
Table 6-25 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboring
cell planning)
Parameter
Description
SourceNetType
Indicates the network system that the source cell belongs to.
To
Indicates the network system that the cells to be planned

belong to.
NOTE
If the RAT is switched to GSM, you can set the frequency band to
be switched to.
Max Number

Cells
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

465
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Display Links
Display Cell Color

relationship table.
Selected Cell Color
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Legend
Description
Intra Frequency

Inter Frequency

Inter-RAT

Intra Technology



Paired Inter-RAT


Add To Legend
Transparency

466
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
neighboring cells
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Intra-Technology
Inter-RAT
Empty List
Missing Co-Site
Missing Symmetry
List > No:

Neighbors

Same PCI
None
Interface

not.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

467
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

complete.
Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
actual tab page.
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Cause

network.
by users.
the serving cell.
Confirm

Blind Handover
6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes

This section describes the parameters for planning UMTS scrambling codes.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

468
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 6-31 Parameters on the Group Strategy tab page

Parameter
Description
Vertical(64 codes per group)
Indicates that vertical grouping is used. Each

group consists of 64 scrambling codes and there
are a total of 8 groups.
Horizontal(8 codes per group)
Indicates that horizontal grouping is used. Each

group consists of 8 scrambling codes and there are
a total of 64 groups.
512 Codes(512 codes per group)
Indicates that all the 512 scrambling codes are in

one group.
Customize
Indicates that the grouping mode can be

customized.
You can customize the grouping mode on the
Group Strategy tab page.
Reserved The Last [] Groups
Reserves the last N scrambling code groups.
Reserved The Last [] Codes Per Group
Reserves the last N scrambling codes of each

group.
Reserved The Last [] Codes
Reserves the last N scrambling codes.
Available Scrambling Codes
Available scrambling codes.
Reserved Scrambling Codes
Reserved scrambling codes.
Table 6-32 Parameters on the Cell Strategy tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Type
Indicates the type of a cell (Indoor, Outdoor,

High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Boundary,
Normal, Special).
Select Usable Group
Indicates the scrambling code groups used by the

same type of cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Tier
Indicates the number of layers for scrambling

code reuse for the same type of cell.
Scrambling Code Reuse Distance
Indicates the scrambling code reuse distance for

the same type of cells.

469
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Reuse Rule
Sets the rules for reusing scrambling codes.

The value can be Distance, Tier, or Distance
+Tier.
The default value is Tier.
Allocate Rule
Sets the rules for allocating scrambling codes.

The value can be Average or MaxUsage.
The default value is MaxUsage.
Main ARFCN
Main downlink absolute radio frequency channel

number.
Consecutive Allocate
Sets whether scrambling codes under one base

station are allocated consecutively.
If this option is selected, scrambling codes are
allocated consecutively. This parameter is
selected by default.
Group Different From Neighbor Site
Sets whether different scrambling code groups are

allocated to neighboring base stations.
If this option is selected, different scrambling
code groups are allocated to neighboring base
stations. This parameter is selected by default.
Allocate Different Scrambling Code for

Cells in the Same Transceiver
If this option is selected, different scrambling

codes are allocated to inter-frequency cells
sharing sectors.
Delete Scrambling Code
Sets whether to delete the existing scrambling

codes of cells.
If this option is selected, the existing scrambling
codes of cells are deleted.
Iteratively Generate Scrambling Code
Sets whether to generate scrambling codes by

iterations.
If scrambling codes fail to be allocated to cells
when this parameter is selected, you can reduce
the reuse distance by iteration based on the step
defined by Distance Decending Percentage(%)
to allocate scrambling codes until the allocation is
successful.
Distance Decending Percentage(%)
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Sets the percentage of the step for reducing the

scrambling code reuse distance.

470
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Area
Selects the area where scrambling codes need to

be planned.
l You can select all the cells in an area or click
Cell Filter to select only the cells to be
planned in the area.
l If you select certain cells to plan the
scrambling codes, the U-Net plans the
scrambling codes for the selected cells by
taking into account the existing scrambling
codes allocation of other cells.
l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the
contents to be found, set the search direction,
and set whether to match cases.
l Comments: Users can filter cells based on the
information defined in Comments.
6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS

Scrambling Codes
This section describes the parameters for viewing the planning results of UMTS scrambling
codes. You can refer to this section when viewing the planning results of UMTS scrambling
codes in the Scrambling Code Display dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Existing Code
Indicates the existing scrambling code.
Suggest Code
Indicates the scrambling codes that are recommended for

setting.
Confirm Code
Indicates the scrambling codes whose settings are

confirmed.
Use Times
Indicates that the statistical information is collected by the

number of times a scrambling code is reused.
Min Reuse Distance(km)
Indicates that the statistical information is collected by

scrambling code reuse distance.
Min Reuse Tier
Indicates that the statistical information is collected by the

number of layers a scrambling code is reused.

471
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code

Planning Results
This section describes the parameters for filtering and auditing scrambling code planning results.
Table 6-34 Parameters for filtering or auditing scrambling code planning results
Parameter
Description
None
Indicates that no filter criterion is applied.
Allocation Failed Cells
Indicates the cells for which scrambling code allocation

fails.
No Allocation Cells
Indicates the cells that are not allocated with scrambling

codes.
Reuse Tier <=
Indicates the cells for which the number of scrambling

code reuse layers is less than the specified value. A
UARFCN must be specified.
Reuse Distance(km) <=
Indicates the cells for which the scrambling code reuse

distance is less than the specified value. A UARFCN must
be specified.
Using Reserved Code
Indicates the cells that use reserved scrambling codes. A

UARFCN must be specified.
Using Forbidden Code
Indicates the cells that use forbidden scrambling codes.
Using Non-continuous Code
Indicates the co-site and intra-frequency cells that do not

use consecutive scrambling codes in the same scrambling
code group. A UARFCN must be specified.
Using Same Group with

Neighbor Site
Indicates the cells that use the same scrambling code group
as the adjacent sites. A UARFCN must be specified.
ARFCN
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number.
Interface
Indicates whether to highlight filtered cells on the map or

not.
6.13.9 Parameters for Setting Bands

This section describes the parameters used for setting the frequency band information about the
UMTS.
Table 6-35 Parameters for setting frequency band information
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Value
Name

472
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
UARFCN(UL)
Uplink UTRA absolute radio

frequency channel number.

[9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12
[9262,9538];[12,12].
UARFCN(DL)
Downlink UTRA absolute

radio frequency channel
number.

[9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12
[9262,9538];[12,12].
Frequency(UL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
Frequency(DL)(MHz)
Unit: MHz.
ACIR
Adjacent channel
interference ratio.
Unit: dB.
is greater than 0.
6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis

Group
This section describes the parameters for creating a measurement report (MR) analysis group.
Parameters in the UMTS Measure Report dialog box
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Name
Name of a MR analysis
group.

473
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Polygon
Computation area.
l If there is no computation
area, you can create a polygon
through
l The computation area size

affects the MR analysis
efficiency. To obtain analysis
results quickly, you need to
draw a proper computation
area.
Path of the MR data to be
selected.
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Column configuration file

that is imported into an MR
file.
Select a column to be imported

and save it as a configuration file.
Next time when you import the
MR file, you only need to directly
import the configuration file.
Path
Config Columns dialog box
This parameter is set based on site

requirements.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1st.Data Row
Row in an MR file from

which data is imported.
This parameter is set based on site

requirements.
Longitude
Longitude.
This parameter is mandatory.
Latitude
Latitude.
RNC ID
ID of an RNC to which a cell

belongs.
Cell ID
ID of a cell.
Cell MR Count
Number of MRs for a cell

with a specific longitude and
latitude.
Cell Average RSCP
Average RSCP of all MRs for

a cell with a specific
longitude and latitude.
Cell Average EcIo
Average EcIo value of all

MRs for a cell with a specific

474
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Cell IMSI Count
Number of IMSIs contained

in all MRs for a cell with a
specific longitude and
latitude.
This parameter is optional.
6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement

Report Analysis Results
This section describes the parameters for geographically displaying measurement report analysis
results.
Parameters in the Measure Report Study Types dialog box

Parameter
Description
RSCP analysis
Geographically displays the received signal

code power (RSCP) for the primary serving
cell of each grid.
EcIo analysis
Geographically displays the EcIo value for

the primary serving cell of each grid.
User count analysis
Geographically displays the number of users

of each grid.
Cell coverage area analysis
Geographically displays the cell coverage

area.
LAC area analysis
Geographically displays the coverage area of

cells with the same LAC.
RNC area analysis
Geographically displays the coverage area of

cells under the same RNC.
Single Cell RSCP analysis
Geographically displays the RSCP for a

single cell of each grid.
Single Cell EcIo analysis
Geographically displays the EcIo value for a

single cell of each grid.
Single Cell User count analysis
Geographically displays the number of users

of a single cell of each grid.
6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis

Group
This section describes the parameters for creating a UMTS network capacity expansion analysis
group in the Network Expansion Analysis dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

475
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Network Expansion Analysis dialog box

Parameter
Description
Remarks
Name
Name of a capacity
expansion analysis
item.
Computation Area
Computation area.
l If there is no computation area,

you can create a polygon through
.
l The computation area size affects
the capacity expansion analysis
efficiency. To obtain analysis
results quickly, you need to draw
a proper computation area.
Table 6-37 Parameters on the DataSource tab page

Parameter
Description
Remarks
Measure Report
Select a data source.
The U-Net currently supports

only MRs as the data source.
Path
Path of the MR data to be

selected.
Table 6-38 Parameters on the Strategy tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Add Sector
Select a capacity expansion

mode.
The U-Net currently supports

only the capacity expansion
policy of adding sectors.
Site Name
Name of a site.
Transceiver
Name of a transceiver.
Cell Name
Name of a cell.
The U-Net differentiates

between split cells and
original cells by cell name.
CI
Identity of a cell, which is

unique within an area.
The ID of a new split cell

must be different from that of
the cell before splitting.
Antenna
Antenna of a cell.
A split cell uses the split

directional antenna.

476
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Cell Comments
Comments for a cell.
Table 6-39 Parameters on the Parameter tab page

Parameter
Description
Remarks
Min RSCP Threshold

(dBm)
Minimum RSCP
threshold.
This parameter is used for calculating

cells of the UE's active set for each
grid.
The default value is -110

dBm.
RSCP Margin(dB)
RSCP margin.
The default value is 6 dB.
Other cells can be added to the UE's

active set only when the RSCPs of
the cells in the current position
exceed this threshold.
cells of the UE's active set for each
grid.
The cells can be added to the UE's
active set only when the differences
(absolute value) between the RSCPs
of other cells in this position and the
RSCP of the primary serving cell are
less than or equal to the parameter
value.
ActiveSet Size
Size of a UE's active set.
All the cells that meet conditions of

Min RSCP Threshold and RSCP
Margin can be added to the active
set. If the number of cells that meet
the conditions exceed the value of
ActiveSet Size, the exceeded
number of cells cannot be added to
the active set and these cells are
considered as pilot pollution cells.
Measure Report
Duration(s)
Period for reporting MRs.

traffic based on the number of MRs.
Cell MR Percent
Threshold
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
The default value is 12

seconds.
Cell MR percentage
threshold.
You can configure this parameter

based on site requirements.
If MR data records of multiple cells
exist on a grid and the percentage of
the number of MR data records of a
cell to the total number of MR
records on the grid is less than this
threshold, the cell does not
participate in the calculation of the
grid.

477
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Config Columns dialog box

Parameter
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Column configuration file

that is imported into an MR
file.
Select a column to be
imported and save it as a
configuration file. Next time
when you import the MR file,
you only need to directly
import the configuration file.
This parameter is set based
on site requirements.
1st.Data Row
Row in an MR file from

which data is imported.
This parameter is set based

on site requirements.
Longitude
Longitude.
Latitude
Latitude.
RNC ID
ID of an RNC to which a cell

belongs.
Cell ID
ID of a cell.
Cell MR Count
Number of MRs for a cell

with a specific longitude and
latitude.
Cell Average RSCP
Average RSCP of all MRs for

a cell with a specific
Cell Average EcIo
Average EcIo value of all

MRs for a cell with a specific
Cell IMSI Count
Number of IMSIs contained

in all MRs for a cell with a
specific longitude and
latitude.
This parameter is optional.
6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity

Expansion Analysis Results
This section describes the counters used for geographically analyzing the capacity expansion
effect.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

478
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Expansion Study Types dialog box

Counter
Description
RSCP
Geographically displays the received signal code power

(RSCP) for the primary serving cell of each grid.
EcIo
Geographically displays the EcIo value for the primary serving

cell of each grid.
RSSI
Geographically displays the received signal strength indicator

(RSSI) value of each grid.
Best Server
Geographically displays the primary serving cell of each grid.
Pilot Pollution
Geographically displays the number of pilot pollution sources

of each grid.
NOTE
The number of pilot pollution sources refers to the number of cells that
meet handover conditions and exceed the UE active set threshold of
each grid.
Handover Area
Geographically displays the soft handover status of each grid.

Soft handover grids are the grids for which the number of cells
that meet handover conditions does not exceed the active set
threshold.
6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion

Results
This section describes the parameters for viewing the network capacity expansion results.
Table 6-40 Parameters on the Site tab page
Parameter
Description
Site Name
Name of a site.
CS Traffic Before Expansion(Erlang)
CS traffic of a site before the network capacity

expansion.
CS Traffic After Expansion(Erlang)
CS traffic of a site after the network capacity

expansion.
CS Traffic Variation
CS traffic change of a site after the network capacity

expansion.
CS Traffic Variation = CS Traffic After Expansion CS Traffic Before Expansion
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

479
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 6-41 Parameters on the Transceiver tab page

Parameter
Description
Splitted
Indicates whether cells are split.

True: Cells are split.
False: Cells are not split.
Old Transceiver Name
Name of a transceiver before splitting.
New Transceiver Name
Name of a transceiver after splitting.

NOTE
When Splitted of a cell is set to False, no new cell is split.
CS Traffic Before Expansion(Erlang)
CS traffic of a transceiver before the network

capacity expansion.
CS Traffic After Expansion(Erlang)
CS traffic of a transceiver after the network capacity

expansion.
CS Traffic Variation
CS traffic change of a transceiver after the network

capacity expansion.
CS Traffic Variation = CS Traffic After Expansion CS Traffic Before Expansion
Transceiver Name
Name of a split transceiver.
CS Traffic(Erlang)
CS traffic of a split transceiver.
Table 6-42 Parameters on the Cell tab page

Parameter
Description
Status
Indicates whether a cell is a split one.
Cell Name
Name of a cell.
CS Traffic(Erlang)
CS traffic of a split cell.
SHO Ratio
Soft handover ratio of a split cell.
SHO Overhead
Soft handover overhead of a split cell.
Table 6-43 Parameters on the SHO Ratio tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Cell Name
Name of a source cell.
Cell ID
ID of a source cell.
RNC ID
ID of the RNC to which the source cell belongs.

480
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Dest CellName
Name of the destination cell where the handover is

performed.
Dest CellID
ID of the destination cell where the handover is

performed.
Dest RNCID
ID of the RNC to which the destination cell where

the handover is performed belongs.
SHO Ratio
Ratio of soft handovers.

481
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
CDMA Network Planning
About This Chapter

This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supports
only the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes.
7.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning
This section describes the process of CDMA network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning a CDMA network by using the U-Net.
7.5 Adding a Device
7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters
separately.
7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

482
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network.
7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning
The CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread the
spectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN code
planning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.
7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using the
U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

483
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
7.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning

This section describes the process of CDMA network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning a CDMA network by using the U-Net.
Figure 7-1 shows the process of CDMA network planning.
Figure 7-1 Process of CDMA network planning

Table 7-1 Description of the CDMA Network Planning Process
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data

network systems to the U-Net is the same. For details,
see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.

484
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
No.
Procedure
Description
Managing
propagation models
and bands

systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4
Adding a device

for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.
For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.
Setting NE
parameters

transmitters, or repeaters separately. For details, see 7.6
Setting CDMA NE Parameters.
Planning PN codes/
Planning
neighboring cells
For details, see 7.8.2 Planning PN Codes and 6.9

Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells.

Context
l
network.
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

485
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l

file.
NOTE

NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

486
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Context

Context
Setting Bands.
7.5 Adding a Device

Context
7.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters

separately.

the same way.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

487
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context

Context
7.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station Template

Procedure
l

1.
Select Template Management from the base station template drop-down list on the
toolbar and open the Station Template Properties dialog box.
2.
drop-down list.
For example,

1.

2.
Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for Setting
CDMA Base Station Templates.
3.
Click OK.

1.
2.
3.
Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

488
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
station template.

Context

Context

Context
7.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell Parameters

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

489
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 4 On the CDMACell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the CDMA cell.
For parameter description, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
7.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE Parameters

This section describes the parameters for setting CDMA NE parameters by using the U-Net.
Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates

Site Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Name
Support Type

micro base station.

Hexagon Radius
Comments
Description.
Transceiver Area on the CDMA Tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Transceivers
Comments
Description.
Model
Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.
Site Equipment

490
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height/Ground(m)
Total Loss(DL)
Total Loss(UL)
Cell Area on the CDMA Tab Page

Parameter
Description
Frequency Band
Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells

This section describes the parameters for creating or modifying the properties of a CDMA cell.
Table 7-2 Parameters on the CDMACell tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Name
Active
Frequency Band
Channel Index
MSC ID
Indicates the number of a mobile switching center

(MSC) on the live network.
BSC ID
Indicates the number of a base station controller (BSC)

on the live network.
BTS ID
Indicates the number of a base station on the live

network.
Cell ID
Indicates the number of a cell on the live network.
Sector ID
Indicates the number of an antenna.
PN
Indicates the PN code assigned to a cell.

491
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
N*PN INC
Indicates the base of a PN code.

The number of assigned PN codes is the multiple of
the base.
PN GROUP
Indicates a PN code group.
Scene
Neighbors list
Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this

button.
Intra-frequency Neighbors indicates a list of intrafrequency neighboring cells.
Comment
Remarks.

Parameter
Description
Name

transceiver.
Site

Hexagon Radius(m)

by default.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

of Antennas area

Antennas area

Comments

492
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Antenna ID

Power Ratio
Sector ID
Dx(m)

Dy(m)

Longitude
Latitude
Main Antenna

Azimuth

is degree.
Antenna
Type of an antenna.
Mechanical Downtilt
Electrical Downtilt
Height(m)
RRU ID

Equipment
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

493
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Description
Input Total Loss

the total loss.
loss.
Site Equipment
TMA

Feeder
to
Feeder Length(m)


JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB)
JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB)
Total Loss(dB)

7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning

After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

494
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l

l

l

NOTE
cells.

Prerequisites
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
cells.
495
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

relationships.
by cell name.

technology.
Context
Procedure
NOTE

Step 6 Click OK.
----End
7.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells

Prerequisites
l
cells.
into the U-Net.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

496
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.
Step 5 Click Run.
main window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.
3.
4.
5.
Click OK.
You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,
see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.
7.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells

Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTE

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

497
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...

relationships
in Figure 7-3.
simultaneously.
shortcut menu..
NOTE


NOTE

relationships
Apply the result of

to each cell
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
the shortcut menu..

498
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...

shortcut menu..
mode.
3. Click Export.
NOTE

relationships


relationships

NOTE

relationship data

displayed.
5. Click OK.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

499
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Clear the result of


NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

500
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 7-4 Filter
----End
7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning

The CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread the
spectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN code
planning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.
7.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN Codes

Similar to the noise sequence, the pseudo-random number (or PN code) is a type of periodical
binary sequence that seems to be random but actually is regular.
Significance of PN Code Planning

In the CDMA system, the sectors are differentiated by PN code phase offset. The PN code offset
phases are limited, and a maximum of 512 phases can be used. Therefore, PN code offset needs
to be planned. If the reuse distance of PN code offset is too short or the propagation delay is too
long, the propagation of the pilot signals in the air is delayed, compared with the terminal. If the
transmission delay of pilot signals between two cells just compensates for the PN code time
offset, errors occur when the terminal traces pilot signals. If an error occurs during the call
process when the terminal identifies the system, the terminal will be handed over to incorrect
cells, and call drop may occur.
PN Code Planning Scenarios

The CDMA PN codes can be planned on the basis of network topology and in the following
scenarios: co-PN RRU networking, co-deployment of outdoor macro base stations, indoor micro
base stations, and remote RRUs, and repeater networking.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

501
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The PN code planning is applicable to expanded networks or new networks.
7.8.2 Planning PN Codes

This section describes how to use the U-Net to plan PN codes. You must import a PN group
before using this function.
Prerequisites
PN group data has been obtained from customer representatives.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
Step 3 Right-click and choose Open PN Group from the shortcut menu. The PN Group dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Right-click in the dialog box, and choose Import from the shortcut menu.
Step 5 Select a PN group file and import it to the U-Net.
Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2.
Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, set planned PN code parameters. For details about the parameters,
see 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.
Step 9 Click Run.
After PN codes are planned, the PN Display dialog box is displayed. For details about the
parameters, see 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Apply planning results to NEs.

Right-click in the PN Display dialog box, and choose Commit to apply the planning results.
The new PN codes overwrite the existing PN codes.
Show PN code relationships for sectors on the GIS.

1.
In the navigation tree, select the box in front of PN Planning.
2.
On the map, select a sector or click the head of a row in the planning result table.
The system displays the sectors having the same PN code as the selected sector.
7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results

You can filter PN code planning results by specifying a threshold. This helps you to easily locate
the base stations and cells that do not meet the specified thresholds.
Prerequisites
PN code planning is complete.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

502
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
l
Set criteria for checking PN code planning results.

1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.
3.
Right-click and choose Open PN Table from the shortcut menu. The PN Display
4.
In the dialog box, right-click and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. The Audit
Form dialog box is displayed.
5.
Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-6. The U-Net allows you to select
multiple check criteria at a time.
Table 7-6 Conditions for checking PN codes
Parameter
Description
Data Source
Indicates the data source.

l Existing: The PN codes already exist.
l Suggest: The data after PN code planning is not applied
to NEs.
6.
l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Min Distance
Indicates the minimum reuse distance.
Min Layer
Indicates the minimum number of reuse layers.
Min Score
Indicates the minimum reuse score.
Distance Scope
(km)
Indicates the reuse distance scope.
Layer Scope
Indicates the reuse layer scope.
Score Scope
Indicates the reuse score scope.
Neighbour sectors
used the same PN
code
Indicates that the same PN codes exist between neighboring

cells.
Click OK to export a check report.
Perform a 1way-2way check.

1.
2.
3.
Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Check from the shortcut menu. The
1Way-2Way Check dialog box is displayed.
4.
Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-7.

503
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 7-7 1way-2way check criteria
5.
l
Parameter
Description
ARFCN
Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number

(ARFCN).
Check 1-way
Problem
Indicates that the 1-way check is performed.
Check 2-way
Problem
Indicates that the 2-way check is performed.
Base on Existed
Neighbor and PN
Indicates that the check is based on the data on the existing

network.
Base on Planned
Neighbor and PN
Indicates that the check is based on the planning results.
Click OK to export a check report. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.8
Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results.
Filter 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships.

1.
2.
3.
Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Open from the shortcut menu.
4.
On the One way result or Two way result tab page of the displayed Check Result
dialog box, right-click and choose Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation from the
shortcut menu. The Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation dialog box is displayed.
5.
Set the filter conditions by referring to Table 7-8.

Table 7-8 Conditions for filtering 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships
6.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Distance threshold between source cell

and its neighbor cell(km) >=:
Indicates that the distance between the

source cell and its neighboring cell
exceeds the predefined value.
Angle threshold of its neighbor cell

relative to source cell >=:
Indicates that the angle between the

source cell and its neighboring cell
Angle threshold of source cell relative to

its neighbor cell >=:
Indicates that the angle between the

neighboring cell and the source cell
Layer threshold between source cell and

its neighbor cell >=:
Indicates that the number of layers

between the source cell and its
neighboring cell exceeds the predefined
value.
Click OK.
504
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, filtered 1way-2way redundant neighbor
relationships are displayed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, right-click an item and you can delete the
corresponding data item.
7.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes

This section describes how to set the display properties of PN codes on the U-Net. You can set
to display cells with identical or adjacent PN codes or set colors and contrast for the cells with
identical or adjacent PN codes, helping you view the planning result of PN codes.
Prerequisites
PN code planning is complete.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click PN Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcut
menu. See Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Display Option
Step 3 In the displayed Display Options dialog box, set the parameters for setting the display properties
of PN codes. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display
Properties of PN Codes.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

505
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using the
U-Net.
7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes

This section describes the parameters for planning PN codes. You can refer to this section when
viewing PN code planning results in the CDMA PN Plan Setting dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Delete Existed PN
Indicates whether to delete the existing PN codes.
Rhombus AngleA:
Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the number

of layers. The distance between base stations is less than 5
km.
Rhombus AngleB:

of layers. The distance between base stations is not less than
5 km but less than 10 km.
Rhombus AngleC:

10 km but less than 20 km.
Rhombus AngleD:

20 km.
POI
Indicates whether indoor and outdoor cells use the same PN

group.
TRUE: The same PN group is used. FALSE: Different PN
groups are used.
PM
TRUE: PN codes in the same PN group can be allocated to

only the cells with the same geographic location (within the
distance specified by MAXDIST_ALLOWED) under the
same base station. FALSE: PN codes in the same PN group
can be allocated regardless of geographic locations.
MaxDistance
Indicates the maximum distance (km) between cells that the

same PN group is allocated to.
Area
Indicates the area whose PN codes need to be planned.

You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select
only the cells to be planned in the area.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

506
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results

This section describes the parameters for viewing PN code planning results. You can refer to
this section when viewing PN code planning results in the PN Display dialog box.
Parameter
Description
MSC_BSC_BTS_Sector
Indicates the combination of the MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,
and sector ID.
Existed PNG
Indicates the existing PN code group of the NE.
Existed PN
Indicates the existing PN codes of the NE.
Suggest PNG
Indicates the PN groups after the planning.
Suggest PN
Indicates the PN codes after the planning.
Sector Name
Indicates the name of a sector.
Scene
Indicates a scenario.
Score
Indicates the PN code reuse score. This parameter measures

the PN code reuse quality.
Distance
Indicates the PN code reuse distance.
Layer
Indicates the number of layers involved in the PN code

reuse.
Co-Sector
Indicates a sector that shares the PN code with the source

sector.
7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes

This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of PN codes. You can
refer to this section when viewing and setting PN code display properties in the Display
Options dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Suggest
Displays PN codes in the planning result.
Existed
Displays PN codes delivered to the NE.
PN INC
Intervals between adjacent PN codes.
Same PN
Displays cells with identical PN codes.
Neighborhood PN
Displays cells with adjacent PN codes.

507
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 7-10 Parameters on the Same PN tab page

Parameter
Description
Indoor
Sets the color for indoor cells with identical

PN codes.
Outdoor
Sets the color for outdoor cells with identical

PN codes.
Special
Sets the color for special cells with identical

PN codes.
Add To Legend
Displays neighbor relationships on the map

or not.
Transparency
Table 7-11 Parameters on the Neighborhood PN tab page

Parameter
Description
Indoor
Sets the color for indoor cells with identical

PN codes.
Outdoor
Sets the color for outdoor cells with identical

PN codes.
Special
Sets the color for special cells with identical

PN codes.
Add To Legend
Displays neighbor relationships on the map

or not.
Transparency
7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells

This section describes the parameters for planning CDMA neighboring cells.
Parameter
Description
Methods Select
Selects a network planning scenario. In the CDMA network,

the neighboring cells can be planned only on the basis of
network topology.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

508
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description

existed Neighbors

relationships.
replanned.
Force Co-site Distance
Configures internal cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.
Area

match cases.
Table 7-13 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page

Parameter
Description
Max Neighbour Number of

Indoor Cell

neighboring cells.
Max Neighbour Number of

Outdoor Cell

neighboring cells.
Force Symmetry

neighboring cells.
Main Frequency
Indicates the main ARFCN.
Base on Main Frequency
Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN neighboring cells are

configured based on the configured main-ARFCN
If this option is selected, the non-main-ARFCN neighboring
relationship can be configured only if the main-ARFCN
neighboring relationship has been configured.
Base on Topology
Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN intra-frequency

neighboring cell is planned based on the topology.
If this option is selected, the neighboring cell relationship
can be configured regardless of whether main-ARFCN
neighboring cell relationship has been configured.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

509
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Cells
Parameter
Description
Display Links
Display Cell Color

relationship table.
Selected Cell Color
Inter-RAT Neighbors
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Legend
Description
Intra Frequency

Inter Frequency

Inter-RAT

Intra Technology



Paired Inter-RAT



510
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Legend
Description
Add To Legend
Transparency
NOTE
neighboring cells
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Source Cell
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Intra-Technology
Inter-RAT
Empty List
Missing Co-Site
Missing Symmetry
List > No:

Neighbors

Same PCI
None
Interface

not.

511
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

complete.
Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
actual tab page.
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name
Cause

network.
by users.
the serving cell.
Confirm

Blind Handover
7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results

This section describes the parameters for viewing results of 1way-2way checking
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

512
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 7-19 Parameters on the One way resulttab page

Parameter
Description
PN
Indicates the PN codes.
SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC
Indicates the three sectors with One way

relations.
DistanceAB
Indicates the distance between sector A and

sector B.
DistanceBC
Indicates the distance between sector B and

sector C.
Table 7-20 Parameters on the Two way resulttab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
PN
Indicates the PN codes.
SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC<->SectorD
Indicates the four sectors with Two way

relations.
DistanceAB
Indicates the distance between sector A and

sector B.
DistanceBC
Indicates the distance between sector B and

sector C.
DistanceCD
Indicates the distance between sector C and

sector D.

513
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Multi-Mode Network Planning
About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual network
stations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on the
hybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTS
network coverage range to meet your network planning requirements.
8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning
This section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net.
8.5 Adding a Device
8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network
detailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You need
to define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

514
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters

separately.
8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network
channel quality.
8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network
After creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network.
The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based on
different networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM
network neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed after
considering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

515
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning

This section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this section
when planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net.
Figure 8-1 shows the process of multi-mode network planning.
Figure 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

516
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Table 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning

No.
Procedure
Description
Creating a project
Importing
geographic data

Managing
propagation models
and bands

Adding a device

Setting traffic
parameters

8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode
Network.
Setting NE
parameters

Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters.

loss
Planning
neighboring cells
For details, see 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a

Multi-Mode Network.
Predicting network
performance
For details, see 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS DualMode Network.
10
Exporting network
planning results

Planning.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

517
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
l
network.
Procedure

Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l

file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

518
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
NOTE

NOTE

Context

Context
Setting Bands.
8.5 Adding a Device

Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

519
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network

detailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You need
to define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation.

Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. For
details, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.

Context
For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see
3.6.6 Setting User Types.

Context
8.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service Types

Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

520
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...

Services > RAT.
3. Set new service type parameters.
l For GSM networks, see Parameters for Setting the
GSM Services.
l For UMTS networks, see Parameters for Setting the
UMTS Services.
l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for Setting the
LTE-FDD Services.
l UnionService: see Table 8-2.
Modify an existing service

type

Services > Network system > An existing service type.
3. Modify service type parameters.
Table 8-2 Parameters for setting the multi-mode services

Parameter
Meaning
Name
Type

l CSServie: voice services.
l PSServie: data services.
AMR Rate(kbit/s)
Indicates the rate of a voice service. The unit is kbit/s.

The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.
Activity
Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This

parameter is required for only voice services.
l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0
to 1.
l Uplink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
Max Throughput(kbit/s)

l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges
from 0 to 107.
l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value
NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

521
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Min Throughput(kbit/s)

l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges
from 0 to 107.
l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value
NOTE
Average Throughput(kbit/s)

NOTE
Transmission Efficiency

l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from
0 to 1.
l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges
from 0 to 1.
Select Service
Indicates the type of a service that processes on a specific

network.
----End
8.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal Types

This section describes how to create a new multi-mode terminal type for planning and analysis
on multi-mode networks.
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

522
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
RAT.
type
3. Set parameters of the new terminal type.
l For GSM networks, see Parameters for setting GSM terminal
types.
l For UMTS networks, seeParameters for setting UMTS terminal
types.
l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for setting LTE-FDD
terminal types.
l UnionTerminal: For example, if a multi-mode terminal supports
both GSM and UMTS, set GSM and UMTS in Select Terminal.
Modify an
existing terminal
Network system > An existing terminal type.
type
3. Modify parameters of the existing terminal type.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End
8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters

separately.

the same way.
Context

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

523
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template

Procedure
l

1.
On the toolbar, select Template Management from the

dropdown list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 8-3.
2.
drop-down list.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

524
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Such as
l

1.

2.
Set properties of the BTS template.

For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD base station template, see
Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.
For details about setting the properties of an GSM base station template, see
Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
For details about setting the properties of an UMTS base station template, see
Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
3.
l
Click OK.

1.
2.
3.
Query and modify properties of the base station template.

For details about querying and modifying the properties of an LTE-FDD base
station template, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station
Templates.
For details about querying and modifying the properties of an GSM base station
template, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.
For details about querying and modifying the properties of an UMTS base station
template, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.
4.
Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
station template.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

525
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context

Context
8.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell Parameters

This section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the UNet automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. You must set parameters for multi-mode cells
if the transceiver is a multi-mode transceiver.
Procedure
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set properties of cells on the Network system tab page.
l For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells.
l For details about setting the properties of a GSM cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of GSM Cells.
l For details about setting the properties of a UMTS cell, see Parameters for Setting the
Parameters of UMTS Cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network

channel quality.
8.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode

Network
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

526
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Basic Knowledge of Coverage Prediction Counters in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode

Network
This section describes the meaning of each coverage prediction counter.
The coverage prediction counters in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network are as follows:
l
CoverageBySignelLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal chip power is greater than
the sensitivity of the receiver) of a cell.
CoverageByCirLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal CIR is greater than the
specified threshold) of a cell.
Procedure for Performing Coverage Prediction

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

527
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Prediction Algorithm in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network

In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, the prediction is performed separately in the GSM
network and the UMTS network. Therefore, for details about the prediction algorithm, see GSM
Prediction Algorithm and UMTS Prediction Algorithm.

l
Factor
Meaning
Loss caused by the

human body

Feeder loss of a
terminal
Antenna gain of a
terminal
Antenna fading of a
terminal
Path loss
Shadow fading

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

528
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Factor
Meaning
Penetration loss

and leaves.

station

station

Prerequisites
l
Context
l
Calculation
Force calculation
Procedure
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

529
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...
Calculate

Calculate forcibly

Click

in Figure 8-5.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
directory.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

530
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
8.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode

Network
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
model.
5.
6.
Click OK.

Figure 8-6 New
select prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction
Counters and Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters.
Step 5 Click Next.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description of
parameters, see 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS DualMode Network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

531
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 7 Click OK.

----End
Follow-up Procedure

Procedure
l
----End

Procedure
1.
2.
3.

1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

532
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
on the map window.
4.
5.
----End
Example
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Follow-up Procedure
l
menu.
menu.
8.8.6 Exporting Planning Results

Bin point.
Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in Batches

Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

533
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Exporting Detailed Prediction Results by Bin Points

points in a specified area.
Procedure
Step 2 Select the objects to be exported.
If you need to...
Then...
Export the detailed prediction

results of a prediction group
Export the detailed prediction

results of a single counter in a
prediction group
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >

counter item.
Step 3 Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.
The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points in the selected area.
----End
Printing Coverage Prediction Results in Batches

Context
8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS

Dual-Mode Network
This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting its properties.
You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Group
dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

534
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

Parameter
Meaning
Group Name
Indicates the name of a prediction group,

which uniquely identifies a prediction group.
The U-Net enters the default name of each
new prediction group.
Prediction Type
Selects the prediction of the GSM/UMTS

dual-mode network.
Study Selected
Indicates the prediction counter.
Calculate Now
Indicates whether to calculate the prediction

counter immediately.
Parameters in the Group Properties dialog box

Table 8-4 Parameters on the General tab Page
Parameter
Meaning
Name
Resolution(m)
Indicates the probability of cell edge

coverage, that is, the probability that the
receive signal strength is stronger than the
specified threshold at the edge of a cell.
Polygon
Selects the area calculated in prediction.
Technology
Selects both GSM and UMTS.
With Shadow
Indicates whether shadow fading is

considered in the calculation.
Indoor Coverage
Indicates whether penetration loss is

considered in the calculation.
Table 8-5 Parameters on the GSM tab Page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Meaning
CIRGate(dB)
Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used to

determine the GSM coverage area based on
CIR.
Sensitivity(dBm)
Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.

535
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Meaning
Terminal
Indicates the type of a terminal.
Service
Indicates the service type.
Table 8-6 Parameters on the UMTS tab Page

Parameter
Meaning
CIRGate(dB)
Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used to

determine the UMTS coverage area based on
CIR.
Sensitivity(dBm)
Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.
Terminal
Indicates the type of a terminal.
Service
Indicates the service type.
8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network

After creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network.
The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based on
different networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSM
network neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed after
considering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.

l
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
536
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

l

l

NOTE
cells.

Prerequisites
l
cells.

relationships.
by cell name.

technology.
Context
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

537
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
NOTE

Step 6 Click OK.
----End
8.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode Network

The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. With this function
enabled, the neighboring cell relationships for each cell can be planned automatically. This
reduces the number of handovers due to improper neighboring cell configuration. For a hybrid
network supporting LTE-FDD, the U-Net plans a GSM/UMTS neighboring cell for blind
handover from a LTE-FDD cell.
Context
l
The U-Net supports cell planning in GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD dual-mode or multi-mode

networks.
The U-Net performs automatic neighboring cell planning on a per RAT basis. For example,
in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, automatic neighboring cell planning must be
performed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network.
In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, UMTS neighboring cell planning can be performed

in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-sited GSM cell.
On a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multi-mode network, LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning

can be performed in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-site GSM or UMTS
cell.
This section describes the neighboring cell planning on a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multimode network.
Procedure
Step 1 For neighboring cell planning of a GSM network, see 5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring
Cells.
Step 2 For neighboring cell planning of a UMTS network, see 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning
for a New Network.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

538
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 For neighboring cell planning of an LTE-FDD network, see Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring
Cells.
----End
8.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells

Prerequisites
Procedure
NOTE

If you need to...
Then...

relationships
in Figure 8-7.
simultaneously.
shortcut menu..
NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

539
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...


NOTE

relationships
Apply the result of

to each cell
the shortcut menu..

shortcut menu..


mode.
3. Click Export.
NOTE

relationships

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

540
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If you need to...
Then...

relationships

NOTE

relationship data

displayed.
5. Click OK.
Clear the result of


NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

541
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

542
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 8-8 Filter
----End

complete.
Parameter
Description
Intra-Frequency
Inter-Frequency
Inter-RAT
actual tab page.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Neighbor Name

543
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Cause

network.
by users.
the serving cell.
Confirm

Blind Handover
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

544
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
FAQ
About This Chapter

This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net.
9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net
This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensure
that the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net.
9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support
Website
This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packages
at huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available at
huawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages
based on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you download
installation packages from huawei support website.
9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area
In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported match
those in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displays
the Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in this
section.
9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft
Office 2007
This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file
in Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net to
import data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has been
installed.
9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of
the Map Contains Chinese Characters
This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system when
the directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information when
the directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operating
system.
9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly
This section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is
used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

545
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView
function.
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project
to Display Properly
This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating
a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating
a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after
the printer is disconnected from the network.
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System
This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when
the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the
following information if the preceding problem occurs.
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure
This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged
or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can
refer to this section when a project fails to be created.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

546
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing

the U-Net
This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensure
that the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net.
Question
How do I select the required software before installing the U-Net?
Answer
The software to be installed in advance varies according to the U-Net version. Select the software
to be installed based on the U-Net version.
If...
Then...
The U-Net 3.5 is to be installed
l Install the Microsoft Office 2003.

l Log in to http://www.microsoft.com,
and download the .NET Framework2.0.
The U-Net 3.6 or U-Net 3.7 is to be installed
Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and

download the .NET Framework3.5.
The U-Net 3.8 is to be installed
Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, and

download the .NET Framework4.0.
The Volcano propagation model is required
Contact Siradel to purchase Volcano 3.1.2 or

a later version.
----End
9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software

Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website
This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packages
at huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available at
huawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages
based on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you download
installation packages from huawei support website.
Question
How to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages at Huawei support website?
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

547
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Answer
Step 1 View the four GENEX U-Net software installation packages at http://support.huawei.com, as
Figure 9-1 GENEX U-Net V300R008C00
l Huawei.UNet32(exclude framework)
Supports 32-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet64
Supports 64-bit operating system, including the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet64(exclude framework)
Supports 64-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.
l Huawei.UNet32
Supports 32-bit operating system, including the .net framework.
NOTE
l Normally, Windows XP is a 32-bit operating system.

l Windows 7 operating system falls into 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems. Right-click My
Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view bits of the operating system and
select corresponding installation packages.
Step 2 Check whether the .net framework is installed in Add/Remove Programs and select installation
packages based on the actual situation.
If...
Then...
The .net framework has

been installed.
Download the installation package excluding the .net framework.
The .net framework is

not installed.
Download the installation package including the .net framework.
----End
9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping

Area
In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported match
those in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displays
the Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in this
section.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

548
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Question
How to check field matching in the Field Mapping area?
Answer
Step 1 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Source row, as shown in
Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Field Mapping area
l The Source row displays the column fields of the file to be imported.
l If the Source row cannot display field names correctly, you need to modify the file to be
imported.
l The U-Net has requirements on the format of the file to be imported. Therefore, it is
recommended that you export the existing data in the system to a file, which is used as a
template. After that, you modify data based on the template and then import the file to the
U-Net.
Step 2 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Destination row.
If...
Then...
Display IGNORE.
l It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported do not match

those in the system. Therefore, the data of this column cannot
be imported to the U-Net.
l If the fields in the file to be imported match some existing fields
in the system. You can click
match them.
next to the cell to manually
NOTE
l Among the fields in the system, there are one or more fields that must
be matched. These fields must match those in the file to be imported.
Otherwise, you cannot click Import or the system prompts an error
message when you click Import.
l For example, when you import a site file, Site Name is a field that must
be matched.
Display existing field

names in the system.
It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported match those in

the system. Therefore, the data of this column can be imported to
the U-Net.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

549
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export

Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007
This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS file
in Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net to
import data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has been
installed.
Question
When data is being imported into or exported from an XLS file, a dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-3. How can I solve the problem? The following takes exporting neighboring
cell relationships for example.
Figure 9-3 Export neighbor relation
Answer
Set regional language of the operating system to be the same as the language of the current
version of Microsoft Office 2007 by referring to workaround measures provided by the
Microsoft.
If the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 is English, set regional language
of the operating system to English (United States) on the Regional Options tab page, as shown
in Figure 9-4.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

550
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-4 Regional and Language Options
----End
9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7

Operating System When the Directory of the Map Contains
Chinese Characters
This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system when
the directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information when
the directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operating
system.
Question
How to solve the problem if a map fails to be imported and displayed in an English Windows 7
operating system because the directory of the map contains Chinese characters?
Answer
Step 1 Choose Control Panel > Region and Language > Administrative, as shown in Figure 9-5.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

551
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-5 Region and Language
Step 2 Click Change system locale.

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select Chinese (Simplified,PRC) from the Current system
locale drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 9-6.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

552
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-6 Region and Language Settings
Step 4 Restart the PC.

----End
9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly

This section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is
used, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer
to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthView
function.
Question
How do I solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure to
load the Google Earth, garbled images, abnormal display during remote connection attempts,
and other abnormal display events?
Answer
Step 1 Ensure that the Google Earth client in 6.0.3.2197 or later is installed.
Step 2 You are advised to select DirectX in the Graphics Mode area, as shown in Figure 9-7.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

553
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Figure 9-7 Google Earth Options
----End
9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the

Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly
This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creating
a project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creating
a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly after
the printer is disconnected from the network.
Question
The progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new
project runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. How can I solve the
problem?
Answer
If you set a remote printer as a default printer, the access to a local printer takes a long period
of time or fails. In this case, the system runs slowly or the progress bar for creating a project
remains unchanged when you obtain printer parameters to create a project.
Set a local printer that is accessible as the default printer or delete all printers.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

554
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit

Operating System
This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when
the U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to the
following information if the preceding problem occurs.
Question
How to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used to
draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system?
Answer
The MSVCR71.DLL system library file needs to be invoked when you are using the U-Net to
draw a graph. This system library file is delivered with all Windows operating systems by default
except the Windows XP 64-bit operating system.
In a Windows XP 32-bit operating system, search the MSVCR71.DLL system library file in
the System32 directory. Then copy the file to the SysWOW64 directory in the Windows XP
64-bit operating system.
----End
9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in

Project Creation Failure
This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damaged
or missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You can
refer to this section when a project fails to be created.
Question
How do I solve the problem when a project fails to be created and the dialog box in Figure
9-8 is displayed?
Figure 9-8 Creating project failed
Answer
Step 1 Choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

555
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
9 FAQ
Step 2 Type regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll in the dialog box.

Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Restart the computer.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

556
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
10
U-Net Auxiliary Functions
About This Chapter

The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zooming
in or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display.
10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map
This section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, change
the scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left,
or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling does
not change.
10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map
This section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance between
two points on the map by using the distance measurement tool.
10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points
You can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terrain
information about the two points.
10.4 Querying the Legend Information
This section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window.
You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results,
and capacity simulation results in the map window.
10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth
The U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons)
and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the Google
Earth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed in
three-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results and
reduces the workload of field survey.
10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties
This section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported,
the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You can
select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is
accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so
that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

557
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers

You can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .png
or .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of the
actual geographic data.
10.8 Managing Table Windows
You can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and traffic
parameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing or
switching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the information
provided in this section.
10.9 Managing Docked Windows
The U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysis
window, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style of
docked windows.
10.10 Managing the Explorer Window
The Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In the
Explorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manage
each node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You can
modify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the data
corresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a large
amount of data.
10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs
This section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports several
modes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about base
stations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quickly
identify a base station.
10.12 Searching Sites and Cells
This section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searching
sites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you need
to type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell,
or repeater in the map window.
10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells
This section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on the
grouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existing
attributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customize
a grouping mode.
10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon
Display the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular grid
based on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reduces
adjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency.
10.15 Printing Planning Results
You can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent network
construction.
10.16 Calibrating Propagation Models
You can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path loss
matrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value.
10.17 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

558
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

559
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map

This section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, change
the scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left,
or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling does
not change.
Procedure
l
Zoom in on or zoom out on a map.

You can zoom in on and zoom out on a map by changing the position of the mouse pointer.
1.
Click
on the toolbar to zoom in on or zoom out on a map.
2.
Click on the map.

Click in the map window to zoom in on the map.
Right-click in the map window to zoom out on the map.
TIP
l You can scroll the mouse wheel forward or backward to zoom in on or zoom out on the
map.
l Alternatively, you can right-click in the map window and choose Zoom In or Zoom Out
to zoom in on or zoom out on the map.
Magnify an area on a map.

1.
Click
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose
Define a Zoom Area from the shortcut menu.
2.
Click a corner of the area to be magnified on the map.
3.
Hold and drag the mouse pointer to the diagonal corner of the area.
Release the mouse button. Then, the selected area is magnified.
Select a scaling.
on the toolbar.
1.
Click
2.
Select a scaling from the drop-down list box.

If the required scaling is not available in the list, you can click
, type the required scaling in the box, and press Enter. The UNet zooms in on or zooms out on the map based on the specified scaling.
Move a map.
1.
Click
2.
Move the mouse pointer to the map and drag the map to the required direction.
on the toolbar.
Center the map.

To enable the map to center on the map, click
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

on the toolbar.
560
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
To enable the map to center on an object in the map window, right-click an object in
the Explorer window and choose Center in The Map from the shortcut menu.
----End
10.2 Measuring Distance on the Map

This section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance between
two points on the map by using the distance measurement tool.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose Distance
Measurement from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Click a point on the map and use it as the starting point for measuring the distance.
Then, the starting point is fixed. When the pointer moves away from the starting point, a red
dotted line appears between the pointer and the starting point. The distance between the pointer
and the starting point is displayed in the status bar in real time.
Step 3 Click another point on the map and use it as the second point for measuring the distance.
Then, the red dotted line between the starting point and the second line becomes a red continuous
line.
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to add several points to form a folding line.
Then, the following information is displayed in the status bar:
Distance: Distance between the second-to-last point and the last point/Distance between the first
point and the last point
Step 5 Double-click the line or right-click in the map window to complete the distance measurement.
----End
10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points

You can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terrain
information about the two points.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar in the U-Net main interface.
The Terrain View window is displayed in the U-Net main interface.

Step 2 Click in the map window to determine the start point of the terrain analysis line.
After determining the start point, move the cursor. A dotted line appears between the cursor and
the start point.
Right-click to exit the drawing of the terrain analysis line.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

561
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Click in another place in the map window to determine the end point of the terrain analysis line.
After the end point is determined, a continuous line appears between the two points.
The terrain profile of the two points is displayed in the Terrain View window.
NOTE
l The system allows you to draw only one terrain analysis line.
l After a terrain analysis line is drawn, click in any place in the map window. The original terrain analysis
line disappears and the system begins to draw a new terrain analysis line.
Step 4 As shown in Figure 10-1, set the following parameters in the Terrain View window:
l Transceiver height: Indicates the height of a transmitter.
l Receiver height: Indicates the height of a receiver.
l Show building: Indicates whether to show the buildings.
l Frequency: Indicates the frequency of a transmitter.
After the parameters are set, the Terrain View window will automatically update and display
the terrain profile.
Figure 10-1 Terrain View window
----End
10.4 Querying the Legend Information

This section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window.
You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results,
and capacity simulation results in the map window.
Context
You can select legend objects for display based on the service analysis requirement. For example,
during the prediction, the map displays multiple prediction results and you may find it difficult
to query the required prediction result. In this case, you can select or clear a legend object to
display or hide certain prediction results. Therefore, you can focus on the key services. Then,
only the selected legend object is displayed in the legend window.
This section describes how to query the legend information about the prediction results. The
procedure for querying other legend information is similar to the procedure for querying the
legend information about the prediction results.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

562
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Select a legend object.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.
3.
4.
Click the Display tab.
5.
In the last column of the object list, select legend objects as required.
NOTE
The non-selected object will not be displayed in the legend window.
If the default legend objects cannot meet your analysis requirements, you can define new
objects. For example, to add a new legend object before an existing legend object, you can
select the existing legend object and choose Actions > Insert Before; then, the system
creates the new legend object automatically.
6.
Select Add to legend. The legend of prediction is displayed in the Legend window.
7.
Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the
Legend window.
Step 2 Set the display parameters of the legend.

You can set the color, description, and value range of a legend in the object list.
Choose Window > Legend. The Legend window is displayed.
After the prediction calculation is complete, the description information and color of all the
selected legend objects in the project are displayed in the legend window.
----End
10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth

The U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons)
and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the Google
Earth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed in
three-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results and
reduces the workload of field survey.
Prerequisites
l
A coordinate system is available.
The PC is connected to the Internet.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. The Earth View dialog box is displayed.
You must set a coordinate system. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.3.7 Configuring
the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

563
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 2 Select the object to be displayed on the Google Earth. For detailed description of parameters,
see 10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.
Step 3 Click View to connect the U-Net to the Google Earth.
Step 4 Optional: Click Save to save the selected U-Net data to a .kmz file.
By default, the .kmz file is saved on the desktop of the PC and the file name is
UNet_Generated.kmz. You can also click
to reset the path to save the file and the file name.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can query objects displayed in threedimensional mode on the Google Earth. See Figure 10-2.
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can select or clear the objects
described in Step 2 in the navigation tree in the Explorer window of the U-Net. In this way,
the objects can be displayed or hidden on the Google Earth.
After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can modify the objects described in
Step 2, such as creating or deleting a prediction group or a polygon. Upon completion of
the modification, perform Step 1 to Step 4 again to refresh the display status of the Google
Earth.
Figure 10-2 Three-dimensional display of objects on the Google Earth
10.6 Setting Layer Display Properties

This section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported,
the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You can
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

564
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer is
accurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers so
that you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.
Prerequisites
Context
A map consists of a series of layers. The top layer can be clearly viewed in the map. It can also
be clearly viewed after the map is printed. The visibility of the bottom layer depends on the
definition and transparency of the upper layers.
On the U-Net, the display sequence of the layers is determined by the sequence of the nodes
under the Map node on the Geo tab page in the Explorer window. You can adjust the sequence
of each node under the Map node to adjust the display sequence of each layer.
You can use the U-Net to adjust the display sequence of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text,
Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights and the display sequence of the sublayers of these
layers. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of the prediction counters in the map
window.
Procedure
l
Select the layer objects to be displayed.

In the Explorer window, you can select or clear the check box of a layer object to display
or hide the layer object. For example, if you select the check box of Map on the Geo tab
page, all the layers corresponding to the nodes under the Map node are displayed in the
map window. If you clear the check box of a node under the Map node, the layer
corresponding to the node is hidden in the map window.
NOTE
The hidden object in the map window is still taken into account during calculation.
Adjust the position of a layer.

During network planning, the U-Net supports the offset of the layers Satellitic,
Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights. This enables users to adjust
the map and positions of the sites.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Adjust Map from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Map dialog box is
displayed.. See Figure 10-3.

565
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 10-3 Adjust Map
4.
Select the layer to be adjusted from the Map Layer drop-down list.
If only one layer is selected after the layer is selected, its geodetic coordinates at the
northern boundary are displayed in the Top of Layer field and its geodetic coordinates
at the western boundary is displayed in the Left of Layer field. The vertical offset of
the layer is displayed in the Y Offset text box and the horizontal offset of the layer is
displayed in the X Offset text box. If two or more layers are selected or no layer is
selected, no value is displayed for Top of Layer, Left of Layer, Y Offset, and X
Offset.
NOTE
For the offset of the layers Geometry, Text, and Vector, The values of Top of Layer and Left
of Layer are not displayed. For the offset of the layers Satellitic, Buildings, Clutter, and
Heights, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer indicate the geodetic coordinates of
corresponding layers.
5.
Type the layer offset in the text box in the middle and set the offset direction by clicking
Up, Down, Left, or Right.
The offset of a layer ranges from 10 meters to 10,000 meters.
6.
Click Close. The layer position adjustment is complete.

The positions of layers are refreshed in the map window accordingly.
Adjust the display sequence of layers.

1.
On the Geo tab page of the Explorer window, select the nodes corresponding to the
target layer objects under the Map node.
The layer objects include the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings,
Clutter, and Heights.
2.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Click a layer object and drag it to the new position.

566
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
The horizontal black line indicates the position where the object is to be placed when
you release the mouse. After you drag the object, the U-Net automatically refreshes
the display effect of the map based on the adjusted sequence.
----End
10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers

You can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .png
or .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of the
actual geographic data.
Prerequisites
Procedure
Step 1 Select the objects to be exported.
If you need to...
Then...
Export
1. Under the Geo tab in the Explorer window, select the layers to be
overlapped layers
exported under the Map node.
2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.
Export a single
layer

2. In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.
Step 2 Choose Save As from the shortcut menu. The Export Map Layer dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Set the area for export.
l Full Map: exports the entire map.
l A polygon: exports the external rectangular area of a polygon.
Step 4 Set the resolution for export.
l Origin Map Scale: exports images according to the original resolution of the geographic
data.
l Current Map Scale: exports images according to the display resolution of the geographic
data in the map window.
Step 5 Set the save path, file name, and file format of the exported file.
TIP
The higher the resolution is, the larger the map size is. Before exporting a map, ensure that the save path
has sufficient free disk space.
Step 6 Click Save.

----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

567
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
10.8 Managing Table Windows

You can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and traffic
parameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing or
switching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the information
provided in this section.
Procedure
l
Table 10-1 lists the common operations provided in a table window.

Table 10-1 Common operations provided in a table window
If...
Then...
Close a table window.
Click
Display a table window at

the very front.
Double-click the title of the table window.
Switch a table window.
Click the tab title. Alternatively, you can click on the

right and then select the required table window from the
drop-down list.
Drag a column in a table

window.
Click the column name to select it. Then, click the column
name again, hold the left mouse button, and drag the
column to the required position when the mouse arrow
Usually, table windows are displayed as tabs in the

working area of the U-Net main window.
changes to
Not all the table windows support this function.

l
Table 10-2 describes the shortcut menus provided in a table window.

NOTE
If a shortcut menu item in a table window grays out, it indicates that the function is not supported in the
table window or the function is currently unavailable.
Table 10-2 Shortcut menus provided in a table window

Name
Description
Import
Imports a file in the .txt, .csv, .xls, or .xlsx format.

NOTE
l If a file fails to be imported, check whether the parameter names in the
file to be imported match those in the table window.
l You can right-click in a table window and then choose Display
Columns from the shortcut menu to display all the parameter names of
the current table.
Export
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Exports the data of all the available columns in a table. The file
exported is in the .txt, .csv, or .xls format.
568
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Name
Description
Record Properties
Displays the property panel of the NE corresponding to the selected

cell.
Table Fields
Opens the window for customizing table fields. The window is used
for setting customized fields and supports the Site, Transceiver, and
Cell tables.
You can click Add, Delete, or Properties to add, delete, or modify
a customized field. For parameter description, see 10.17.2
Parameters for Setting Custom Fields.
Display Columns
Opens the Columns to be displayed window, which is used to

show or hide table columns.
Hide Columns
Hides the currently selected column. After performing this

operation, you can use the Display Columns function to show the
column again.
TIP
You can click a column title to select the column.
Freeze Columns
Freezes the currently selected column.

A frozen column is displayed as the first column in a table. When
you view table data, the frozen column is displayed in the window
all the time for viewing.
Unfreeze all
Columns
Unfreezes a frozen column.

l This function is available after you perform the Freeze
Columns operation.
l Before performing this operation, you must select a table
column.
Copy
Copies selected data.
Paste
Pastes data.
Delete
Deletes data in the selected row.
Filter by Selection
Filters data according to the selected cell.

Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of the
selected cell. If the data is consistent, the system displays the data
record corresponding to the selected cell.
TIP
You can also select multiple cells in a same column and then perform data
filtering. If the data of any cell is the same as that of other cells in the
column, the data remains to be displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

569
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Name
Description
Filter Excluding
Selection
Filters data reversely according to the selected cell.

l Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of
the selected cell. If the data is different, the system displays the
data record corresponding to the selected cell.
l You can also select multiple cells in a same column and then
perform data reverse filtering. If the data is not the same as that
of other cells in the column, the data remains to be displayed.
Remove Filter
Removes all the filter conditions.

This function is available after you perform the Filter by
Selection or Filter Excluding Selection operation.
Sort Ascending
Sorts table data in the selected column in ascending order.
Sort Descending
Sorts table data in the selected column in descending order.
NOTE
The system saves the current table settings while saving the project, for example, display order of
columns, row height, and column width.
----End
10.9 Managing Docked Windows

The U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysis
window, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style of
docked windows.
Procedure
l
Display a docked window.

If you want to display a docked window, select Window > Name of the docked
window.
If you do not want to display a docked window, deselect Window > Name of the docked
window.
Hide a docked window.

When a docked window is not active, you can click at the upper right corner of the
window to hide it at the window border. When you place the pointer at the corresponding
position of the window border, the system automatically displays the docked window.
When you move the pointer away, the system automatically hides the docked window.
at the upper right
To undo the operation of hiding a docked window, you can click
corner of the window. Then, the hidden docked window is displayed.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Float a docked window.

570
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Double-click the title bar of the docked window. The docked window moves away from
the dock area and floats over the workspace. If you double-click the title bar again, the
docked window returns to the previous dock area.
You can move a docked window by clicking or moving the title bar.
----End
10.10 Managing the Explorer Window

The Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In the
Explorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manage
each node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You can
modify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the data
corresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a large
amount of data.
Context
The Explorer window provides the following sections:
l
GEO (
Data (
Network (
Operation (
), which provides entries to geographic data management

), which provides entries to radio data management and calculation
), which provides entries to engineering parameter management
), which provides entries to prediction, simulation, and planning.
For details about each section, see 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net. This section describes only
the basic operations of the Explorer window.
Procedure
l
Switch to a specific section in the Explorer window.

Click a tab in the Explorer window to switch to the corresponding section. For example,
to display the Data section, click the Data tab.
Expand or collapse a section in the Explorer window.

The objects are organized in the form of nodes in each section. Any section that contains
one or more object nodes has an expand button ( ) or a collapse button ( ) next to the
section name. To expand a section, click next to the section name.
Display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding node
in the navigation tree of the Explorer window.
You can display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding
node in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can deselect the node
corresponding to an object to hide this object on the map. In this way, another object can
be clearly displayed on the map. For example, you can hide all the prediction results except
one prediction result. In this way, the reserved prediction result can be clearly displayed.
The following description takes the hiding of one object as an example to explain this
operation. Click a tab in the Explorer window and then deselect an object under the tab.
The deselected object is hidden and will not be displayed in the map window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

571
GENEX U-Net
User Guide

NOTE
l The hidden object is not displayed in the map window, but is still considered during calculation.
l You can hide all the contents under a node by deselecting the node name. If the check box next to a
node is displayed as , it indicates that certain objects are displayed and certain objects are hidden
under this node.
----End
10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs

This section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports several
modes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about base
stations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quickly
identify a base station.
Context
The method for setting the display style of the Site is similar to that of the Transceiver. This
section takes setting the display style of the Transceiver as an example.
Procedure
Step 3 Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set the display style. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.4 Parameters for Setting
NE Display Properties.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
All the NEs in the project are displayed in the map window according to the preset display style.
10.12 Searching Sites and Cells

This section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searching
sites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you need
to type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell,
or repeater in the map window.
Procedure
l
Search a site or a cell by using the toolbar.

1.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
On the toolbar, choose Edit > Find. Then, select an NE type from the Find drop-down
list box, as shown in Figure 10-4.
572
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Figure 10-4 Find
2.
Type the NE name in the Name text box, as shown in Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-5 Name
3.
Click Enter.
The U-Net automatically locates the NE in the map window.
Search a site or a cell in the corresponding search window.

1.
2.
3.
Choose Find from the shortcut menu. The Find Transceiver dialog box is displayed.
4.
Set search conditions.

For details, see 10.17.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations.
5.
Click Find.
The search result is displayed in the Result area and the statistical result is displayed
in the lower part of the dialog box.
6.
Click Geometry to locate the selected cell in the map window.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Export base station data.

In the Find Transceiver dialog box, click Export to export data of the located base station.
For detailed operations, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.
Delete a transceiver.
Select the transceiver to be deleted in the Result area and click Delete.
View transceiver data.

Click Open in the Find Transceiver dialog box to view transceiver parameters.
10.13 Grouping Sites and Cells

This section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on the
grouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existing
attributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customize
a grouping mode.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

573
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 1 Select a grouping mode.
If...
Then...
The predefined
grouping modes
meet your
requirements
Go to Step 3.
The predefined
grouping modes do
not meet your
requirements
Customize a grouping mode. Go to Step 2.
Grouping modes are Go to Step 6 to set the grouping modes to be displayed.

not displayed after
you choose Group
By from the shortcut
menu
Step 2 Customize a grouping mode.
1.
2.
In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver.
3.
Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
4.
Right-click the table and choose Table Fields from the shortcut menu. The Transceiver
Table Fields dialog box is displayed.
5.
Click Add. The Field Define dialog box is displayed.
6.
Set a new grouping mode.

l Group: name of the customized group. In normal cases, you do not need to set this
parameter.
l Legend: field name. If you type a new field name in the text box, the field name is
displayed in the table.
l Type: field type. You can select Text, Integer, Double, or True/False from the dropdown list box.
l Size: length of the field name. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type is
set to Text.
l Default Value: You are advised to retain the default setting of this parameter.
l Choice List: field value. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type is set to
Text, Integer, or Double. You can type the value of each field in the Choice List text
box and separate them by pressing Enter.
7.
Click OK. The new grouping mode takes effect.

Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

574
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 5 Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut menu.
The system automatically groups cells or sites based on the selected grouping mode.
Step 6 Customize the grouping modes to be displayed.
1.
2.
Select Site or Transceiver in the navigation tree.
3.
Right-click Site or Transceiver and choose Group By > More from the shortcut menu.
The GroupBy Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-6. The following
takes the Site node for example.
Figure 10-6 GroupBy Config dialog box
4.
In the GroupBy Config dialog box, select the customized grouping mode that needs to be
displayed when you choose Group By from the shortcut menu.
5.
Click OK.
NOTE
You can right-click Site and choose Group By > Grouping Mode to set secondary grouping modes.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

575
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
After the grouping is complete, view the grouping result.
Site groups are displayed based the grouping mode under the Site node in the navigation tree.
10.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon

Display the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular grid
based on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reduces
adjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency.
Prerequisites
The value of Hexagon Radius for the transmitter is not empty during site deployment or
engineering parameter import.
Procedure
on the toolbar. The cell cellular grid is displayed in the map window, as shown in
Step 1 Click
Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7 Show Cell Hexagon
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

576
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l After the transmitter location is changed, the cellular grid also moves to the new location.
l After the transmitter is deactivated or deleted, the cellular grid of the transmitter disappears.
Step 2 Click
again. The cellular grid in the map window disappears.
NOTE
The Hexagon Radius(m) attribute of the transmitter determines the size of the hexagon cellular grid. After
the value of Hexagon Radius(m) is changed, the size of the hexagon cellular grid on the map is also
changed.
----End
10.15 Printing Planning Results

You can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent network
construction.
10.15.1 Print Suggestions

The appearance of a map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects included
in the map window. On the U-Net, objects are arranged in layers. The top layers on the map can
be clearly displayed and printed. The visibility of the bottom layers depends on the definition
and transparency of the top layers.
On the U-Net, the visible objects (such as sites, cells, prediction results, and capacity simulation
results) on the Data tab page are more clearly displayed than the visible objects on the Geo tab
page.
You are advised to arrange layers on the Geo tab page in the following sequence from top to
bottom. Thus, the vector layer can be clearly printed.
l
Points (vector)
Highways and lines (vector)
Geographic data about clutter classes (transparent grid)
Satellite maps or geographic data about clutter heights (non-transparent)

NOTE
For the methods of selecting display objects and setting the display sequence, see 10.6 Setting Layer Display
Properties. For the methods of setting the color, transparency, and shading effect, see 3.3.5 Setting Display
Parameters of Geographic Data.
10.15.2 Printing Maps

Before printing a map, you can set the print properties such as print area and print layout based
on the actual requirements. After making the settings, you can select a printer to print the map.
Context
Before printing a map, you can set print properties and preview the print effect.
l
You can print either an entire map or a part of a map.
You can use the default print layout or change it as required.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

577
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Print layout involves setting the scaling, selecting the ruler, legend, and area, adding a title
or mark, and setting the size, source, orientation, and margin of the paper.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the print layout.
1.
Choose File > Print Setting. The Print Setting dialog box is displayed.
2.
Select the target print template in the Print Template area.

For detailed operations on print templates, see 10.15.3 Customizing a Print Template.
3.
Set print properties in the Print Setting area.

For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print
Properties.
4.
Preview the print effect in the Preview area.
Step 2 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Printer to set the printer, print area, and the number of
copies to print.
You can select a PDF printer to print the map as a .pdf file.
Step 3 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Print or choose File > Print to print.
The U-Net supports printing a map into several pages. When the size of the map exceeds the
paper size, the system automatically prints it into several pages.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
Export the print template

After setting the print layout, click Export in the Print Setting dialog box to export the
print properties of the selected print template as a .cfg configuration file for future use.
Import the print template

Click Import to import the print template.
10.15.3 Customizing a Print Template

The system provides three types of pre-defined print templates. If these print templates cannot
meet your requirements, you can customize a print template.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose File > Print Setting. The PrintSetting dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click Add to create a print template.
The system automatically creates a print template with the default setting in the Print
Template area.
Step 3 Modify the properties of the new print template.
For details, see 10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties.
Step 4 Optional: Click Export to export the parameters of the selected template into a .cfg
configuration file for future use.
----End
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

578
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Follow-up Procedure
l
Delete a print template.

You can click Delete to delete a selected template. However, you cannot delete the last
template.
Import a print template.

1.
Click Import. The Open dialog box is displayed.
2.
Select the configuration file (in .cfg format) of the print template.
3.
Click Open.
NOTE
If the name of the print template to be imported is the same as that of an existing template, the system
displays a prompt asking you whether to overwrite the existing template.
10.16 Calibrating Propagation Models

You can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path loss
matrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value.
10.16.1 Importing DT Data

The U-Net enables you to import DT data for calibrating propagation models.
Prerequisites
l
Currently, the U-Net supports only the DT data in .txt, .xls and .csv files exported by using
the GENEX Probe.
For CDMA networks, the U-Net does not support the functions such as importing and
filtering DT data.
DT data is classified into two types: Drive Test and CW Measurement.
This section describes how to import CW Measurement data. The method of importing
Drive Test data is similar to that of importing CW Measurement data.
Context
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement.
Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu.
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file format and the file to be imported.
Step 5 Click Open. The Import File dialog box is displayed.
Step 6 Set import parameters.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

579
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
l Import Drive Test data. For parameter description, see 10.17.7 Parameters for Importing
Drive Test Data.
l Import CW data. For parameter description, see 10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW
Measurement Data.
Step 7 Click Import to start importing DT data.
l In the process of data importing, the system displays prompts in the Event Viewer window.
In this case, pay attention to the prompts.
l After the data import is complete, the DT data file is displayed under the CW
Measurement > Sitex_x node on the navigation tree.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l
View and edit a DT site.

In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose Open
Table from the shortcut menu. In the displayed table, you can view and edit DT site
properties or delete a single DT site. For parameter description, see 10.17.9 Parameters
for Viewing DT Point Information.
Delete a DT file.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose
Delete from the shortcut menu.
Move a DT site in the map window.

You can directly select a DT site in the map window and then drag it.
Set the display effect of a DT site.

In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Choose Display Setting from the
shortcut menu.
For parameter description, see 10.17.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties
of DT Points.
10.16.2 Filtering DT Data

After the DT data is imported, you can filter data according to the cell features so that you can
filter out the DT points that are incorrect or not required. The U-Net supports filtering based on
the level, the distance between the DT point and the cell, the azimuth of the sector, and the clutter
class.
Prerequisites
l
The DT data is imported.
This section describes how to filter CW Measurement data. The method of filtering Drive
Test data is similar to that of filtering CW Measurement data.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

580
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 3 Choose Filter from the shortcut menu. The Filter dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Set filtering conditions.
NOTE
The drive test data can be filtered by Clutter only.
l Distance area, set the maximum and minimum distance between DT points and the cell.
If the distance between a DT point and the cell is within the range of [maximum, minimum],
the DT point is not filtered out.
l Measurement area, set the maximum and minimum receive level of DT points.
If the receive level of a DT point is within the range of [maximum, minimum], the DT point
is not filtered out.
l Azimuth area, set the azimuth of the sector. The azimuth is the angle between the DT point
and the north direction of the map.
You can set multiple filtering conditions related to the azimuth. In the Azimuth List list, the
data within the range of [Start,End] is not filtered out.
l In the Clutter area, select a clutter class.
The DT points related to the selected clutter class is not filtered out.
Select All: Select clutter types in batches.
Select None: Clear clutter types in batches.
For details about the parameters, see 10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data.
Step 5 Determine whether to select Delete Outside Points.
If you select this option, the system deletes the information about the DT points that are filtered
out; if you do not select this option, the system just hides the information about the DT points
that are filtered out in the filtering results.
Step 6 Click OK to filter the DT data.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the filtering, you can view the filtering results.
1.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
2.
Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
3.
Check the filtering results.
10.16.3 Filtering DT Data in Batches

This section describes how to filter drive test (DT) data in batches. You can filter DT data by
cell to view the required data of cells.
Prerequisites
1.
2.
The DT data has been imported.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

581
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Procedure
Step 2 On the displayed Data tab page, choose Drive Test > DT data file in the navigation tree.
NOTE
The U-Net can filter DT data that is exported to a file in .txt, .xls, or .csv format using the GENEX Probe.
Step 3 Right-click the selected DT file and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The DT data
Step 4 You can perform the following operations as required.
If...
Then...
You want to view the data of a cell
In the DT data window, right-click a cell

whose data needs to be viewed and choose
Filter by Selection from the shortcut menu.
The data of only the selected cell is displayed
in the DT data window.
You want to view the data of other cells

except for the selected cell
In the DT data window, right-click the cell

whose data does not need to be viewed and
choose Filter Excluding Selection from the
shortcut menu. The data of all cells except for
the selected cell is displayed in the DT data
window.
You want to view the data of one or more cells
1. Select the cells that need to be displayed

from the Serving Cell drop-down list box
in the DT data window.
2. Click OK. The data of the selected cells is
displayed in the DT data window.
NOTE
You can right-click in the DT data window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu to remove
the filter effect.
----End
10.16.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CW

Measurement Data
Common propagation models cannot meet the requirements of actual networking scenarios that
feature complicated terrain conditions. To prevent the great path loss error caused by using a
common propagation model for calculation, you must adjust the coefficients of the propagation
model before service planning. In this way, you can obtain a propagation model suitable for the
actual network environment. Currently, the U-Net enables you to calibrate only the SPM2G,
SPM900 and Volcano propagation models.
Prerequisites
The CW Measurement data is imported.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

582
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Context
The purpose of propagation model calibration is to optimize the coefficients of a propagation
model by using the actual CW measurement data. The current U-Net supports propagation
calibration based on the CW measurement data only.
The common counters for analyzing the calibration results are as follows:
l
Average error: Average value of the prediction error.
Standard deviation: Mean square of the difference between the prediction error and the
average error.
Correlation coefficient: indicates the correlation between the actual CW measurement data
and the data calculated by the propagation model.
Prediction error indicates the error between the CW measurement data and the data calculated
by the propagation model.
If the standard deviation and average error of the calibration result are small, it indicates that the
calibrated propagation model matches the actual environment.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement.
Step 3 Choose Automatically Calibrate from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Form dialog box is
displayed.
Step 4 Select the propagation model to be calibrated in Select Propagation Model.
Step 5 Select the CW file for propagation model calibration in Select Measurement File.
Step 6 Set the parameters for calibrating the propagation model in Calibrate Limitation.
l Selecting (clearing)Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the impact of the clutter factor is
considered.
If this option is selected, the loss of each clutter class is calibrated.
l Set the standard deviation in Standard Deviation. The default value is 8 dB.
Usually, the value of this parameter is set to 8 dB in the case of flat areas and to 11 dB in the
case of hilly areas.
l Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability. The default value
is 75%.
Step 7 Select the coefficients of the propagation model to be calibrated.
You can calibrate the coefficients of the propagation model one by one until you obtain the
desired propagation model. Alternatively, you can also calibrate all the coefficients at a time.
Step 8 Click Calibrate to start the calibration.
After the calibration, the Result window is displayed.
Step 9 Query the calibration results.
For detailed description of parameters, see 10.17.10 Interface Description: Calibration
Results of Propagation Models.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

583
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
If...
Then...
The calibrated propagation model meets

your requirements
Click Commit to make the calibration results

take effect.
The calibrated propagation model does not

meet your requirements
Click Next to select other coefficients for

calibration until you obtain the desired
propagation model.
The calibration operations are the same as
Step 7 to Step 9.
----End
10.16.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation Model

To check whether the parameter settings of the propagation model are appropriate, use the
propagation model to calculate the signal strength at each drive test point, and compare the
calculation results with the actual drive test results.
Prerequisites
The CW measurement or Drive Test data has been imported.
NOTE
If you need to check the calibration effect of the propagation model, the following prerequisites must be met:
l
The propagation model has been calibrated.
The calibration of the propagation model has taken effect.
Context
This section uses the CW measurement data as an example.
Procedure
Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
Step 3 Choose Calculate Signal Levels from the shortcut menu.
Note the messages displayed in the Event Viewer window.
Step 4 After the calculation is completed, In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement >
Sitex_x > drive test file.
Step 5 Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.
l The table lists the actual signal strength at each drive test point, signal strength at each drive
test point calculated by the calibrated propagation model, and the difference between the two
values.
l For details about the parameters in the table, see 10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point
Information.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

584
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Step 6 Optional: Display the drive test results in a graphic window.

1.
In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.
2.
Choose Open the Analysis Tool from the shortcut menu.

l The system displays a graphic window, which lists the drive test results.
l You can select a display object from the drop-down list in the upper right corner of the
graphic window, for example, the actual DT data M(dBm), calculated theoretical data
P(dBm), and the difference value Error(P-M)(dB) between the two. In addition, you
can view the CDF curve P-M(CDF) for the DT data and theoretical data M,P(dBm) or
the difference value.
l When you click a drive test point in the graphic window, the information about the drive
test point is displayed in the GIS window and the table.
----End
10.17 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.
10.17.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth

This section describes the parameters for connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files.
You can refer to this section when connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files in the
Earth View dialog box.
Parameter
Description
Value
Sites
Indicates whether to export information about

base stations to the Google Earth.
By default, this
option is selected.
Export Sites
Indicates the base stations to be displayed.

Full Map.
You can select all the base stations in the

entire map or the base stations in a selected
polygon. You can also select only a specified
base station.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Transceiver Radius
Indicates the radius of cell icons in Google

Earth.
The value range is

from 1 to 1,000 and
the unit is meter.
50.
Polygons
Indicates whether to export polygons to the

Google Earth.
By default, this
option is selected.
Predictions
Indicates whether to export the prediction

results to the Google Earth.
By default, this
option is selected.
Transparency
Indicates the transparency of the prediction

results on the Google Earth.

75%.

585
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Value
Simulation Users
Indicates whether to export the capacity

simulation results to the Google Earth.
By default, this
option is selected.
Drive Test
Indicates whether to export DT data to the

Google Earth.
By default, this
option is selected.
CW Measurement
Indicates whether to export CW test data to

the Google Earth.
By default, this
option is selected.
10.17.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields

This section describes the parameters for setting custom fields. You can refer to this section
when setting parameters for custom fields in the Field Define window.
Parameters in the Field Define Window

Parameter
Description
Group
This parameter is not in use. You do not need to set it.
Legend
Indicates the name of a custom field.
Type
Indicates the data type of a custom field.
Size
If Text is selected as the data type, the Size box is available, where you
can set the text length.
The value range is from 1 to 300.
If you select other data types, the Size box is unavailable.
Default Value
Indicates the default value of a custom field.
Choice List
Indicates other values of a custom field.

l After you set Choice List, a drop-down list is provided for the field.
Then, you can set the field to Default Value or values in Choice
List.
l When entering values in Choice List, press Enter after entering a
value to enter another value.
l If True/False is selected as the data type, the default values in
Choice List are True and False, which cannot be modified.
10.17.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations

This section describes the parameters for searching for base stations. You can refer to this section
when searching for base stations in the Find Transceiver dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

586
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Filter
Area
Displays the available area for the filtering.
First row of
parameters
Indicates the first filtering condition.

l Select a network parameter from the first dropdown list.
l Select an operation relation from the second dropdown list.
l Type a value in the text box.
The filtering condition takes effect only after the
corresponding check box is selected.
Second row of
parameters
Indicates the second filtering condition.

l Select an antenna- or equipment-related parameter
from the first drop-down list.
l Select an operation relation from the second dropdown list.
l Select an antenna- or equipment-related value from
the third drop-down list.
The filtering condition takes effect only after the
corresponding check box is selected.
Condition
Indicates the relation between the two filtering

conditions.
l And
l Or
Result
Displays the searching result. The result is valid only

after you click Find.
10.17.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties

This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of base stations. You can
refer to this section when setting the base station display properties in the Display Field dialog
box.
Parameters in the Display Field dialog box

Table 10-3 Parameters on the Label Display tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Available Fields
Lists the parameters that can be displayed in the map window.

587
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Selected Fields
Lists the selected parameters. The selected parameters are

You can select the parameters to be displayed in the map
window by using >, >>, <, and << buttons.
Table 10-4 Parameters on the Group By Display tab page

Parameter
Description
Display Type
Indicates the group type.

l If Automatic is selected, the U-Net automatically sets
different colors for displaying each transceiver after you
in the U-Net main window.
click
l If Default is selected, the default display settings are used
for all transceivers.
l If GroupBy is selected, the display style is set for the
transceivers that are grouped by the specified type.
You can right-click Transceiver and choose Group By
from the shortcut menu on the Network tab page in the
browse window to specify the type by which the
transceivers are grouped.
NOTE
If transceivers have been grouped, the items in the table are
consistent with the group. When Group By is selected for the
first time, the system automatically sets a color for each group.
l If DisCreteValue is selected, the transceivers are

grouped by certain property such as name and you can set
the display style for each transceiver group separately.
In addition, you need to select a property from the Field
drop-down list.
l If ValueIntervals is selected, the display style is set for
the transceivers within the property ranges.
In addition, you need to select a property from the Field
drop-down list and set Min Value and Max Value in the
display style list.
NOTE
The method for setting the display style of Site is similar to that of
Transceiver. The grouping types available are only Default and
GroupBy.
Field
Indicates the NE property field.

This parameter is valid when Display Type is
DisCreteValue or ValueIntervals.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

588
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Indicates the legend cell.
Double-click the legend cell. In the displayed Display dialog

box, set parameters such as the NE display color.
For example,
Parameters in the Display dialog box describes the

parameters.
.
Legend
Indicates the legend description.
Actions
l You can select Shading for the U-Net to automatically

set the display properties according to the step length set
by users.
l You can select Export Legend to export the preset
display properties.
l You can select Import Legend to import the preset
display properties.
Parameters in the Display dialog box

Table 10-5 Parameters on the Symbol Style tab page
Parameter
Description
Color
Indicates the display color of base stations or transceivers.
Selected Color
Indicates the display color of the selected base stations or

transceivers.
Size
Indicates the display size of base stations or transceivers.
Symbol
Indicates the display shape of base stations or transceivers.
Example
Previews the display of base stations or transceivers.
Table 10-6 Parameters on the Font tab page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Color
Indicates the display color of parameters related to base

stations or cells.
Font
Indicates the display font of parameters related to base

stations or cells.
Size
Indicates the display size of parameters related to base

stations or cells.
Style
Indicates the display style of parameters related to base

stations or cells.
589
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Example
Previews the display of parameters related to base stations or

cells.
10.17.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Data

This section describes the parameters for importing or exporting data such as site data, cell data,
and carrier data. You can refer to this section when exporting data in the Data Export dialog
box or importing data in the Data Import dialog box.
Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Configuration File
Indicates a configuration file template. Users can save the

specified export fields as a template and import this template
in the future by loading.
l Save: saves a template.
l Load: loads a template.
Header
Indicates whether to export a field name.
Field Separator
Indicates the method of separating fields.

l <Tab>: Separates fields with tab characters.
l ,: Separates fields with commas.
l ;: Separates fields with semicolons.
l <Space>: Separates fields with space characters.
Available Fields
Displays the existing fields in the current project.
Exported Fields
Displays the fields to be exported to the station data file.
Preview
Previews the data export effect.
Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box

Parameter
Description
Configuration File
Indicates the path of a configuration file.

A configuration file saves the field mapping information.
l Click Save to save the current field mapping information
as a configuration file.
l Click Load to import an existing configuration file. Then,
the U-Net can use the existing field mapping information.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

590
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
1st. Data Row
Indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in this
row and the subsequent rows is imported.
Field Separator
Indicates the method of separating fields.

l <Tab>: Separates fields with tab characters.
l ,: Separates fields with commas.
l ;: Separates fields with semicolons.
l <Space>: Separates fields with space characters.
Update Records
Indicates whether to overwrite the existing data in the project.

For example, a site with Site Name set to xxx exists in the UNet. A site with Site Name set to xxx also exists in the file to
be imported. If you select Update Records, the parameters
related to the site xxx will be updated.
Field
Mappin
g
Source
Indicates the fields of the file to be imported.
Destination
Indicates the existing fields that match the fields of the file to
be imported.
If no match field is available, <IGNORE> is displayed. If a
field of the file to be imported matches an existing field, the
existing field name is displayed.
l The system automatically matches the fields in the file to
be imported with the fields provided by the U-Net. If a
field in the file to be imported does not match any field in
the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If a field in the file to be
imported matches a field in the U-Net, the field name in
the U-Net is displayed.
l You can click in the Destination row, and then manually
select a field from the drop-down list box to match the field
in the Source row.
10.17.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties

This section describes the parameters for setting the print properties. You can refer to this section
when setting the print properties in the Print Setting dialog box.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Parameter
Description
Print Template area
The existing print templates are listed in this area.
Add
Enables you to add a print template.
Delete
Enables you to delete a selected print template.

591
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Page
tab
page
Name
Indicates the template name.
Orientation
Indicates the page orientation.

l Portrait: prints a document with the short edge of the paper
at the top of the page.
l Landscape: prints a document with the long edge of the
paper at the top of the page.
Paper
Indicates the paper size and source.

l Size: indicates the paper size.
l Source: indicates the paper source.
Scaling
Indicates the map scale.

l Fit to Page: indicates that the selected map area is
automatically adjusted to a proper size.
l Scale: indicates that the selected map area is printed
according to the typed scale.
Margins
Indicates the page margins.

The unit is millimeter.
Com
pone
nts
tab
page
Map
Rulers: indicates whether to print the map ruler.

Select the print area in Print Area.
Legend
Indicates whether to print the legend information.

Position: indicates the legend position.
Comments
Indicates whether to add comments.

l Position: indicates the position of the selected object.
l Comments are typed in the text box.
l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is
displayed on the map.
l Properties: indicates the properties such as content and
character formats.
Hea
der/
Foot
er
tab
page
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Logo1 and Logo2
Indicates whether to add logos. you can add two logos at most.
You can click Properties to set the size of the logo. The size unit
is millimeter. You can also click File to select the file that
contains the logo.

592
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Title
Indicates whether the title is displayed on the map.

l The contents of the title are typed in the text box.
character formats.
Header/Footer
Indicates whether to add the header and footer.

l The contents of the header or footer are typed in the text box.
character formats.
Prev
iew
area
Import
Enables you to import an existing print setting template.
Export
Enables you to export the current print settings as a template.
Printer
Enables you to set a printer.
Preview
Enables you to preview.
Print
Enables you to perform a print task.
NOTE
The default values of the preceding parameters vary with the templates.
10.17.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data

This section describes the parameters for importing drive test (DT) data. You can refer to this
section when setting parameters in the Import File dialog box to import DT data.
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Indicates the path of a

configuration file.
l Click Save to save the current field

mapping information as a
configuration file.
A configuration file saves

the field mapping
information.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
l Click Load to import an existing

configuration file. Then, the U-Net
can use the existing field mapping
information.

593
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
1st. Data Row
Indicates the starting row of In normal cases, the first row in the
the data for import. Data in imported file is a title. Therefore,
this row and the subsequent import the file from its second row.
rows is imported.
Field Separator
Indicates the method of

separating fields.
l <Tab>: Separates fields

with tab characters.
l ,: Separates fields with
commas.
l ;: Separates fields with
semicolons.
l <Space>: Separates
fields with space
characters.
Receiver
Height
Height of a receiver.
The default value is 2, and the unit is

meter.
Gain
Gain of a receiver.

dB.
Loss
Path loss of a receiver.

dB.
Network type.
Network Type
This parameter is
configurable only for a
multi-mode network.
Match Mode
This parameter is displayed

only when Network Type
is set to GSM. The default
value is BCCH+BSIC.
You can select LAC+CI or BCCH

+BSIC for importing the DT data as
required.
l Select BCCH+BSIC
when DT files are
generated using the
Assistant or Probe, and
BCCH and BSIC in the
source DT files
uniquely identify a
GSM cell.
l Select LAC+CI when
DT files are generated
using the TEMS, and
LAC and CI in the
source DT files
uniquely identify a
GSM cell.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

594
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Config Columns
When you click Config

l The drop-down list box in the
Columns, the Character
dialog box contains the field names
Column Mapping Form
in the to-be-imported DT file.
dialog box is displayed, in l You can manually set the
which you can set the
mappings between the field names
mappings between the field
in the U-Net and those in the DT
names in the imported DT
file.
file and those in the U-Net.
l Mappings of the Longitude and
Latitude fields must be set
irrespective of the RAT.
l For the LTE network, the Signal
Level and PCI fields are
mandatory in the dialog box. You
must set the mappings between the
two fields and those in the DT file.
Otherwise, DT data cannot be
imported. The PCI field in the
dialog box needs to map the PCI
field in the DT file for the U-Net to
locate cells.
l For the GSM network, the BCCH,
BSIC, and Signal Level fields are
mandatory in the dialog box. You
must set the mappings between the
three fields and those in the DT
file. Otherwise, DT data cannot be
imported. The BCCH field in the
dialog box needs to map the
BCCH field in the DT file for the
U-Net to locate the ARFCNs in the
DT file, and the BSIC field in the
dialog box needs to map the
BSIC field in the DT file for the UNet to locate cells.
l For the UMTS network, the Signal
Level and Scrambling Code
fields are mandatory in the dialog
box. You must set the mappings
between the two fields and those in
the DT file. Otherwise, DT data
cannot be imported. The
Scrambling Code field in the UNet needs to map the Scrambling
Code field in the DT file for the UNet to locate cells.
l The U-Net automatically places
the DT data under the
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

595
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
corresponding cells based on the
scrambling code.
Field
Mapping
Source
Indicates the fields of the

file to be imported.
Destinati
on
Indicates the existing fields

that match the fields of the
Lazy Import
Delayed import.
The system automatically matches the

fields in the DT data with the fields
provided by the U-Net. If a field in the
DT data file does not match any field
in the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If
a field in the DT data file matches a
field in the U-Net, the field name in
the U-Net is displayed.
If this option is selected, data is not
imported immediately after you click
Import. The data is read after the DT
feature database is verified.
10.17.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data

This section describes the parameters for importing CW Measurement data. You can refer to
this section when setting parameters in the Import File dialog box for importing CW
Measurement data.
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Configuration File
Indicates the path of a

configuration file.
l Click Save to save the current field

mapping information as a
configuration file.
A configuration file saves

the field mapping
information.
1st. Data Row
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Indicates the starting row

of the data for import. Data
in this row and the
subsequent rows is
imported.
l Click Load to import an existing

configuration file. Then, the U-Net
can use the existing field mapping
information.
In normal cases, the first row in the
imported file is a title. Therefore,
import the file from its second row.

596
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Field Separator
Indicates the method of

separating fields.
l <Tab>: Separates
fields with tab
characters.
l ,: Separates fields with
commas.
l ;: Separates fields with
semicolons.
l <Space>: Separates
fields with space
characters.
Reference
Cell
Receiver
Field
Mapping
Name
Indicates the name of the

transceiver corresponding
to the CW Measurement
data.
CW Measurement data will be

imported into the selected transceiver.
Frequenc
y
Indicates the frequency of

the transceiver.
Height
Height of a receiver.

meter.
Gain
Gain of a receiver.

dB.
Loss
Path loss of a receiver.

dB.
Source
Indicates the fields of the

l The system automatically matches

the fields in the file to be imported
with the fields provided by the UNet. If a field in the file to be
imported does not match any field
in the U-Net, IGNORE is
displayed. If a field in the file to be
imported matches a field in the UNet, the field name in the U-Net is
displayed.
in the
l You can click
Destination row, and then
manually select a field from the
drop-down list box to match the
field in the Source row.
The Latitude, Longitude, and Signal
Level fields are mandatory. These
fields must be mapped with the
corresponding fields in the U-Net.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

597
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Destinati
on
Description
Remarks
Indicates the existing fields

that match the fields of the
Otherwise, importing the CW data

fails.
10.17.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information

This section describes the parameters for viewing DT point information.
Parameter
Description
ID
Indicates the ID of a DT point. This is an internal identification.
Longitude
Indicates the longitude of a DT point.

Manual modification is allowed.
Latitude
Indicates the latitude of a DT point.

Height(m)
Indicates the height where a DT point is located.
Clutter
Indicates the clutter ID and type of a DT point.
Clutter Height
Indicates the clutter height where a DT point is located.
Serving cell
Indicates the cell where the drive test point is located.

The parameter exists only in the drive test data.
Distance(m)
Indicates the distance from a DT point to the transceiver that the

DT point belongs to.
M(dBm)
Indicates the signal strength measured at a DT point.

Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

598
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Description
P(dBm)
Indicates the signal strength calculated by the calibrated

propagation model in a DT point.
Error(P-M)(dB)
Indicates the difference between the measured value and the

calculated value.
10.17.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation

Models
This section describes the interface of propagation model calibration results, which helps you
to learn the meaning of each area in the window.
Figure 10-8 shows the interface of propagation model calibration results.
Figure 10-8 Interface of propagation model calibration results
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

599
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
No.
Name
Description
(1)
Calibration result counter

area
This area lists the statistical counters of calibration

results.
l Average indicates the average error of the
calibration.
l Standard Deviation indicates the standard
deviation of the calibration.
l Cor.Coeff.: Indicates the correlation coefficient.
If the correlation coefficient is greater, you can
infer that the DT data is close to the calculation
results of the propagation model. The value range
is from 0 to 1.
l RMS: Indicates the root mean square of the
calibration.
Calibration result table

area
(2)
This area lists the coefficient values before and after

the calibration.
If a coefficient value changes after the calibration,
this coefficient is marked in blue.
(3)
Calibration result chart

area
This area directly displays the propagation model

calibration results in a coordinate chart.
l The x-coordinate indicates the propagation
distance.
l The y-coordinate indicates the path loss value.
l Data in red indicates the actual path loss value,
which is obtained on the basis of the DT data or
CW data.
l Data in green indicates the path loss value
calculated by the propagation model before the
calibration.
l Data in blue indicates the path loss value
calculated by the propagation model after the
calibration.
Button area
(4)
This area provides two buttons, with which you can

make the calibration results take effect and perform
further calibration.
10.17.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data

This section describes the parameters related to the filtering of the drive test (DT) or continuous
wave (CW) data. You can refer to this section when setting relevant parameters in the Filter
dialog box to import the DT or CW data.
NOTE
The drive test data can be filtered by Clutter only.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

600
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Value
Distance
area, where
data is
filtered
according to
the distance
between the
DT point
and the
serving cell
Min Distance

distance.
The unit is meter.
Max Distance
Indicates the maximum

distance.
The unit is meter.
Measureme
nt area,
where data
is filtered
according to
the receive
level of the
DT point.
Min
Measurement

receive level.
The unit is dBm.
Max
Measurement
Indicates the maximum

receive level.
The unit is dBm.
Azimuth
area, where
data is
filtered
according to
the cell
azimuth
Start Azimuth
Indicates the start value of

the azimuth interval.
The unit is degree. The

value must be an integer.
End Azimuth
Indicates the end value of

the azimuth interval.
The unit is degree. The

value must be an integer.
Add
Adds an azimuth interval.
Azimuth List
Lists all azimuth intervals.
Remove
Removes the selected

azimuth interval.
Indicates all the

clutter classes in
the geographic
data.
You can select the clutter

classes through the check
boxes.
By default, all clutter classes

are selected.
Select All/
Select None
Select All/Select None:

Select or clear clutter types
in batches.
Clutter area,
where data
is filtered
according to
the clutter
class.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Description
The DT data related to the

selected clutter class is not
filtered out.

601
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Parameter
Delete
Outside
Points
Description
Value
l If this option is selected,

the system deletes the
information about the
DT points that are
filtered out.
By default, this option is not

selected.
l If this option is not

selected, the system just
hides the information
about the DT points that
are filtered out in the
filtering results.
10.17.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points

This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of DT points.
Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points

Parameter
Description
Display Type
Indicates the display type.
Field Type
Indicates the type of the field to be displayed.
Color
Indicates the color for highlighting a field within a certain value

range.
Min
Indicates the minimum value of a field to be displayed.
Max
Indicates the maximum value of a field to be displayed.
Legend
Indicates the value range of a field to be displayed.

To display the legends in this row, select the checkbox on the right
of the row, for example,
Fast Display
Indicates the fast display mode.

l If a large amount of DT data is available, you are advised to
select this option to quickly update the DT data displayed in
the map window.
l You can only set the display color and size for DT points after
selecting this option.
Add to Legend
Indicates whether to add legend information to the legend

window.
You can choose Window > Legend to open the legend
information window.
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

602
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
11
Acronyms and Abbreviations
This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.
Acronym/Abbreviation
Full Name
A
ACP
Automatic Cell Planning
AMS
Adaptive MIMO Switching
ARFCN
Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
B
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
BER
Bit Error Rate
BLER
Block Error Rate
C
C/A
Carrier-to-Adjacent (Ratio)
C/I
Carrier-to-Interference (Ratio)
CDF
Cumulative Distribution Function
CM
Cubic Metric
CME
Configuration Management Express
CW
Continuous Wave
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
DEM
Digital Elevation Model
DL
Downlink
DTM
Digital Terrain Model
DT
Drive Test

603
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Full Name
F
FDD
Frequency Division Duplex
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
G
GIS
Geographic Information System
GUI
Graphical User Interface
H
HARQ
Hybrid Automatic Retransmission Request
HICH
Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel
HO
Handover
HR
Half Rate
HS-DSCH
High Speed Downlink Shared Channel
HSN
Hopping Sequence Number
HS-SCCH
High Speed Shared Control Channel
I
ICIC
Inter-Cell Interference Coordination
IoT
Interference over Thermal
IP
Internet Protocol
IBCA
Interference Based Channel Allocation
L
LTE
Long Term Evolution
M
MBMS
Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service
MCS
Modulation and Coding Scheme
MIMO
Multiple Input Multiple Output
N
Ncs
Cyclic Shifts
NF
Noise Figure
O
OFDM
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

604
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Full Name
P
PN
Pseudo-Noise
PAPR
Peak Average Power Ratio
PBCH
Physical Broadcast Channel
PCFICH
Physical Control Format Indicator Channel
PCI
Physical Cell ID
PDCCH
Physical Downlink Control Channel
PDF
Probability Distribution Function
PDSCH
Physical Downlink Shared Channel
PHICH
Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel
PMCH
Physical Multicast Channel
PRACH
Physical Random Access Channel
PUCCH
Physical Uplink Control Channel
PUSCH
Physical Uplink Shared Channel
Q
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
R
RA
Random Access
RB
Resource Block
RE
Resource Element
RRM
Radio Resource Management
RRU
Remote Radio Unit
RSCP
Received Signal Code Power
RSRP
Reference Signal Received Power
RSRQ
Reference Signal Received Quality
RSSI
Received Signal Strength Indicator
RxLev
Received signal level
RxQual
Received Signal Quality
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)

605
GENEX U-Net
User Guide
Full Name
SC-FDMA
Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
SFBC
Spatial Frequency Block Code
SINR
Signal-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio
SPM
Standard Propagation Model
T
TA
Tracking Area
TCH
Traffic Channel
TCP
Transfer Control Protocol
TDD
Time Division Duplex
TMA
Tower Mounted Amplifier
TS
Timeslot
TTI
Transmission Time Interval
TSC
Training Sequence Code
U
UE
User Equipment
UL
Uplink
V
VAMOS
Voice services over Adaptive Multi-user channels on One

Slot
Z
ZC
Issue 01 (2012-08-10)
Zadoff-Chu Sequence

606

Genex U-Net User Guide (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Genex U-Net User Guide (PDF) - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENEX U-Net

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

About This Document

1.3 Main Window of the U-Net

The content descriptions are changed.

2.3 Installing a License

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas

6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report

Parameters for Setting Parameters of TRXs in

The content of the document is optimized.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

8 Multi-Mode Network Planning

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

Book titles are in italics.

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italics.

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

2 Installing the U-Net Software...................................................................................................14

3 LTE-FDD Network Planning....................................................................................................23

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

3.5.1 Importing Antenna Data..........................................................................................................................93

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.......................................................................206

4 LTE-TDD Network Planning..................................................................................................273

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.......................................................................319

5 GSM Network Planning.......................................................................................................... 324

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.........................................................................................................363

6 UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................................387

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

6.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................407

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.....................................................473